CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES INC
10-Q, 1995-05-09
TELEPHONE COMMUNICATIONS (NO RADIOTELEPHONE)
Previous: CENTRAL TELEPHONE CO, 10-Q, 1995-05-09
Next: CHRYSLER FINANCIAL CORP, 8-K, 1995-05-09




                              UNITED STATES

                    SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

                         Washington, D.C. 20549

                               FORM 10-Q


   [X] Quarterly Report Pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities
                          Exchange Act of 1934

              For the quarterly period ended March 31, 1995

                                  or

   [ ] Transition Report Pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities
                          Exchange Act of 1934

                    Commission File Number:  1-7784


                  CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
        (Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)


                 Louisiana                       72-0651161
      (State or other jurisdiction of         (I.R.S. Employer
       incorporation or organization)        Identification No.)

          100 Century Park Drive, Monroe, Louisiana  71203
        (Address of principal executive offices)  (Zip Code)


       Registrant's telephone number, including area code: (318) 388-9500

       Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all
    reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the
    Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or
    for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file
    such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing
    requirements for the past 90 days.      [X] Yes   [ ] No


       As of April 30, 1995, there were 58,321,488 shares of common stock
    outstanding.

<PAGE>

                 CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.

                        TABLE OF CONTENTS



                                                           Page No.
                                                           --------
      Part I.  Financial Information:

         Consolidated Statements of Income--Three Months
           Ended March 31, 1995 and 1994 . . . . . . . . . . . 3

         Consolidated Balance Sheets--March 31, 1995 and
           December 31, 1994 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

         Consolidated Statements of Stockholders' Equity--
           Three Months Ended March 31, 1995 and 1994  . . . . 5

         Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows--
           Three Months Ended March 31, 1995 and 1994  . . . . 6

         Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements  . . . . .7-8

         Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial
           Condition and Results of Operations . . . . . . . .9-14

      Part II. Other Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

      Signature  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

      Index to Exhibits  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

                                    2
<PAGE>

                    PART I.  FINANCIAL INFORMATION

                  CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
                   CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME
                             (UNAUDITED)


                                                        Three months
                                                       ended March 31
                                                       --------------
                                                        1995     1994
                                                       ------   ------
                                                 (Dollars, except per share
                                                    amounts, and shares
                                                  expressed in thousands)

      OPERATING REVENUES
         Telephone                                   $100,276   91,770
         Mobile Communications                         42,149   29,210
                                                      -------  -------
            Total operating revenues                  142,425  120,980
                                                      -------  -------
      OPERATING EXPENSES
         Cost of sales and operating expenses          69,016   63,661
         Depreciation and amortization                 25,853   21,433
                                                      -------  -------
            Total operating expenses                   94,869   85,094
                                                      -------  -------
      OPERATING INCOME                                 47,556   35,886
                                                      -------  -------
      OTHER INCOME (EXPENSE)
         Interest expense                             (11,396)  (8,502)
         Income from unconsolidated cellular entities   4,724    2,564
         Gain on sales of assets                        5,909        -
         Minority interest                             (1,946)    (698)
         Other income and expense                         848      889
                                                      -------  -------
            Total other income (expense)               (1,861)  (5,747)
                                                      -------  -------
      INCOME BEFORE INCOME TAX EXPENSE                 45,695   30,139

      Income tax expense                               18,695   10,938
                                                      -------  -------
      NET INCOME                                     $ 27,000   19,201
                                                      =======  =======
      PRIMARY EARNINGS PER SHARE                     $    .48      .36
                                                      =======  =======
      FULLY DILUTED EARNINGS PER SHARE               $    .47      .35
                                                      =======  =======
      DIVIDENDS PER COMMON SHARE                     $  .0825    .0800
                                                      =======  =======
      AVERAGE PRIMARY SHARES OUTSTANDING               56,184   52,817
                                                      =======  =======
      AVERAGE FULLY DILUTED SHARES OUTSTANDING         58,660   57,478
                                                      =======  =======

       See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

                                    3
<PAGE>
                       CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
                          CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
                                 (UNAUDITED)


                                                     March 31,  December 31,
                                                       1995         1994
                                                    ----------   ----------
                                                     (Dollars in thousands)
                             ASSETS
      CURRENT ASSETS
      Cash and cash equivalents                   $   10,599        7,154
      Accounts receivable
         Customers, less allowance for doubtful
           accounts of $2,216 and $2,360              39,167       40,824
         Other                                        19,450       23,180
      Materials and supplies, at average cost          6,363        7,090
      Other                                            2,911        2,980
                                                   ---------    ---------
                                                      78,490       81,228
                                                   ---------    ---------
      NET PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT              984,897      947,131
                                                   ---------    ---------
      INVESTMENTS AND OTHER ASSETS
      Excess cost of net assets acquired,
        less accumulated amortization of
        $43,008 and $40,756                          447,293      441,436
      Other                                          181,471      173,458
                                                   ---------    ---------
                                                     628,764      614,894
                                                   ---------    ---------
                                                  $1,692,151    1,643,253
                                                   =========    =========

                         LIABILITIES AND EQUITY

      CURRENT LIABILITIES
      Current maturities of long-term debt        $   14,059       12,718
      Notes payable to banks                         140,000      158,000
      Accounts payable                                59,393       52,331
      Accrued expenses and other liabilities
         Salaries and benefits                        16,091       17,884
         Taxes                                        30,123       16,530
         Interest                                      8,524        8,243
         Other                                         4,001        9,237
      Advance billings and customer deposits          12,014       11,725
                                                   ---------    ---------
                                                     284,205      286,668
                                                   ---------    ---------
      LONG-TERM DEBT                                 427,022      518,603
                                                   ---------    ---------
      DEFERRED CREDITS AND OTHER LIABILITIES         191,876      187,746
                                                   ---------    ---------
      STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY
      Common stock, $1.00 par value, authorized
        100,000,000 shares, issued and outstanding
        58,317,834 and 53,574,361 shares              58,318       53,574
      Paid-in capital                                430,414      319,235
      Retained earnings                              314,198      291,999
      Unearned ESOP shares                           (16,150)     (16,840)
      Preferred stock - non-redeemable                 2,268        2,268
                                                   ---------    ---------
                                                     789,048      650,236
                                                   ---------    ---------
                                                  $1,692,151    1,643,253
                                                   =========    =========

      See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

                                   4
<PAGE>
                     CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
                CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY
                                (UNAUDITED)

                                                         Three months
                                                        ended March 31
                                                         --------------
                                                         1995     1994
                                                        ------   ------
                                                    (Dollars in thousands)

      COMMON STOCK
         Balance at beginning of period               $ 53,574   51,295
         Issuance of common stock for acquisitions           -    2,000
         Issuance of common stock through conversion
           of debentures                                 4,540        -
         Issuance of common stock through dividend
           reinvestment, incentive and benefit plans       204       58
                                                       -------  -------
         Balance at end of period                       58,318   53,353
                                                       -------  -------
      PAID-IN CAPITAL
         Balance at beginning of period                319,235  262,294
         Issuance of common stock for acquisitions           -   50,311
         Issuance of common stock through conversion
           of debentures                               108,596        -
         Issuance of common stock through dividend
           reinvestment, incentive and benefit plans     2,379      819
         Amortization of unearned compensation
           and other                                       204      193
                                                       -------  -------
         Balance at end of period                      430,414  313,617
                                                       -------  -------
      RETAINED EARNINGS
         Balance at beginning of period                291,999  208,945
         Net income                                     27,000   19,201
         Cash dividends declared
            Common stock-$.0825 and $.0800
              per share, respectively                   (4,770)  (4,259)
            Preferred stock                                (31)      (8)
                                                       -------  -------
         Balance at end of period                      314,198  223,879
                                                       -------  -------
      UNEARNED ESOP SHARES
         Balance at beginning of period                (16,840)  (9,220)
         Commitment to ESOP                                  -   (5,000)
         Release of ESOP shares                            690      440
                                                       -------  -------
         Balance at end of period                      (16,150) (13,780)
                                                       -------  -------
      PREFERRED STOCK - NON-REDEEMABLE
         Balance at beginning of period                  2,268      454
         Issuance of preferred stock for acquisition         -    1,875
                                                       -------  -------
         Balance at end of period                        2,268    2,329
                                                       -------  -------
      TOTAL STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY                      $789,048  579,398
                                                       =======  =======

       See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

                                   5

<PAGE>

                   CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
                  CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
                              (UNAUDITED)

                                                             Three months
                                                            ended March 31
                                                            --------------
                                                            1995      1994
                                                           ------   ------
                                                       (Dollars in thousands)
      OPERATING ACTIVITIES
         Net income                                      $ 27,000    19,201
         Adjustments to reconcile net income to
           net cash provided by operating activities:
            Depreciation and amortization                  27,965    24,135
            Deferred income taxes                             747     1,529
            Income from unconsolidated cellular
              entities                                     (4,724)   (2,564)
            Gain on sales of assets                        (5,909)        -
            Changes in current assets and current
              liabilities:
               Decrease in accounts receivable              4,244     1,969
               Increase (decrease) in accounts payable      6,930   (17,234)
               Increase in other accrued taxes             13,500     8,944
               Changes in other current assets and other
                 current liabilities, net                  (5,426)   (3,269)
            Increase in other noncurrent liabilities        3,361       635
            Other, net                                         38      (524)
                                                          -------   -------
               NET CASH PROVIDED BY OPERATING
                 ACTIVITIES                                67,726    32,822
                                                          -------   -------
      INVESTING ACTIVITIES
         Payments for property, plant and equipment       (53,499)  (49,553)
         Acquisitions, net of cash acquired                (6,009)  (53,390)
         Proceeds from sales of assets                     17,922         -
         Investments in unconsolidated cellular
           entities                                        (1,678)     (974)
         Distributions from unconsolidated cellular
           entities                                           436       925
         Purchase of life insurance investment             (4,756)   (6,853)
         Other, net                                          (615)      746
                                                          -------   -------
               NET CASH USED IN INVESTING ACTIVITIES      (48,199) (109,099)
                                                          -------   -------
      FINANCING ACTIVITIES
         Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt           6,498         -
         Payments of long-term debt                        (2,266)  (44,603)
         Notes payable, net                               (18,000)  123,000
         Proceeds from issuance of common stock             2,432       877
         Cash dividends paid                               (4,801)   (4,267)
         Other, net                                            55      (110)
                                                          -------   -------
               NET CASH PROVIDED BY (USED IN)
                 FINANCING ACTIVITIES                     (16,082)   74,897
                                                          -------   -------
      Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash
        equivalents                                         3,445    (1,380)
      Cash and cash equivalents at beginning
        of period                                           7,154     9,777
                                                          -------   -------
      Cash and cash equivalents at end of period         $ 10,599     8,397
                                                          =======   =======
      Supplemental cash flow information:
         Income taxes paid                               $  6,391       878
                                                          =======   ======= 
         Interest paid                                   $ 11,115    10,372
                                                          =======   =======

       See accompanying notes to consolidated financial statements.

                                   6
<PAGE>

                    CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
                NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
                             MARCH 31, 1995
                              (UNAUDITED)


      (1)  Basis of Financial Reporting

         Certain information and footnote disclosures normally included in
      financial statements prepared in accordance with generally accepted
      accounting principles have been condensed or omitted pursuant to rules
      and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission; however, the
      Company believes the disclosures which are made are adequate to make the
      information presented not misleading.  The financial statements and
      footnotes included in this Form 10-Q should be read in conjunction with
      the financial statements and notes thereto included in the Company's
      annual report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 1994.
      Certain 1994 amounts have been reclassified to be consistent with the
      1995 presentation.

         The unaudited financial information for the three months ended March
      31, 1995 and 1994 has not been audited by independent public accountants;
      however, in the opinion of management, all adjustments (which include
      only normal recurring adjustments) necessary to present fairly the
      results of operations for the three-month periods have been included
      therein.  The results of operations for the first three months of the
      year are not necessarily indicative of the results of operations which
      might be expected for the entire year.

      (2)  Net Property, Plant and Equipment

         Net property, plant and equipment is composed of the following:

                                                      March 31,  December 31,
                                                        1995         1994
                                                      ---------  ------------
                                                       (Dollars in thousands)

      Telephone, at original cost                    $1,122,612    1,076,496
      Accumulated depreciation                         (318,479)    (295,255)
                                                      ---------    ---------
                                                        804,133      781,241
                                                      ---------    ---------
      Mobile Communications, at cost                    166,063      152,305
      Accumulated depreciation                          (41,436)     (38,552)
                                                      ---------    ---------
                                                        124,627      113,753
                                                      ---------    ---------
      Other, at cost                                     90,585       85,406
      Accumulated depreciation                          (34,448)     (33,269)
                                                      ---------    ---------
                                                         56,137       52,137
                                                      ---------    ---------
                                                     $  984,897      947,131
                                                      =========    =========

      (3)  Conversion of Debentures

         In February 1995 all $115.0 million of Century's outstanding 6%
      convertible debentures due 2007 were converted into Century common stock
      by the debenture holders at a conversion price of $25.33 per share.

                                    7

<PAGE>

      (4)  Earnings from Unconsolidated Cellular Entities

         The following summarizes the unaudited combined results of operations
      of the cellular entities in which the Company's investments (as of the
      first quarter of 1995 and 1994) are accounted for by the equity method.

                                                       Three months
                                                      ended March 31
                                                      --------------
                                                       1995    1994
                                                      ------  ------
                                                  (Dollars in thousands)

      Results of operations
         Revenues                                   $149,254  68,269
         Operating income                           $ 47,854  16,190
         Net income                                 $ 48,525  14,942

      (5)  Sales of Assets

         In the first quarter of 1995 the Company sold, for an aggregate of
      approximately $17.9 million, its ownership interests in certain non-
      strategic cellular RSAs located primarily in western states and two MSAs
      in the midwest, which represented an aggregate of approximately 253,000
      pops.  These transactions resulted in a pre-tax gain of $5.9 million
      ($2.0 million after tax).

                                  8

<PAGE>
                    CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
                  MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF
               FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS


         Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results
      of Operations ("MD&A") included herein should be read in conjunction
      with MD&A and the other information included in the Company's annual
      report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 1994.  The results
      of operations for the three months ended March 31, 1995 are not
      necessarily indicative of the results of operations which might be
      expected for the entire year.

                         RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

               Three Months Ended March 31, 1995 Compared
                  to Three Months Ended March 31, 1994

         Net income for the first quarter of 1995 was $27.0 million compared to
      $19.2 million during the first quarter of 1994. The increase was
      principally due to an $11.7 million increase in operating income, a $5.9
      million pre-tax gain on the sale of certain cellular properties and a
      $2.2 million increase in earnings from unconsolidated cellular
      partnerships.  These factors were partially offset by increases in
      minority interest, interest expense and income tax expense of $1.2
      million, $2.9 million and $7.8 million, respectively.

                                                      Three months
                                                     ended March 31
                                                     --------------
                                                     1995      1994
                                                    ------    ------
                                                (Dollars in thousands,
                                               except per share amounts)
      Operating income
         Telephone                                 $34,345   30,890
         Mobile Communications                      13,211    4,996
                                                    ------   ------
                                                    47,556   35,886
      Interest expense                             (11,396)  (8,502)
      Income from unconsolidated cellular
        entities                                     4,724    2,564
      Gain on sales of assets                        5,909        -
      Minority interest                             (1,946)    (698)
      Other income and expense                         848      889
      Income taxes                                 (18,695) (10,938)
                                                    ------   ------
      Net income                                   $27,000   19,201
                                                    ======   ======
      Fully diluted earnings per share             $   .47      .35
                                                    ======   ======

         Fully diluted earnings per share increased to $.47 for the three months
      ended March 31, 1995 from $.35 during the three months ended March 31,
      1994, a 34.3% increase.  The average number of fully diluted shares
      outstanding increased 2.1% as a result of shares issued for acquisitions
      and through the Company's dividend reinvestment, incentive and benefit
      plans.

                                   9

<PAGE>
         Contributions to operating revenues and operating income by the
      Company's telephone operations and mobile communications operations for
      the three months ended March 31, 1995 and 1994 were as follows:

                                                     Three months
                                                    ended March 31
                                                    --------------
                                                     1995    1994
                                                    ------  ------
      Operating revenues
         Telephone operations                        70.4%   75.9
         Mobile Communications operations            29.6%   24.1

      Operating income
         Telephone operations                        72.2%   86.1
         Mobile Communications operations            27.8%   13.9


      Telephone Operations
                                                     Three months
                                                    ended March 31
                                                    --------------
                                                    1995      1994
                                                   ------    ------
                                               (Dollars in thousands)
      Operating revenues
         Local service                           $ 26,840    23,505
         Network access and
           long distance                           61,585    57,907
         Other                                     11,851    10,358
                                                  -------   -------
                                                  100,276    91,770
                                                  -------   -------
      Operating expenses
         Plant operations                          21,635    21,213
         Customer operations                        9,150     8,508
         Corporate and other                       14,875    14,104
         Depreciation and amortization             20,271    17,055
                                                  -------   -------
                                                   65,931    60,880
                                                  -------   -------
      Operating income                           $ 34,345    30,890
                                                  =======   =======

         Telephone operating income increased $3.5 million (11.2%) due to an
      increase in operating revenues of $8.5 million (9.3%) which more than
      offset an increase in operating expenses of $5.1 million (8.3%).

         The increase in revenues was primarily due to a $2.2 million increase
      in the recovery from the Federal Communications Commission mandated
      Universal Service Fund; a $2.2 million contribution to revenues from the
      acquisition of two local exchange telephone companies; $1.6 million from
      increased rates for basic services which was offset by an $807,000
      decrease in intrastate high cost assistance revenues; and $760,000 due
      to an increase in the number of customer access lines.

         During the first quarter of 1995, operating expenses, exclusive of
      depreciation and amortization, increased $1.8 million (4.2%) primarily
      due to $1.2 million of expenses incurred as a result of the acquisition
      of two local exchange telephone companies.

         Depreciation and amortization increased $3.2 million (18.9%) which
      includes $1.6 million of depreciation due to higher recurring rates
      approved in 1994 or anticipated to be approved in 1995 for certain
      subsidiaries.  The remaining increase in depreciation and amortization
      was primarily due to higher levels of plant in service.

                                  10

<PAGE>
      Mobile Communications Operations

                                                     Three months
                                                    ended March 31
                                                    --------------
                                                    1995      1994
                                                   ------    ------
                                                (Dollars in thousands)
      Operating revenues
         Cellular service                        $ 40,821    27,075
         Equipment and other                        1,328     2,135
                                                  -------   -------
                                                   42,149    29,210
                                                  -------   -------
      Operating expenses
         Cost of sales and other operating
           expenses                                 7,532     6,378
         General, administrative and customer
           service                                  8,780     7,180
         Sales and marketing                        7,044     6,278
         Depreciation and amortization              5,582     4,378
                                                  -------   -------
                                                   28,938    24,214
                                                  -------   -------
      Operating income                           $ 13,211     4,996
                                                  =======   =======

         The mobile communications operating income reflects the operations of
      cellular entities in which the Company has a majority interest.  The
      minority interest owners' share of the income or loss of such entities
      ($1.9 million during the first three months of 1995 and $698,000 during
      the first three months of 1994) is reflected as an expense in "Minority
      interest".  The operating income of the mobile communications segment
      includes the operations of Celutel, Inc. ("Celutel") subsequent to its
      acquisition in February 1994.  The Company's share of income or loss
      from the cellular entities in which it has less than a majority interest
      ($4.7 million and $2.6 million during the three months ended March 31,
      1995 and 1994, respectively) is reflected in "Income from unconsolidated
      cellular entities."

         Mobile communications operating income increased $8.2 million (164.4%)
      to $13.2 million in the first quarter of 1995 from $5.0 million in the
      first quarter of 1994.  Mobile communications operating revenues
      increased $12.9 million (44.3%) which more than offset an increase in
      operating expenses of $4.7 million (19.5%).

         The increase in cellular service revenues was substantially due to (i)
      an increase in the number of cellular units in service and (ii) a $4.1
      million increase in revenues generated by Celutel. Celutel was acquired
      on February 10, 1994; accordingly, the first quarter of 1995 includes
      three months of revenues applicable to Celutel while the first quarter
      of 1994 includes only revenues recorded subsequent to the acquisition
      date.  The average number of cellular units in service in majority-owned
      markets during the first quarter of 1995 and 1994 was 216,500 and
      138,500, respectively.

         The average monthly cellular service revenue per customer declined to
      $63 during the first quarter of 1995 from $65 during the first quarter
      of 1994. It has been an industry-wide trend that early subscribers have
      normally been the heaviest users and that a higher percent of new
      subscribers tend to be lower usage customers.  The average monthly
      service revenue per customer may further decline (i) as market penetration
      increases and additional lower usage customers are activated and (ii) as
      competitive pressures intensify and continue to place downward pressure
      on rates.  The Company is responding to such competitive pressures by,
      among other things, modifying certain of its price plans and
      implementing certain other plans and promotions, all of which may result
      in lower average revenue per customer.  The Company will continue to
      focus on customer

                                     11
<PAGE>
      service and attempt to stimulate cellular usage by promoting the
      availability of certain enhanced services and by improving the quality
      of its service through the construction of additional cell sites and
      enhancements to its system.

         The $1.2 million increase in cost of sales and other operating 
      expenses; the $1.6 million increase in general, administrative and
      customer service expenses; and the $766,000 increase in sales and
      marketing expenses were primarily due to additional costs related to
      the Celutel operations acquired during the first quarter of 1994.

         Depreciation and amortization increased $1.2 million (27.5%) due
      primarily to approximately $700,000 of depreciation resulting from a
      higher level of plant in service and to depreciation and amortization
      associated with the Celutel acquisition.

      Interest Expense

         Interest expense increased $2.9 million (34.0%) during the first 
      quarter of 1995 compared to the first quarter of 1994 primarily due to 
      the effect of higher average interest rates. Interest expense during the
      first quarter of 1995 on the $115.0 million of 6% convertible
      debentures, which were converted to common stock in February 1995, was
      $954,000 less that such interest during the first quarter of 1994.

      Income from Unconsolidated Cellular Entities

         Earnings from unconsolidated cellular entities, net of the amortization
      of associated goodwill, increased $2.2 million (84.2%) during the first
      quarter of 1995 compared to the first quarter of 1994 due to improvement
      in profitability of the cellular entities in which the Company owns less
      than a majority interest.

      Gain on Sales of Assets

         During the first quarter of 1995, the Company sold its ownership
      interests in certain non-strategic cellular partnerships which resulted
      in a pre-tax gain of $5.9 million ($2.0 million after-tax; $.03 per 
      fully diluted share). For additional information, see Note 5 of Notes to 
      Consolidated Financial Statements.

      Minority Interest

         The increased profitability during the first three months of 1995 of
      the Company's majority-owned and operated cellular entities resulted in a
      corresponding increase of $1.2 million in the expense recorded by the
      Company to reflect the minority interest owners' share of the profits.

      Other Income and Expense

         Other income and expense for the first quarter of 1995 was $848,000
      compared to $889,000 during the first quarter of 1994.  Interest income
      increased $642,000 in the first quarter of 1995, substantially all of
      which was due to interest income on a $25.0 million note receivable
      issued to Century in May 1994.  Such increase was substantially offset
      by a net decrease in the results of operations of subsidiaries of the
      Company which are not included in the telephone or mobile communications
      operations, including, but not limited to, the Company's competitive
      access subsidiary and the Company's nonregulated long distance
      operations.

      Income Tax Expense

         Income tax expense increased $7.8 million (70.9%) during the first
      quarter of 1995 compared to the first quarter of 1994 primarily due to
      the increase in income before taxes.  The effective income tax rate
      increased primarily because of the income tax expense attributable to
      the gain on sales of assets.

                                   12
<PAGE>
                      LIQUIDITY AND CAPITAL RESOURCES


         Excluding cash used for acquisitions, the Company relies on cash
      provided by operations to provide a substantial portion of its cash
      needs.  The Company's telephone operations have historically provided a
      stable source of cash flow which has helped the Company continue its
      long-term program of capital improvements.  Cash provided by mobile
      communications operations has increased each year since that segment
      became cash-flow positive in 1991.

         Net cash provided by operating activities was $67.7 million during the
      first three months of 1995 compared to $32.8 million during the first
      three months of 1994.  The Company's accompanying consolidated
      statements of cash flows identifies major differences between net income
      and net cash provided by operating activities for each of these periods.
      For additional information relating to the telephone operations and
      mobile communications operations of the Company, see Results of
      Operations.

         Net cash used in investing activities was $48.2 million and $109.1
      million for the three months ended March 31, 1995 and 1994,
      respectively.  Cash used in connection with the Celutel acquisition
      during the first three months of 1994 was $53.4 million; cash used in
      connection with the acquisition of a local exchange telephone company
      was $6.0 million in the first three months of 1995.  Payments for
      property, plant and equipment were $3.9 million more in the first
      quarter of 1995 than in the comparable period during 1994.  Capital
      expenditures for the three months ended March 31, 1995 were $28.8
      million for telephone, $18.7 million for mobile communications and $6.7
      million for other operations.  The $48.2 million of net cash used in
      investing activities in 1995 was net of $17.9 million of proceeds from
      the sale of certain cellular properties.

         Net cash used in financing activities was $16.1 million during the
      first three months of 1995; net cash provided by financing activities
      was $74.9 million during the first three months of 1994.  Net payments,
      including notes payable and long-term debt, were $13.8 million during
      the first quarter of 1995 compared to net borrowings of $78.4 million
      during the first quarter of 1994.  The net borrowings in 1994 included a
      $90.0 million bridge loan incurred to fund substantially all of the
      Company's cash requirements in connection with the acquisition of
      Celutel in February 1994 (including the refinancing of $41.7 million of 
      Celutel's debt).

         Budgeted capital expenditures for 1995 total $114.0 million for
      telephone operations, $59.0 million for mobile communications operations
      and $12.0 million for other operations.

         As of March 31, 1995, Century's telephone subsidiaries had available
      for use $158.2 million of commitments for long-term financing from the
      Rural Utilities Service ("RUS") and the Company had $89.1 million of 
      undrawn committed bank lines of credit.  In addition, approximately $22.0
      million of uncommitted credit facilities were available to Century at
      March 31, 1995.  The Company also has access to debt and equity capital
      markets. Applications for additional long-term financing for Century's
      telephone subsidiaries have been filed with the RUS and are in various
      stages of processing.  The Company has experienced no significant
      problems in obtaining funds through the issuance of debt or equity for
      capital expenditures or other purposes.

                                    13
<PAGE>
                           ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENT


         In March 1995 the Financial Accounting Standards Board issued Statement
      of Financial Accounting Standards No. 121, "Accounting for the
      Impairment of Long-Lived Assets and for Long-Lived Assets To Be Disposed
      Of" ("SFAS 121"), effective for fiscal years beginning after December
      15, 1995.  SFAS 121 establishes guidance for recognizing and measuring
      impairment losses and requires that the carrying amount of an impaired
      asset be reduced to fair value when events or circumstances indicate
      that the carrying value may not be recoverable.  Recoverability would
      generally be determined by estimating future cash flows resulting from
      use and eventual disposition of the asset.  The effect on the Company's
      financial statements of the adoption of SFAS 121 has not been
      determined.


                        PART II.  OTHER INFORMATION

                    CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.


      Item 6.  Exhibits and Reports on Form 8-K

         A.  Exhibits

             10.1  Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. Employee Stock 
                     Ownership Plan and Trust 1994 Amendment and Restatement.

             10.2  Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. Stock Bonus Plan, PAYSOP
                     and Trust 1994 Amendment and Restatement.

             11    Computations of Earnings Per Share.

             27    Financial Data Schedule.

         B.  Reports on Form 8-K

                There were no reports on Form 8-K filed during the quarter 
                  ended March 31, 1995.

                                   14
<PAGE>

                                SIGNATURE
                                ---------

         Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934,
         the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf
         by the undersigned thereunto duly authorized.



                                           CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.



      Date: May 9, 1995                         /s/ Murray H. Greer
                                                 -------------------
                                                   Murray H. Greer
                                                      Controller
                                            (Principal Accounting Officer)

                                    15
<PAGE>
                     CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.

                             INDEX TO EXHIBITS


      Exhibit
      Number
      -------

      10.1  Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. Employee Stock Ownership Plan
              and Trust 1994 Amendment and Restatement, included herein.

      10.2  Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. Stock Bonus Plan, PAYSOP and
              Trust 1994 Amendment and Restatement, included herein.

      11    Computations of Earnings Per Share, included herein.

      27    Financial Data Schedule, included herein.

                               16


                                                            EXHIBIT 10.1

            CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC. 
         EMPLOYEE STOCK OWNERSHIP PLAN AND TRUST


                                          1994 AMENDMENT AND RESTATEMENT

<PAGE>
                        
                        TABLE OF CONTENTS


SECTION 1.............................................................  2
     DEFINITIONS......................................................  2
           1.1  Account...............................................  2
           1.2  Active Participant....................................  2
           1.3  Adjustment Date.......................................  2
           1.4  Approved Absence......................................  2
           1.5  Break in Service......................................  2
           1.6  Company Stock.........................................  3
           1.7  Compensation..........................................  3
           1.8  Date of Employment....................................  5
           1.9  Date of Reemployment..................................  5
           1.10 Disability............................................  6
           1.11 Eligibility Computation Periods.......................  6
           1.12 Employee..............................................  6
           1.13 Employer..............................................  6
           1.14 Entry Date............................................  6
           1.15 Highly Compensated Employee...........................  7
           1.16 Hour of Service.......................................  8
           1.17 Leased Employee....................................... 10
           1.18 Limitation Year....................................... 11
           1.19 Merger Account........................................ 11
           1.20 Normal Retirement Age................................. 11
           1.21 Plan Administrator.................................... 11
           1.22 Plan Year............................................. 11
           1.23 Regular Account....................................... 11
           1.24 Rollover Account ..................................... 12
           1.25 Suspense Account...................................... 12
           1.26 Top Heavy Valuation Date.............................. 12
           1.27 Trust................................................. 12
           1.28 Valuation Date........................................ 12
           1.29 Vesting Computation Period............................ 12
           1.30 Year of Service....................................... 12
SECTION 2............................................................. 15 
     ELIGIBILITY...................................................... 15
           2.1  Participation......................................... 15
           2.2  Determination of Eligibility.......................... 15
           2.3  Election Not to Participate........................... 15

SECTION 3............................................................. 16
     CONTRIBUTIONS.................................................... 16
           3.1  Contributions by Employer............................. 16
           3.2  Determination of Contribution......................... 16
           3.3  Time of Payment of Contribution....................... 16
           3.4  Exclusive Benefit..................................... 16
           3.5  Return of Contributions............................... 17

                                    i  
<PAGE>

SECTION 4............................................................. 18 
     ACCOUNTS OF PARTICIPANTS......................................... 18
           4.1  Individual Accounts for Each Participant.............. 18
           4.2  Allocation of Employer Contributions.................. 18
           4.3  Allocation of Forfeitures............................. 18
           4.4  Year-End Valuation of Accounts........................ 18
           4.5  Interim Valuation of Accounts......................... 19
           4.6  Debiting of Distributions............................. 19 
           4.7  Effective Date of Entries............................. 19 
           4.8  Coverage Under this Plan Only......................... 20 
           4.9  Coverage Under a Prototype Plan....................... 21 
           4.10 Coverage Under a Non-Prototype Plan................... 23
           4.11 Combined Limits....................................... 23 
           4.12 Definitions........................................... 23
SECTION 5............................................................. 29 
     BENEFITS PAYABLE AFTER NORMAL RETIREMENT......................... 29
           5.1  Optional Methods of Payment Available at Retirement... 29 
           5.2  Manner of Payment Following Commencement of Payments.. 30 
           5.3  Required Beginning Date............................... 30 
           5.4  Determination of Amount to be Distributed Each Year... 30 
           5.5  Definitions........................................... 31
           5.6  Small Accounts........................................ 31
           
SECTION 6............................................................. 32 
     BENEFITS PAYABLE IN THE EVENT OF DEATH OR DISABILITY............. 32
           6.1  Death Distribution Provisions......................... 32 
           6.2  Definitions........................................... 33
           6.3  Designation of Beneficiary............................ 35 
           6.4  Failure to Designate a Beneficiary or Select a Method
                of Payment............................................ 35
           6.5  Disability of a Participant........................... 36 
           6.6  Transitional Rule..................................... 36 
           6.7  Location of Participant or Beneficiary Unknown........ 38
           
SECTION 7............................................................. 39 
     BENEFITS PAYABLE IN THE EVENT OF BREAK IN SERVICE OR EMPLOYMENT
           TERMINATION................................................ 39 
           7.1  Vesting Schedule...................................... 39 
           7.2  Distributions......................................... 39
           7.3  Restrictions on Immediate Distributions............... 41 
           7.4  Payment of Account Balance............................ 42 
           7.5  Treatment of Accounts in Pay Status................... 42 
           7.6  Direct Rollovers...................................... 43 
           7.7  Amendment of Vesting Schedule......................... 44
           
SECTION 8............................................................. 45 
     FORM OF DISTRIBUTION............................................. 45
           8.1  Payment in Shares or Cash............................. 45 
           8.2  Dividends............................................. 45
           
                                      ii
<PAGE>

SECTION 9............................................................. 46 
     MERGER OR CONSOLIDATION.......................................... 46
           9.1  Merger or Consolidation............................... 46 
           9.2  Merger Accounts....................................... 46  
           9.3  Merger Agreement or Agreement Relating to Transfer.... 46
           
SECTION 10............................................................ 47 
     CLAIMS PROCEDURE................................................. 47
           10.1  Filing of a Claim for Benefits....................... 47 
           10.2  Notification to Claimant of Decision................. 47 
           10.3  Review Procedure..................................... 47 
           10.4  Decision on Review................................... 48
           10.5  Agent for Service of Process......................... 48
           
SECTION 11............................................................ 49 
     ADOPTION BY OTHER COMPANIES...................................... 49
           11.1  Rights of Other Companies to Participate............. 49 
           11.2  Control of Plan by the Employer...................... 49 
           11.3  Allocations of Contributions and Forfeitures......... 49 
           11.4  Withdrawal of Employer or Adopting Companies......... 50
           11.5  Amendment of Plan.................................... 50
           11.6  Termination of One or More Parties................... 51
           11.7  Reference to Employer in Plan........................ 51

SECTION 12............................................................ 52 
     PROVISIONS RELATING TO PARTICIPANTS.............................. 52
           12.1  Information Required of Participants................. 52

SECTION 13............................................................ 53 
     PLAN ADMINISTRATOR............................................... 53
           13.1  Administration by Plan Administrator................. 53
           13.2  Appointment of Committee............................. 53
           13.3  Majority Action...................................... 53
           13.4  Powers of Plan Administrator......................... 54
           13.5  Duties of Plan Administrator......................... 55
           13.6  Expenses............................................. 56

SECTION 14............................................................ 57
     ROLLOVERS........................................................ 57
           14.1  Rollover Contributions............................... 57
           14.2  Definition of Rollover Contribution.................. 57
           14.3  Definition of Rollover Amount........................ 57
           14.4  Conduit Rollovers.................................... 58

SECTION 15............................................................ 59 
     TRADES OR BUSINESSES UNDER COMMON CONTROL........................ 59
           15.1  Definitions.......................................... 59
           15.2  Allocation........................................... 59
           15.3  Participation and Vesting............................ 59
           15.4  Vesting and Distributions............................ 60
                                     
                                     iii 
<PAGE>

SECTION 16............................................................ 61 
     TOP HEAVY PLAN RULES............................................. 61
           16.1  Key Employee......................................... 61
           16.2  Non-Key Employee..................................... 61
           16.3  Super Top Heavy Plan................................. 61
           16.4  Top Heavy Plan....................................... 62
           16.5  Top Heavy Ratio...................................... 62
           16.6  Top Heavy Plan Year.................................. 64
           16.7  Top Heavy Compensation............................... 64
           16.8  Determination Date................................... 64
           16.9  Valuation Date....................................... 64
           16.10 Aggregation Group.................................... 65
           16.11 Present Value of Accrued Benefits.................... 65
           16.12 Top Heavy Plan Requirements.......................... 65
           16.13 Top Heavy Reduction.................................. 66
           16.14 Minimum Allocation................................... 66
           16.15 Top Heavy Vesting.................................... 67
           16.16 Minimum Required Distribution........................ 67
           16.17 Alternative Effective Date........................... 68

SECTION 17 ........................................................... 69 
     ESOP PROVISIONS.................................................. 69
           17.1  Exempt Loans......................................... 69
           17.2  Voting Rights........................................ 71
           17.3  Rights on Tender or Exchange Offer................... 73
           17.4  Special Limitation Rules............................. 74
           17.5  Limitation on Electing Shareholder................... 74
           17.6  Investment Diversification........................... 75
           17.7  Company Stock Distributions.......................... 76

SECTION 18 ........................................................... 77 
     QUALIFIED DOMESTIC RELATIONS ORDERS.............................. 77
           18.1  Domestic Relations Order............................. 77
           18.2  Alternate Payee...................................... 77
           18.3  Qualified Domestic Relations Order................... 77
           18.4  Notice............................................... 78
           18.5  Determination of Qualification....................... 78
           18.6  Deferral of Payment.................................. 78
           18.7  Payment after Deferral............................... 78
           18.8  Payments after Eighteen Months....................... 79
           18.9  Payments Under Qualified Domestic Relations Order.... 79
           18.10 Non-qualification.................................... 80
           18.11 Effective Dates...................................... 80

SECTION 19 ........................................................... 81 
     AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION OF PLAN; ASSIGNMENT OF BENEFITS........ 81
           19.1  Amendment............................................ 81
           19.2  Termination; Discontinuance of Contributions......... 81
           19.3  Assignment of Benefits............................... 82 

                                     iv   
<PAGE>

THE TRUST............................................................. 83 
TRUST SECTION 1 ...................................................... 83
      TRUSTEE......................................................... 83
           1.1  Establishment and Acceptance of Trust................. 83
           1.2  Investment of Trust Fund.............................. 83
           1.3  Powers of Trustee..................................... 84
           1.4  Payments from the Trust............................... 86
           1.5  Payment of Compensation, Expenses and Taxes........... 86
           1.6  Accounting............................................ 87
           1.7  Removal, Resignation and Appointment of Successor      
                Trustee............................................... 87
TRUST SECTION 2....................................................... 88 
     FIDUCIARY RESPONSIBILITY......................................... 88
           2.1  Fiduciary Duties...................................... 88
           2.2  Location of Assets.................................... 88
           2.3  Deposits with Trustee................................. 88
           2.4  Common Trust Fund..................................... 88
           2.5  Prohibited Transactions by Trustee.................... 88
           2.6  Party in Interest and Disqualified Person Transaction. 89
           2.7  Intent of Trust....................................... 89

TRUST SECTION 3....................................................... 91 
     SPENDTHRIFT CLAUSE............................................... 91
           3.1  Restrictions on Alienation............................ 91
           3.2  Qualified Domestic Relations Order.................... 91

TRUST SECTION 4....................................................... 92 
     AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION OF TRUST............................... 92
           4.1  Amendment............................................. 92
           4.2  Termination; Discontinuance of Contributions.......... 92

                                      v
<PAGE>

STATE OF LOUISIANA

PARISH OF OUACHITA

     BE IT KNOWN that on this 30th day of  December,

1994, before me, Notary Public, duly commissioned and

qualified in and for  the  Parish of Ouachita, State of

Louisiana, therein residing and in the presence of the

undersigned witnesses:

     PERSONALLY CAME AND APPEARED:

CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC. represented herein by

its Senior Vice  President  and  Chief  Financial  Officer, R.

Stewart Ewing, Jr., as Settlor.

     The Settlor appoints Regions Bank of Louisiana as Trustee.

     WHEREAS, the Trustee has previously established  the Century

Telephone  Enterprises,  Inc.  Employee  Stock  Ownership Plan and

Trust; and

     WHEREAS,  the  Settlor  desires  to amend its Employee Stock

Ownership Plan and Trust to comply with  the  Tax  Reform Act  of

1986,  the  Technical  and  Miscellaneous  Revenue  Act of  1988,

technical corrections and other statutory revisions; and

     WHEREAS,  the Settlor desires to incorporate in this

document various amendments to its Employee Stock Ownership Plan

and Trust; and

     WHEREAS,  the   Settlor   desires  that  the  Employee

Stock Ownership  Plan  and  Trust,  as  amended   and

restated,  shall constitute a qualified employee benefit plan

under  Section 401(a) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as

amended (the  "Code") for the  exclusive  benefit  of

employees who participate herein,  and shall constitute an

employee  stock ownership  plan under Section 4975(e)(7) of

the Code;

     NOW, THEREFORE, effective January 1, 1989, except  as

may be indicated  in  specific Sections hereof, the Settlor

hereby amends and restates its Employee Stock Ownership Plan

and Trust, upon the terms and conditions as provided herein.

                              1
<PAGE>       

                          SECTION 1

                         DEFINITIONS

1.1  Account.
     -------
     The Regular Account, the Merger Account, the Rollover Account, 
     
and the Suspense Account of a Participant, whether or not such accounts 

have been combined into one account.

1.2  Active Participant.
     ------------------
     A Participant who has completed a Year of Service within

the Plan  Year  ending  on  the  Adjustment  Date,  whether or

not the Participant is employed on such date.

1.3  Adjustment Date.
     ---------------
     The last day of each Plan Year.

1.4  Approved Absence.
     ----------------
     An absence from work not exceeding one year, including absence  
     
due to temporary disability, granted to and/or approved for the Employee 

by an Employer in a uniform and nondiscriminatory manner; or an absence 

from work for service in the Armed Forces or other government services, 

provided that, and only so long as, reemployment rights are protected by law.

1.5  Break in Service.
     ----------------
     A twelve-consecutive month period (computation period) during which 
     
a Participant does not complete more than five hundred (500) Hours of 

Service with the Employer.  Any Break in Service shall be deemed to have 

commenced on the first day of the Plan Year in which it occurs.  No Break  

in Service shall be deemed to occur during an Employee's initial

Eligibility Computation Period solely because of the failure of the 

Employee to complete more than five hundred (500) Hours of Service during 

any one Plan Year occurring in part during such twelve-month period if 

the Employee completes a Year of Service during such initial Eligibility  

Computation Period.  A Break in Service shall not be deemed to have occurred 

during any period of Approved Absence if the Employee returns to the service  

of the Employer on or before the last day of the Approved Absence.

                                   2   
<PAGE>

1.6  Company Stock.
     -------------
     Shares of voting common stock, $1.00 par value, issued by the Employer.

1.7  Compensation.
     ------------
     Compensation will mean compensation as that term is defined in Section 
     
4.12(b) of the  Plan, and will include any amount which is contributed by 

the Employee pursuant to a salary reduction agreement and which is not

includible in the gross income of the Employee under Sections 125, 402(e)(3), 

402(h)(1)(B) or 403(b) of the Code.

     Notwithstanding the foregoing, compensation for purposes of this  
     
Section shall not include: (i) reimbursements or other expense allowances,  

fringe benefits (cash or noncash), moving expenses, deferred compensation, 

and welfare benefits; (ii) overtime; or (iii) bonuses and special awards.  

In the case of a commission salesman, compensation shall mean the lesser of:  

(i) the base draw of such salesman; or (ii) the commissions paid by the 

Employer to such salesman as reported on his Federal income tax withholding 

statement (Form W-2).

   For Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 1989, and before January  
   
1, 1994, the annual compensation of each Participant taken into account for  

determining all benefits provided under the Plan for any Plan Year shall

not exceed $200,000. This limitation shall be adjusted by the Secretary  

at the same time and in the same manner as under Section 415(d) of the 

Code, except that the dollar increase in effect on January 1 of any calendar 

year is effective for Plan Years beginning in such calendar year and the 

first adjustment to the $200,000 limitation is effective on January 1, 1990.

   For Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 1994, the annual 
   
compensation of each Participant taken into account for determining all 

benefits provided under the Plan for any Plan Year shall not exceed $150,000, 

as adjusted for increases in the cost-of-living in accordance with Section 

401(a)(17)(B) of the Code. The cost-of-living adjustment in effect for a

calendar year applies to any determination period beginning in such calendar 

year.
                                      3
<PAGE>

   If a determination period consists of fewer than 12 months, the annual 
   
compensation limit is an amount equal to the otherwise applicable annual 

compensation limit multiplied by a fraction, the numerator of which is the  

number of months in the short determination period, and the denominator of

which is 12.

     In determining the compensation of a Participant for purposes of this  
     
limitation, the rules of Section 414(q)(6) of the Code shall apply, except  

in applying such rules, the term "family" shall include only the spouse of 

the Participant and any lineal descendants of the Participant who have not

attained age 19 before the close of the year. If, as a result of the 

application of such rules the adjusted annual compensation limitation is 

exceeded, then (except for purposes of determining the portion of compensation

up to the integration level if this Plan provides for permitted disparity),  

the limitation shall be prorated among the affected individuals in proportion  

to each such individual's compensation as determined under this Section 

prior to the application of this limitation.

     If compensation for any prior determination period is taken into account 

in determining a Participant's allocations for the current Plan Year, the 

compensation for such prior determination period is subject to the applicable

annual compensation limit in effect for that prior period. For this purpose, 

in determining allocations in Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 

1989, the annual compensation limit in effect for determination periods 

beginning before that date is $200,000. In addition, in determining 

allocations in Plan Years beginning on or after January 1, 1994, the annual  

compensation limit in effect for determination periods beginning before 

that date is $150,000.

     In addition to other applicable limitations set forth in the Plan, 
     
and notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan to the contrary, 

for Plan Years beginning on or after January, 1994, the annual Compensation 

of each Employee taken into account under the Plan shall not exceed the 

OBRA '93 annual compensation limit.  The OBRA '93 annual compensation limit 

is $150,000, as adjusted by the Commissioner for increases in the cost of

living in accordance with Section 401(a)(17)(B) of the Code. The cost-of-

living adjustment in effect for a calendar year applies to any period, not  

exceeding 12 

                                     4
<PAGE>

months, over which compensation is determined (determination period) 

beginning in such calendar year. If a determination period consists of fewer 

than 12 months, the OBRA '93 annual compensation limit will be multiplied 

by a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of months in the

determination period, and the denominator of which is 12.

     For plan years beginning on or after January 1, 1994, any reference 
     
in this Plan to the limitation under Section 401(a)(17) of the Code shall 

mean the OBRA '93 annual compensation limit set forth in this provision.

If Compensation for any prior determination period is taken into account 

in determining an Employee's benefits accruing in the current Plan Year, 

the Compensation for that prior determination period is subject to the 

OBRA '93 annual compensation limit in effect for that prior determination 

period.  For this purpose, for determination periods beginning before the 

first day of the first Plan Year beginning on or after January 1, 1994, the  

OBRA '93 annual compensation limit is $150,000.

     For any self-employed individual covered under the Plan, compensation 
     
will mean earned income. Compensation shall include only that compensation 

which is actually paid to the Participant during the determination period.  

Except as provided elsewhere in this plan, the determination period

shall be the Plan Year.

     For employees of San Marcos Telephone Company, Inc., SM Telecorp, 

Inc., and subsidiaries thereof, who become participants in the Plan on 

or after June 20, 1993, compensation for the Plan Year ending December, 

31, 1993 shall be recognized commencing as of the effective date of

participation of each such employee pursuant to Section 2.1.

1.8  Date of Employment.
     ------------------
     The date on which an Employee first performs an Hour of Service for 
     
the Employer.

1.9  Date of Reemployment.
     --------------------
     The first date occurring after an Employee's Break in Service on which 
     
he performs an Hour of Service.
                                   
                                     5
<PAGE>

1.10 Disability.
     ----------
     A Participant shall be considered disabled if the Participant cannot 

perform each of the material duties of his regular occupation and is likely 

to remain thus incapacitated continuously and permanently.

1.11 Eligibility Computation Periods 
     -------------------------------
     In determining Years of Service and Breaks in Service for purposes of  
     
eligibility, the initial Eligibility Computation Period is the twelve (12) 

consecutive month period beginning on an Employee's Date of Employment or 

Date of Reemployment. Subsequent Eligibility Computation Periods shall be 

twelve (12) consecutive month periods beginning on the first anniversary 

of an Employee's Date of Employment or Date of Reemployment and succeeding 

anniversaries thereof. Years of Service, and Breaks in Service, for eligibility 

purposes will be measured on the same Eligibility Computation Period.

1.12 Employee.
     --------
     Those persons regularly employed by the Employer, including

employees of any other employer required to be aggregated with the

Employer under Sections 414(b), (c), (m) or (o) of the Code.  The

term Employee shall also include any leased employee deemed to be an

employee of the Employer as provided in Sections 414(n) or (o) of the Code.  

The term Employee shall not include any owner employee, as defined 

in Code Section 401(c)(3).

1.13 Employer.
     --------
     Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc.

1.14 Entry Date.
     ----------
     (a)  The first day of the Plan Year on which or immediately preceding 
          
          the date on which an Employee satisfies the requirements of Section
          
          2.1; or

     (b)  In the case  of  an Employee whose Years of Service are disregarded 
          
          pursuant to Section 1.30(c), such Employee will be treated as a 
          
          new Employee for eligibility purposes. If an Employee's Years of 
          
          Service may not be disregarded pursuant to Section 1.30(c), such
                                     6  
<PAGE>

          Employee shall continue to participate in the Plan, or, if 
          
          terminated, shall participate immediately upon his Date of 
          
          Reemployment.

1.15 Highly Compensated Employee.
     ---------------------------
     A highly compensated active employee includes any Employee who performs 

service for the Employer during the determination year and who, during the  

look-back year: (i) received compensation from the Employer in excess of 

$75,000 (as adjusted pursuant to Section 415(d) of the Code); (ii) received 

compensation from the Employer in excess of $50,000 (as adjusted pursuant 

to Section 415(d) of the Code) and was a member of the top-paid group for such

year; or (iii) was an officer of the Employer and received compensation during  

such year that is greater than fifty percent (50%) of the dollar limitation  

in effect under Section 415(b)(1)(A) of the Code.  The term Highly

Compensated Employee also includes: (i) Employees who are both described  

in the preceding sentence if the term "determination year" is substituted  

for the term "look-back year" and the Employee is one of the one hundred

(100) Employees who received the most compensation from the Employer during 

the determination year; and (ii) Employees who are five percent (5%) owners 

at any time during the look-back year or determination year. 

     The term Highly Compensated Employee includes highly compensated 
        
active employees and highly compensated former employees.

     If no officer has satisfied the compensation requirement of (iii) 
     
above during either a determination year or look-back year, the highest  

paid officer for such year shall be treated as a Highly Compensated Employee.

     For this purpose, the determination year shall be the Plan Year. The  

look-back year shall be the twelve-month period immediately preceding the 

determination year. 

      A highly compensated former employee includes any Employee who 
      
separated from service (or was deemed to have separated) prior to the 

determination year, performs no service for the Employer 

                               7
<PAGE>

during the determination year, and was a Highly Compensated Employee for 

either the separation year or any determination year ending on or after the 

Employee's fifty-fifth (55th) birthday. 

      If an Employee is, during a determination year or look-back year, 

a family member of either a five percent (5%) owner who is an active or 

former Employee or a Highly Compensated Employee who is one of the ten (10) 

most Highly Compensated Employees ranked on the basis of compensation 

paid by the Employer during such year, then the family member and the five 

percent (5%) owner or top-ten Highly Compensated Employee shall be aggregated. 

In such case, the family member and the five percent (5%) owner or top-ten 

Highly Compensated Employee shall be treated as a single Employee receiving 

compensation and plan contributions or benefits equal to the sum of such 

compensation and contributions or benefits of the family member and the 

five percent (5%) owner or top-ten Highly Compensated Employee.  For purposes 

of this Section, family members include the spouse, lineal ascendants and 

descendants of the Employee or former Employee and the spouses of such 

lineal ascendants and descendants.

     The determination of who is a Highly Compensated Employee, including  
     
the determination of the number and identity  of Employees in the top-paid  

group, the top one hundred (100) Employees, the number of Employees

treated as officers, and the compensation that is considered, will be made 

in accordance with Section 414(q) of the Code and the regulations thereunder.

1.16 Hour of Service.
     ---------------
     Each hour for an Employee under (a) through  (c),

determined from the employment records of the Employer.  Any

ambiguity  which may  arise  shall be resolved in favor of crediting 

Employees with an Hour of Service.

     (a)  Each hour for which an Employee is paid, or entitled to

          payment, for  the  performance  of duties for the Employer.  
          
          These hours will be credited to the Employee for the computation 
          
          period in which the duties are performed;

                                    8
<PAGE>     
     
     (b)  Each hour for which an Employee is paid, or entitled to

          payment, by the Employer on account of a  period  of  time

          during which  no  duties  are  performed  (irrespective  of

          whether  the employment  relationship has terminated) due to

          vacation, holiday, illness, incapacity  (including

          disability), layoff,  jury duty, military duty or leave of

          absence.  No more than five hundred  one (501)  Hours  of

          Service will be credited under this paragraph for any single

          continuous period (whether or not such period occurs in a

          single computation  period). Hours under this paragraph will

          be calculated and credited pursuant  to  Section  2530.200(b)

          of the Department of Labor Regulations, which is incorporated

          herein  by this reference; and

     (c)  Each hour for  which back pay, irrespective of mitigation 
     
          of damages, is either awarded or agreed to by the Employer.

          The  same  Hours  of Service will not be credited both

          under paragraph (a) and (b), as  the  case  may be, and under

          this paragraph (c).  These hours will be credited  to  the

          Employee for the computation period or periods to which the

          award  or agreement pertains  rather  than the computation

          period in which the  award, agreement or payment is made.

     Notwithstanding  the above, (i) an hour for which an Employee is 
     
directly or indirectly paid, or entitled to payment, on account of a 

period during which  no  duties are performed is not required to be 

credited to the Employee if such payment is made or due under a plan 

maintained solely for the purpose of complying with applicable worker's

compensation, unemployment compensation or disability insurance laws;  

and (ii) Hours of Service are not required to be credited for a payment  

which solely reimburses an Employee for medical or medically-related

expenses incurred by the Employee.

     Hours of Service will be credited for employment  with

other members  of an affiliated service group (under Section

414(m)),  a controlled  group  of  corporations  (under

Section 414(b)), or a group of trades or businesses under

common control (under Section 414(c))  of  which the Employer

is a member, 

                                   9
<PAGE>

and any other  entity required to be  aggregated with the Employer 

pursuant to Section 414(o) and the regulations thereunder.

     Hours of Service will also be  credited  for  any

individual considered  an  Employee  for  purposes of this

Plan under Section 414(n) or Section 414(o) and the

regulations thereunder.

     Solely  for  purposes  of  determining  whether  a  Break

in Service, as defined in Section 1.5,  for participation and

vesting purposes has occurred in a computation  period,  an

individual who is  absent  from  work  for  maternity or

paternity reasons  shall receive credit for the Hours of

Service which would otherwise have been credited to such

individual  but for such absence, or in any case  in  which

such hours cannot be determined,  eight  Hours  of Service per

day of such absence. For purposes of this paragraph, an

absence from  work  for maternity or paternity reasons means

an absence (1) by reason of the  pregnancy of the individual,

(2) by reason of the birth of a child of the individual, (3)

by reason of the placement of a child with the  individual  in

connection with the adoption of such child by the individual,

or (4)  for purposes of  caring for  such  child  for  a

period beginning immediately following such birth or

placement.  The  Hours of Service credited under this

paragraph shall be credited (1)  in  the  computation period

in which  the  absence begins if the crediting is necessary to

prevent a Break in Service  in that period, or (2) in all

other cases, in the following computation period.

1.17 Leased Employee.
     ---------------
     (a)   Any person (other than  an  employee  of the

           recipient) who pursuant to an agreement between the recipient

           and  any other person  ("leasing  organization")  has

           performed services for the recipient (or for the recipient and  
           
           related persons determined in accordance with Code Section 
           
           414(n)(6)) on a substantially full time basis for a period of at 
           
           least one year, and such services are of a type historically

           performed by employees in the business field of the recipient 
           
           employer. Contributions or benefits provided a leased employee 
           
           by the leasing organization which are attributable to services 
           
           performed for the recipient employer shall be treated as 
           
           provided by the recipient employer.

                                   10       
<PAGE>     
     
     (b)   A leased employee shall not be considered an employee of  
           
           the recipient if: (i) such employee is covered by a money 
           
           purchase pension plan providing:  (1) a nonintegrated  employer

           contribution  rate  of at least ten percent (10%) of

           compensation, as  defined  in  Code Section  415(c)(3),  but

           including  amounts contributed pursuant  to  a  salary

           reduction agreement which are excludable from the leased

           employee's  gross  income under Section 125, Section

           402(e)(3), Section 402(h)(1)(B) or  Section 403(b) of the

           Code, (2) immediate participation, and (3) full  and immediate

           vesting; and  (ii)  leased employees do not constitute more

           than twenty percent (20%) of  the  recipient's  nonhighly

           compensated workforce.

1.18 Limitation Year.
     ---------------
     The Plan Year unless any other twelve (12) consecutive month period 
     
is designated  pursuant  to a written resolution adopted by the Employer.

1.19 Merger Account.
     --------------
     The account maintained for a  Participant  with  respect

to a plan which has merged with this Plan or transferred its

assets to this Plan, in accordance with Section 9.2.

1.20 Normal Retirement Age.
     ---------------------
     The  fifty-fifth  (55th) birthday of a Participant, at which

time the Participant shall become fully vested.

1.21 Plan Administrator.
     ------------------
     The Committee referred to in Section 13 of this Plan.

1.22 Plan Year.
     ---------
     The calendar year.

1.23 Regular Account.
     ---------------
     The individual  account maintained for a Participant to which is 
     
credited his share of Employer contributions and forfeitures, adjusted 

as herein provided for investment income, gain or loss.

                                    11
<PAGE>

1.24 Rollover Account.
     ----------------
     The  account maintained in accordance with Section  14.1

for each Participant who has made a rollover contribution.

1.25 Suspense Account.
     ----------------
     The account maintained in accordance with Section 4.8.

1.26 Top Heavy Valuation Date.
     ------------------------
     The date specified in Section 16.9 of this Plan.

1.27 Trust.
     -----
     The trust  created  in  accordance  with  Sections 1-4 of

the trust  contained  herein,  or  pursuant  to  a  separate

written agreement between the Employer and the Trustee.

1.28 Valuation Date.
     --------------
     The date on which the Trustee shall make a revaluation of

the trust fund pursuant to Section 4.4.

1.29 Vesting Computation Period.
     --------------------------
     For purposes of determining Years of Service and Breaks in Service 
     
for computing an Employee's nonforfeitable right to the Account balance   

derived from Employer contributions, the computation period shall be the 

Plan Year. 

1.30 Year of Service.
     ---------------
     A twelve-consecutive month period (computation period) during 
     
which an Employee completes at least five hundred (500) Hours of Service. 

Effective January 1, 1994, a Year of Service is a twelve-consecutive 

month period (computation period) during which an Employee completes at 

least one thousand (1,000) Hours of Service.  All of an Employee's Years 

of Service shall be counted, subject to the following qualifications and

exceptions:

     (a)   A Year of  Service  will not be credited for any period

           of Approved Absence after the Employee  incurs  a Break in

           Service during such absence from the service of the Employer;

                                     12
<PAGE>     
     
     (b)   Service performed prior to a Break in Service shall not

           be taken into account until the Employee has completed  a

           Year of Service after such Break in Service.  Such Year of

           Service will be measured by the twelve (12) consecutive month

           period beginning  on the  Employee's Date of Reemployment and,

           if necessary, subsequent twelve  (12)  consecutive month

           periods beginning on anniversaries of the Employee's Date of

           Reemployment;

     (c)   In the case of an Employee who does not have any

           nonforfeitable  right to his Regular Account, Years of

           Service, whether or not consecutive, before  a  period  of

           consecutive one year  Breaks  in  Service shall not be taken

           into account if the number of consecutive one-year Breaks

           in Service in such period equals or exceeds the greater of

           five (5)  or the aggregate number of Years of Service.  Such

           aggregate number  of  Years  of Service will  not  include

           any Years  of  Service  disregarded under the preceding

           sentence by reason of prior Breaks in Service;

     (d)   In the case of a Participant who has  five  (5) or more

           consecutive  one-year  Breaks  in Service, all service after

           such Breaks in Service will be disregarded  for purposes of

           vesting the Employer-derived Account balance that accrued

           before  such Breaks in  Service.   Such Participant's pre-

           break service will count  in vesting the post-break  Employer-
          
           derived Account  balance only if either:

           (i)  such  Participant has any nonforfeitable

                interest in the Account balance  attributable  to Employer

                contributions at the time of separation from service; or

           (ii) upon returning to service the number of consecutive 
           
                one-year Breaks in Service  is less than the number of

                Years of Service.

           Separate accounts will be maintained for the Participant's 
           
           pre-break and post-break Employer-derived Account balance. 
           
           Both accounts will share in the earnings and losses of the trust; 
           
           and

     (e)   Any  Employee who was employed by Central Telephone of

           Ohio ("Central")  on  March  31,  1992 and who was not a

           member of local chapter 4370 of the Communications  

                                     13
<PAGE>           
           
           Workers of America  at such  time,  who became employed by the

           Employer on or about April 1, 1992 pursuant  to an offer of

           employment by the Employer, shall be  credited  for  all

           purposes  under this  Plan  with  service performed prior to

           April  1, 1992 for Centel Corporation, Central, or any member

           of a controlled group  in  which Centel Corporation and

           Central were  members.

     (f)   Service  with San Marcos Telephone  Company,  Inc., SM

           Telecorp,  Inc.,  and subsidiaries  thereof,  and  any

           successors thereto by merger or  otherwise, shall be counted

           for all purposes under this Plan.

                                  14
<PAGE>

                              SECTION 2

                             ELIGIBILITY

2.1  Participation.
     -------------
     Every Participant in the Plan prior to this Amendment and Restatement 
     
shall continue to participate in the Plan as of the effective date hereof. 

Additionally, every Employee who has completed one (1) Year of Service 

during an Eligibility Computation Period, shall become a Participant in 

the Plan as of the Entry Date. However, Employees whose terms of employment 

are subject to a collective bargaining agreement, which does not provide 

for their coverage under this Plan, as well as Employees for whom union

representation negotiations have begun, which negotiations do not provide 

for their coverage under this Plan, are not eligible to participate.   

In addition, Employees employed by Century Business Communications, Inc.   

(formerly Century Printing & Publishing, Inc.), Interactive Communications,

Inc., and Metro Access Networks, Inc. are not eligible to participate 

in this Plan.

2.2  Determination of Eligibility.
     ----------------------------
     The Plan Administrator shall determine the eligibility of each  
     
Employee for participation in the Plan. Such determination shall be 

conclusive and binding upon all persons. 

2.3  Election Not to Participate.
     ---------------------------
     An Employee may, subject to the approval of the Employer, elect 
     
voluntarily not to participate in the Plan. The election not to participate  

must be communicated to the Employer, in writing, at least thirty (30) 

days before the beginning of a Plan Year. The foregoing election not

to participate shall not be available with respect to partners in a 

partnership.

                                    15
<PAGE>

                              SECTION 3         

                            CONTRIBUTIONS

3.1  Contributions by Employee.
     -------------------------
     For the current Plan Year and  for each Plan Year thereafter, 

the Employer may make a contribution to the Trust in cash or shares 

of Company Stock. The Employer's contribution for any Plan Year shall 

not exceed the maximum amount allowable as a deduction to the Employer 

under Section 404 of the Code.

     Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Employer shall make a contribution  

to the extent necessary to provide the top heavy minimum allocations under 

Section 16.14, even if such contribution exceeds current or accumulated 

net profits or the maximum amount deductible from the Employer's income 

for the year.

3.2  Determination of Contribution.
     ----------------------------- 
     The Employer shall determine the amount of any contributions to be made 
     
by it to the Trust under the terms of this Agreement. The Employer's 

determination of such contributions shall be binding on all Participants 

and the Trustee.

     The Trustee shall have no right or duty to inquire into the

amount of the Employer's annual contribution or the method used in

determining the amount of the Employer's contribution, but shall be 

accountable only for funds actually received by it. 

3.3  Time of Payment of Contribution.
     -------------------------------
     The Employer shall pay to the Trustee its contribution for each Plan  
     
Year within the time prescribed by law, including extensions of time, for 

the filing of its Federal income tax return for such year.

3.4  Exclusive Benefit.
     -----------------
     Any and all contributions made by the Employer to the trust fund 
     
shall be irrevocable, and neither such contributions nor any income 

therefrom shall be used for, or diverted to, purposes other than for 

                                  16
<PAGE>

the exclusive benefit of Participants or their beneficiaries under the Plan.

3.5  Return of Contributions.
     -----------------------
     Any contribution made by the Employer because of a

mistake of fact  must  be  returned  to  the  Employer within

one year of the contribution.

     In the event that the Commissioner of Internal Revenue determines 
     
that the Plan is not initially qualified under the Internal Revenue Code,  

any contribution made incident to that initial qualification by the 

Employer must be returned to the Employer within one year after the date

the initial qualification is denied, but only if the application for 

qualification is made by the time prescribed by law for filing the 

Employer's return for the taxable year in which the Plan is adopted,  

or such later date as the Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe.

     In  the event the deduction of a contribution made by the Employer  
     
is disallowed under Section 404 of the Code, such contribution (to the  

extent disallowed) must be returned to the Employer within one year of 

the disallowance of the deduction.

                                17

<PAGE>

                              SECTION 4

                       ACCOUNTS OF PARTICIPANTS

4.1  Individual Accounts for Each Participant.
     ----------------------------------------
     The Plan Administrator or, if the Plan Administrator so determines, 
     
the Trustee, shall maintain a Regular Account for each Participant.   

With  respect  to a Participant who incurs five (5) consecutive one-year  

Breaks in  Service before receiving a distribution, the vested portion of

such Participant's Regular Account shall remain in his Regular Account, and  

the nonvested portion of the Participant's Regular Account shall be 

forfeited as provided in Section 7.2. 

4.2  Allocation of Employer Contributions.
     ------------------------------------
     Contributions made by the Employer for a Plan Year shall, as of the  
     
Adjustment Date occurring within such Plan Year, be allocated among and 

posted to the Regular Account of each Active Participant in the proportion 

which the Compensation paid to such Active Participant for such year

bears to the total Compensation of all Active Participants for such year.

4.3  Allocation of Forfeiture.
     ------------------------
     The amount of forfeitures determined under Section 7.2 shall be  

reallocated as of the Adjustment Date on which forfeitures occurred to 

the Regular Accounts of Active Participants by adding the total amount 

of forfeitures to the Employer's contribution for the year and allocating 

the sum thereof in accordance with Section 4.2. If there were no Employer 

contributions for the year, the forfeitures shall be allocated in 

accordance with Section 4.2. 

4.4  Year-End Valuation of Account.
     -----------------------------
     The Trustee, as of each Adjustment Date, shall determine the net 

worth of the assets of the trust fund. In determining such net worth, 

the Trustee shall value the assets of the trust fund at their fair market  

value as of such Adjustment Date, and shall deduct all liabilities of the

Plan and all expenses payable from the trust fund for which the Trustee has  

not yet obtained reimbursement. Such valuation shall not include any 

contribution for the year made by the Employer as of the Valuation Date.

                               18
<PAGE>     
     
     As of each Adjustment Date, before allocation of forfeitures and 
     
Employer contributions for the year, the Trustee shall adjust the net  

credit balance in the Accounts of all Participants (whether or not active) 

upward  or downward, pro-rata, so that the total of such net credit

balances will  equal the net worth of the trust fund as of the

Adjustment Date.  As  used  herein  the  term "net  credit balance"  

means  the  balance  to the credit of each Participant as of the 

immediately preceding Adjustment Date or Interim Valuation Date, if 

later, as reduced for payments from the Accounts and forfeitures on 

or subsequent to such date.

4.5  Interim Valuation of Accounts.
     -----------------------------
     As of the end of any month, the Plan Administrator may request  
     
the Trustee to determine, in accordance with the rules of Section 4.4,  

the then net worth of the assets constituting the trust fund.  The last 

day of each  month  as of  which  the  Plan Administrator has requested the

Trustee  to  determine  the aforementioned net worth is referred to  

herein  as  an  "Interim Valuation Date."

     All  distributions  which  are to be made as of or after

any such Interim Valuation Date, but  prior  to  the  next

succeeding Adjustment  Date,  or,  if  earlier,  the  next

succeeding Interim Valuation  Date, shall be made as if the

credit  balances  to  all Participants'  Accounts  had

actually been credited or debited so that the total credit

balances to all Accounts would equal the net worth of the

assets constituting the trust fund as of such Interim

Valuation Date. 

4.6  Debiting of Distribution.
     ------------------------
     The amounts, if any, paid to or on behalf of a Participant at any 
     
time shall, concurrent with such payment, be debited against his Account.

4.7  Effective Date of Entries.
     -------------------------
     Each Account entry which, in accordance with the provisions hereof, 
     
needs to be made shall be considered as having  been made on  the  date  

herein  specified  regardless of the date of actual entry.

                                  19

<PAGE>
                  
                     LIMIT ON ANNUAL ADDITIONS

4.8  Coverage Under This Plan Only.
     -----------------------------
     (a)   If the Participant does not participate in, and

has never participated  in  another  qualified  plan

maintained by the Employer, or a welfare benefit fund, as

defined  in Section 419(e) of the Code, maintained by the

Employer, or an individual  medical account,  as  defined in

Section 415(l)(2) of the Code, maintained by the Employer,  or

a simplified employee pension, as defined in Section 408(k) of

the Code, maintained  by  the  Employer,  which provides an

annual addition as defined in Section 4.12, the amount of

annual additions  which  may be credited to the Participant's

Account for any Limitation Year  will not exceed the lesser of

the maximum permissible amount or any  other  limitation

contained in this  Plan.  If the Employer contribution that

would otherwise  be contributed  or allocated to the

Participant's Account would cause the annual additions for the

Limitation Year to exceed the maximum permissible amount, the amount

contributed or allocated will be reduced so that the annual

additions  for the Limitation Year will equal the maximum

permissible amount.

     (b)   Prior to determining  the  Participant's actual

compensation for the Limitation Year, the  Employer  may

determine the maximum permissible amount for a Participant on

the basis of a reasonable  estimate  of  the Participant's

compensation  for  the Limitation  Year,  uniformly

determined for  all  Participants similarly situated.

     (c)   As soon as is administratively feasible after the

end of the  Limitation  Year,  the  maximum permissible

amount  for the Limitation  Year  will  be  determined   on

the   basis of  the Participant's actual compensation for the

Limitation Year.

     (d)   If,  pursuant to Section 4.8(c) or as a result  of

the allocation of forfeitures,  there  is an excess amount, the excess

will be disposed of as follows:

           (i)   Any nondeductible voluntary employee contributions, 
                 to the extent  they would reduce the excess
                 amount, will be returned to the Participant;

           (ii)  If after the application of paragraph (i) an excess 
                 amount still exists,  and the Participant is covered
                 by the Plan at the end of the Limitation Year, the excess

                                   20
<PAGE>                
                
                 amount in the Participant's Account will be used to reduce
                 Employer contributions (including any allocation of 
                 forfeitures) for such Participant in the next Limitation  
                 Year, and each succeeding Limitation Year if necessary;

           (iii) If after the application of paragraphs (i) and (ii) an 
                 excess amount still exists, and the Participant is not 
                 covered by the Plan at the end of a Limitation Year, 
                 the  excess amount will be held unallocated in a Suspense 
                 Account. The Suspense Account will be applied to reduce 
                 future Employer contributions for all remaining 
                 Participants in the next Limitation Year, and each 
                 succeeding Limitation Year if necessary; 
                 
            (iv) If a Suspense Account is in existence at any time
                 during a Limitation Year pursuant to this Section, it 
                 will not participate in the allocation of the Trust's 
                 investment gains and losses. If a Suspense Account is 
                 in existence at any time during a particular Limitation 
                 Year, all amounts in the Suspense Account must be 
                 allocated and reallocated to Participants' Accounts 
                 before any Employer or any Employee contributions may 
                 be made to the Plan for that Limitation Year. Excess 
                 amounts may not be distributed to Participants
                 or former Participants.

4.9  Coverage Under A Prototype Plan.
     -------------------------------
     (a)  This  Section  applies if, in addition to this Plan,

the Participant  is covered under  a  qualified  master  or

prototype defined contribution  plan  maintained  by the

Employer, a welfare benefit fund  maintained by the Employer,

an  individual medical account  maintained  by  the  Employer,

or a simplified  employee pension  maintained  by  the

Employer that  provides  an  annual addition  as defined in

Section 4.12 during any  Limitation  Year. The annual

additions  which  may be  credited to a Participant's Account

under  this Plan for any such Limitation  Year  will  not

exceed  the maximum permissible  amount  reduced  by  the

annual additions credited  to  a  Participant's  account under

the other qualified  master  or  prototype defined contribution  plans, 

and welfare benefit funds for the same Limitation Year.  If the

annual additions with respect to  the  Participant  under

other qualified master  or prototype defined contribution

plans, welfare  benefit funds,  individual   medical

accounts,  and simplified  employee pensions maintained by

the  Employer  are less  than the maximum permissible  amount

and  the  Employer contribution  that  would otherwise be

contributed or allocated to the Participant's Account under

this  Plan  would  cause the  annual  additions  for  the

Limitation  Year to exceed this limitation, the amount

contributed or allocated  will  be reduced so that the annual

additions under all such plans and funds  for  the  Limitation

Year will equal 

                                    21
<PAGE>

the maximum permissible amount.  If the annual additions with respect 

to the Participant under such other qualified master or prototype 

defined  contribution  plans, welfare  benefit funds, individual 

medical  accounts,  and  simplified  employee pensions in  the 

aggregate  are  equal  to  or greater than the maximum permissible amount, 

no amount will be contributed or allocated to the Participant's 

Account under this Plan for the Limitation Year.

     (b)   Prior  to determining  the Participant's actual compensation 

for the Limitation  Year,  the Employer may determine the  maximum 

permissible amount for a Participant in the manner described in 

Section 4.8(b).

     (c)   As soon as is administratively feasible after the end of the 

Limitation Year, the maximum permissible amount for the Limitation   

Year will be determined on the basis of the Participant's actual 

compensation for the Limitation Year.

     (d)   If, pursuant to Section  4.9(c)  or  as  a result of

the allocation of forfeitures, a Participant's annual additions under 

this  Plan  and  such other plans would result in an excess amount 

for a Limitation Year, the excess amount will be deemed to consist 

of the annual additions last allocated, except that annual additions 

attributable to a simplified employee pension will be deemed to have been

allocated first, followed by annual additions to a welfare benefit fund  

or individual medical account, regardless of the actual allocation date.

     (e)  If an excess amount was allocated to a Participant on an 
     
allocation  date  of  this Plan which coincides with an allocation date of 

another plan, the excess amount attributed to this Plan will be the 

product of:

           (i)   the total excess amount allocated as of such
                 date, times
           
           (ii)  the ratio of (A) the annual additions allocated to 
                 the Participant for the Limitation Year as of
                 such date under this Plan to (B) the total annual
                 additions allocated to the Participant for the Limitation
                 Year as of such date under this and all the other 
                 qualified master or prototype defined contribution plans.

                                  22
<PAGE>     
     
     (f)   Any excess amount attributed to this Plan will be disposed in 
     
the manner described in Section 4.8(d).

4.10 Coverage Under A Non-Prototype Plan.
     -----------------------------------
     If the Participant is covered under another qualified defined 

contribution plan maintained by the Employer which is not a master or  

prototype plan, annual additions which may be credited to  the Participant's 

Account under this Plan for any Limitation year will be limited in accordance 

with Section 4.9 as though the other plan were a master or

prototype plan. 

4.11 Combined Limits.
     ---------------
     If the Employer  maintains, or at any time maintained, a qualified  
     
defined benefit plan covering any Participant in this Plan, the sum  

of the Participant's defined benefit plan fraction and defined contribution  

plan fraction will not exceed 1.0 in any Limitation Year.  If the

sum  of the defined benefit plan fraction and the defined

contribution plan fraction shall exceed 1.0 in any Limitation

Year  for  any Participant  in this  Plan,  the  Plan

Administrator shall adjust  the numerator  of the defined

benefit plan fraction so that the sum of both fractions  shall

not exceed 1.0 in any Limitation Year for such Participant.

4.12 Definitions.
     -----------
     (a)   Annual additions:  The sum  of the following amounts

credited to a Participant's Account for the Limitation Year:

           (i)   Employer contributions;

           (ii)  Employee contributions;

           (iii) Forfeitures;
           
           (iv)  Amounts allocated, after March 31, 1984, to an 
                 individual medical account, as defined in Section
                 415(l)(2) of the Code, which is part of a pension 
                 or annuity plan maintained by the Employer are 
                 treated as annual additions to a defined contribution 
                 plan.  Also amounts  derived  from contributions paid 
                 or accrued after December 31, 1985, in taxable years 
                 ending after such date, which  are  attributable
                 to  post-retirement   medical  benefits, allocated to the
                 separate account of a key employee, as defined in Section
                 419A(d)(3) of the Code, under a welfare benefit  fund,  as
                 defined  in Section 419(e) of the Code, maintained by the
                 Employer are treated as annual additions to a defined
                 contribution plan; and

                                    23
<PAGE>           
           
           (v)   Allocations under a simplified employee pension. 
           
           For this purpose, any excess amount applied under Sections 4.8(d) 
           
           or 4.9(f) in the Limitation Year to reduce Employer contributions  
           
           will  be  considered  annual additions for such Limitation Year.

     (b)   Compensation: For purposes of this Section, compensation shall  
     
mean Section 415 safe-harbor compensation. Compensation is defined as all 

of a Participant's wages, salaries, and fees for professional services and

other amounts  received (without regard to  whether  or not an

amount is paid in cash) for personal services actually rendered

in the  course of employment with  the  Employer  maintaining

the Plan to the extent  that  the amounts are includable in

gross income (including, but not limited to, commissions paid

salesmen,  compensation  for  services on the basis  of  a

percentage  of  profits,  commissions  on  insurance  premiums, tips, 

bonuses, fringe benefits, and reimbursements, or other expense 

allowances under a nonaccountable plan [as described in Section 1.61-2(c)]), 

and excluding the following:
      
     (i)   Employer contributions to a plan of deferred compensation  
           which are not includible in the Employee's gross income for  
           the taxable year in which contributed, or Employer contributions 
           under a simplified employee pension plan, or any distributions 
           from a plan of deferred compensation;
           
     (ii)  Amounts  realized from  the  exercise  of  a
           non qualified stock option, or  when  restricted  stock  (or
           property) held by the Employee either becomes freely
           transferable  or  is no longer subject to a substantial risk of
           forfeiture;
     
     (iii) Amounts  realized from the sale, exchange or
           other disposition of stock acquired under a qualified stock
           option; and

     (iv)  Other amounts which received special tax benefits,
           or contributions made by the Employer (whether or not
           under a salary reduction agreement) towards the purchase of
           an annuity described in Section 403(b) of the Code (whether
           or not the amounts are actually excludable from the gross
           income of the Employee).

     For any  self-employed  individual,  compensation  will

mean earned  income.   For purposes of applying the limitations

of this Section, compensation  for  a  Limitation Year is the

compensation actually paid or includable in gross income during

such Limitation Year.
                                  24
<PAGE>     
     
     Notwithstanding the preceding  sentence,  compensation

for a Participant in a defined contribution plan who is

permanently and totally  disabled  (as defined in Section

22(e)(3) of the Code) is the compensation such  Participant

would  have received  for the Limitation  Year  if the

Participant had been paid at the rate  of compensation  paid

immediately  before becoming  permanently  and totally

disabled;  such  imputed compensation  for  the  disabled

Participant  may be taken into account only if the Participant

is not a highly compensated employee (as defined in Section

414(q) of the Code) and contributions made on behalf of such

Participant are nonforfeitable when made.

     (c)  Defined  benefit fraction:  A fraction, the numerator

of which is the sum of  the  Participant's  projected annual

benefits  under  all  defined  benefit  plans  (whether or  not

terminated) maintained by the Employer, and the denominator  of

which  is the lesser  of  one  hundred  twenty-five percent

(125%) of the dollar limitation  determined  for the Limitation

Year under Sections 415(b) and (d) of the Code or one hundred forty 

percent (140%) of the highest average compensation, including any 

adjustments under Section 415(b) of the Code.

     Notwithstanding  the  above,  if  the   Participant was a

participant  as  of  the  first  day  of the first Limitation

Year beginning after December 31, 1986, in one  or more defined

benefit plans maintained by the Employer which were in

existence on May 6, 1986, the denominator of this fraction will

not  be less than one hundred  twenty-five  percent  (125%)  of

the sum of the  annual benefits under such plans which the

Participant had  accrued as of the close of the last Limitation

Year beginning before  January 1, 1987, disregarding any

changes in the terms and conditions  of the Plan  after  May 5,

1986. The preceding sentence applies only  if the  defined

benefit plans  individually  and  in  the  aggregate satisfied

the requirements  of  Section  415 of the Code for all

Limitation Years beginning before January 1, 1987.

     (d)  Defined contribution dollar limitation:   $30,000  or

if greater,  one-fourth  of the defined benefit dollar

limitation set forth in Section 415(b)(1)  of  the  Code  as

in effect  for the Limitation Year.

     (e)   Defined  contribution fraction:  A fraction,  the

numerator  of  which  is the sum of the annual  additions  to

the Participant's  account  under   all   defined  contribution

plans (whether or not terminated)  

                                  25
<PAGE>

maintained  by  the Employer for the current and all prior limitation  

years (including the  annual additions attributable to the

Participant's nondeductible employee contributions  to  all

defined  benefit plans,  whether  or  not terminated,

maintained by the Employer, and  the  annual additions

attributable  to  all  welfare benefit funds, individual

medical accounts,  and  simplified employee  pensions  maintained  

by the Employer), and the denominator of which is the sum of the 

maximum aggregate amounts for the current and all prior limitation years

of service with the Employer  (regardless  of  whether  a

defined contribution  plan  was  maintained by the Employer).

The maximum aggregate amount in any limitation  year  is  the

lesser  of  one hundred  twenty-five  percent  (125%)  of  the

dollar  limitation determined  under  Sections  415(b)  and (d)

of the Code in effect under  Section  415(c)(1)(A) of the Code

or  thirty-five  percent (35%) of the Participant's

compensation for such year.

     If the Employee  was a participant as of the end of the

first day of the first Limitation  Year  beginning  after

December  31, 1986,  in one or more defined contribution plans

maintained by the Employer  which were in existence on May 6,

1986, the numerator of this fraction will be adjusted if the

sum of this fraction and the defined benefit  fraction  would

otherwise  exceed  1.0 under the terms of this Plan.  Under the

adjustment, an amount equal  to the product  of  (1)  the

excess of the sum of the fractions over 1.0, times (2) the denominator  

of this fraction, will be permanently subtracted from the numerator of 

this fraction.  The adjustment is calculated using the fractions as 

they would be computed as of the end of the last Limitation Year beginning

before January 1, 1987, and disregarding any changes in the

terms and  conditions  of  the Plan  made  after  May  5,

1986, but  using the Code Section 415 limitation applicable to

the first Limitation Year beginning on or after January 1,

1987.

     The annual addition for any Limitation  Year beginning

before January  1,  1987, shall not be recomputed to treat  all

Employee contributions as annual additions.

     (f)  Employer: For purposes of this Section, Employer

shall mean the Employer and all members of a controlled

group of corporations (as defined in Section 414(b) of the

Code as modified by Section 415(h)), all commonly controlled

trades or businesses (as defined in Section 414(c)  of  the

Code as 

                                   26
<PAGE>

modified by Section 415(h)) or affiliated service groups (as defined 

in Section 414(m) of the Code) of which the Employer is a part, and any 

other entity required to be aggregated with the Employer pursuant to

regulations under Section 414(o) of the Code.

     (g)   Excess  amount: The excess of the Participant's  annual 
     
additions for the Limitation Year over the maximum permissible amount.

     (h)   Highest average compensation: The average compensation for 
     
the three consecutive Years of Service with the Employer that produces 

the highest average. A Year of Service with the Employer is the twelve (12)  

consecutive month period defined in Section 1.29 of this Plan.

     (i)   Limitation year:  The  calendar  year.  All qualified plans  
     
maintained by the Employer must use the same Limitation Year. If the 

Limitation Year is amended  to  a different twelve (12) consecutive 

month period, the new Limitation Year must begin on a date within the  

Limitation Year in which the amendment is made.

     (j)   Master or prototype plan: A plan the form of which is the subject  

of a favorable opinion letter from the Internal Revenue Service.

     (k)   Maximum permissible amount:  The maximum annual addition that 

may be contributed  or  allocated  to a Participant's Account under 

the Plan for any Limitation Year shall not exceed the lesser of:

           (i)   the defined contribution dollar limitation, or
           
           (ii)  25 percent of the Participant's  compensation
                 for the Limitation Year.

     The compensation limitation referred  to in (ii) shall

not apply to any contribution for medical benefits (within the

meaning of  Section  401(h) or Section 419A(f)(2) of the

Code) which  is otherwise treated as an annual addition under

Section 415(l)(1) or 419A(d)(2) of the Code.

     If a short Limitation Year is created because of an

amendment changing  the  Limitation   Year   to   a  different

twelve  (12) consecutive month period, the maximum permissible

amount will not exceed  the  defined contribution dollar

limitation multiplied  by the following fraction:

                                  27
<PAGE>

               Number of months in the short Limitation
               ----------------------------------------
                              Year 12

     (l)   Projected annual benefit: The annual retirement benefit (adjusted 

to an actuarially equivalent straight life annuity if such benefit is 

expressed in a form other than a straight life annuity or qualified joint  

and survivor annuity) to which the Participant would be entitled under the  

terms of the Plan assuming:

           (i)  the  Participant will continue employment until Normal 
                Retirement Age under the Plan (or current age, if later), 
                and
           
           (ii) the Participant's compensation for the current 
                Limitation Year and all  other  relevant factors used
                to determine benefits under the Plan will remain constant
                for all  future Limitation Years.

                                28
<PAGE>

                            SECTION 5

             BENEFITS PAYABLE AFTER NORMAL RETIREMENT

5.1  Optional Methods of Payment Available at Retirement.
     ---------------------------------------------------
     All sums credited to a Participant's Account shall become fully vested  

upon attainment of Normal Retirement Age.  Upon actual retirement at or 

after Normal Retirement Age, a Participant shall be entitled to receive 

the full amount credited to his Account as of the Valuation Date or Interim  

Valuation Date immediately preceding the month in which payment is to be 

made, which amount shall be paid to  the  Participant  in  one lump

sum: (i)  within sixty (60) days after the close of the  Plan  Year  in

which the Participant  retires,  or  (ii)  within  sixty (60)

days after the distributable amount has been determined

retroactive to the date in 5.1(i), unless prior to the date of his 

retirement he elects, in the manner prescribed by the Plan Administrator, 

any one of the following method or methods:

     (a)   Payment  of  the  entire  amount  of  the  Participant's

           Account in one lump sum at some future date, not later  than

           one year after Normal Retirement Date;

     (b)   Payment in substantially  equal annual, quarterly or monthly  
     
           installments (including net investment income, gain or loss) 
           
           until the value of such Participant's Account is exhausted. 
           
           Unless the Participant elects otherwise, the payment period 
           
           shall not exceed five (5) years. This five (5) year period 
           
           shall be extended by one (1) year, up to five (5) additional  
           
           years, for each $113,980 (or fraction thereof) by which such

           Participant's Account balance exceeds $569,900 (the dollar

           amounts  herein  are subject  to cost of living adjustments

           prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury); or

     (c)   Any combination of the foregoing.

     Notwithstanding  anything contained in this Section 5.1, lump

sum, installment or any  other  benefits  may not be paid directly from  

the  Plan  in  any  form of a life annuity  or through  the distribution 

of property in any form of a life annuity.

                               29
<PAGE>

      In  addition,  if  the  Participant's   spouse   is  not  the

designated  beneficiary, the method of distribution selected

must assure that at  least  fifty percent (50%) of the present

value of the amount available for  distribution  is  paid

within  the life expectancy of the Participant.

     All  distributions  required  under  this  Section  shall

be determined  and  made  in accordance with the proposed

regulations under  Section  401(a)(9)  of  the  Code,

including the  minimum distribution   incidental benefit

requirement of Section 1.401(a)(9)-2 of the proposed regulations.

5.2  Manner of Payment Following Commencement of Payments.
     ----------------------------------------------------
     Following the commencement of payments  under  Section

5.1, a Participant  and  the Plan Administrator may, notwithstanding

the fact that periodic  benefits  are being paid, agree that

as of any subsequent date the balance credited to such

Participant's Account shall be paid to or applied for  the

benefit of the Participant in accordance with any other payout

method of Section 5.1.

5.3  Required Beginning Date.
     -----------------------
     The entire interest of a Participant must be distributed or begin  

to be distributed no later than the Participant's required beginning date, 

as defined in Section 6.2(f).

5.4  Determination of Amount to be Distributed Each Year.
     ---------------------------------------------------
     If a Participant's interest is to be distributed in other than a 
     
single-sum, the following minimum distribution rules shall apply on or 

after the required beginning date:

     (a)   If a Participant's benefit is to be distributed over

           (1) a period not extending beyond the life expectancy of

           the Participant or the joint life and last survivor

           expectancy of the Participant and the Participant's designated

           beneficiary or (2) a period  not extending beyond the life

           expectancy of the designated beneficiary, the amount

           required to be distributed for each calendar year,

           beginning  with distributions for the first distribution 
           
           calendar year, must at least equal the quotient obtained  
           
           by dividing the Participant's benefit by the applicable 
           
           life expectancy.

                                  30
<PAGE>     
     
     (b)   For calendar years beginning before January 1, 1989, if

           the Participant's  spouse  is  not the designated beneficiary,

           the method of distribution selected  must  assure  that at

           least fifty percent  (50%)  of the present value of the amount

           available  for distribution  is  paid   within   the   life

           expectancy  of  the Participant.

     (c)   For calendar years beginning after December  31, 1988,

           the amount  to be distributed  each  year,  beginning

           with distributions for the first distribution calendar year

           shall not be less than the quotient obtained by dividing the

           Participant's benefit by the lesser of (1) the applicable life

           expectancy or (2) if the Participant's spouse is not the

           designated beneficiary, the applicable divisor determined from

           the table set forth in Q&A-4 of Section  1.401(a)(9)-2 of the

           proposed regulations.  Distributions after the  death of the

           Participant shall be distributed using the applicable life

           expectancy in Section 5.4(a) above as the relevant divisor 
           
           without regard to proposed regulations Section 1.401(a)(9)-2.

     (d)   The minimum distribution required for the Participant's 
     
           first distribution  calendar  year  must  be made

           on or before the Participant's required beginning date.  The

           minimum  distribution for  other calendar years, including the

           minimum distribution  for the distribution calendar year in

           which the Participant's required beginning  date  occurs,

           must be made on or before December 31 of that distribution

           calendar year.

5.5  Definitions.
     -----------
     For purposes of this Section, the definitions contained in 
     
Section 6.2 shall apply.

5.6  Small Accounts.
     --------------
     Any  provision of the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding, the  
     
Administrator shall have  the authority to direct the settlement of 

any Account having a balance of less than three thousand five hundred  

dollars ($3,500.00) by the payment of one lump sum.

                                 31
<PAGE>

                             SECTION 6

         BENEFITS PAYABLE IN THE EVENT OF DEATH OR DISABILITY

6.1  Death Distribution Provisions.
     -----------------------------
     Upon the death of a Participant, the following distribution provisions 
     
shall take effect:

     (a)  If the Participant dies after distribution of his or

her interest has begun, the remaining portion of  such

interest will continue to be distributed at least as rapidly

as under the method of distribution being used prior to the

Participant's death.

     (b)   If  the  Participant dies before distribution of

his or her interest begins,  distribution  of  the

Participant's entire interest  shall  be  completed by

December 31 of the calendar year containing the fifth

anniversary of the Participant's death except to the extent

that an election is made to receive distributions in

accordance with (i) or (ii) below:

           (i)  if any portion of the Participant's interest is payable  

                to a designated beneficiary, distributions may be 
                
                made over the life expectancy or over a period certain 
                
                not greater than the life expectancy of the designated 
                
                beneficiary commencing on or before December 31 of the 
                
                calendar year immediately following the calendar year in

                which the Participant died;

           (ii) if the designated beneficiary is the Participant's 
                
                surviving spouse, the date distributions are

                required to begin in accordance with (i) above shall 
                
                not be earlier than the later of (1) December 31 of 
                
                the calendar year in which the Participant died and 
                
                (2) December 31 of the calendar year in which the 
                
                Participant would have attained age 70 1/2.

     If the Participant has not made an  election pursuant to

this Section 6.1(b) by the time of his or her death,  the

Participant's designated  beneficiary  must elect the method

of distribution  no later than the earlier of  (1) December 31

of the calendar year in which distributions would be required

to begin under this Section, or (2) December 31 of the

calendar year  which contains the fifth anniversary of the date of 

                                   32
<PAGE>

death of the Participant.   If  the Participant has

no designated  beneficiary,  or  if the designated beneficiary

does not elect a method of distribution,  distribution of the

Participant's entire interest must be completed by December 31

of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary  of  the

Participant's death.

     (c)   For  purposes of Section 6.1(b) above, if the surviving

spouse dies after  the  Participant,  but  before payments to

such spouse begin, the provisions of Section 6.1(b), with the

exception of paragraph (ii) therein, shall be applied  as  if

the surviving spouse were the Participant.

     (d)  For purposes of this Section 6.1, any amount paid to

a child of the Participant will be treated as if it had been

paid to the  surviving  spouse  if  the  amount  becomes

payable  to  the surviving spouse when the child reaches the

age of majority.

     (e)   For  the  purposes of this Section 6, distribution

of a Participant's interest is considered to begin on the

Participant's required beginning date (or, if Section 6.1(c) above  

is applicable, the date distribution is required to begin to

the surviving  spouse   pursuant   to   Section   6.1(b)

above). If distribution in the form of an annuity irrevocably  commences

to the Participant  before  the  required  beginning  date,

the date distribution  is  considered  to  begin  is  the date

distribution actually commences.

6.2  Definitions.
     -----------
     For purposes of this Section and Section  5, the following 
     
definitions shall apply:

     (a)  Applicable life expectancy. The life expectancy

(or joint and last survivor expectancy) calculated using the attained 

age of the Participant (or designated beneficiary) as of the participant's  

(or  designated beneficiary's) birthday in the applicable calendar year

reduced by one for each calendar year which has elapsed since the date life 

expectancy was first calculated. If life expectancy is being recalculated,

the applicable life expectancy shall be the life expectancy as so

recalculated. The applicable calendar year shall be the first distribution

calendar year, and if life expectancy is being recalculated such succeeding

calendar year.

     (b)   Designated beneficiary. The individual who is designated as 
     
the beneficiary under the Plan in accordance with Section 401(a)(9) and 

the proposed regulations thereunder.

                                 33
<PAGE>     
     
     (c)   Distribution calendar year. A calendar year for which

a minimum  distribution is required. For distributions beginning 

before the Participant's death, the first distribution calendar year 

is the calendar year immediately preceding the calendar year which 

contains the Participant's required beginning date. For distributions 

beginning after the Participant's death, the first distribution  

calendar year is the calendar  year in which distributions are required 

to begin pursuant to this Section 6.1 above.

     (d)   Life  expectancy.   Life expectancy and joint and last

survivor expectancy are computed by use of the expected return multiples  

in Tables V and VI of Section 1.72-9 of the income  tax regulations.

     Unless  otherwise  elected  by the Participant (or

spouse, in the case of distributions described  in  Section

6.1(b)(ii) above) by the time distributions are required to

begin, life expectancies shall   be   recalculated  annually.

Such election  shall   be irrevocable as  to  the Participant

(or spouse) and shall apply to all  subsequent  years.   The

life expectancy of a nonspouse beneficiary may not be recalculated.

     (e)  Participant's benefit.

           (i)  The Account  balance as of the last valuation date 
                in the calendar year immediately  preceding  the
                distribution calendar year (valuation calendar year) 
                increased by the amount of any contributions or 
                forfeitures allocated to the Account balance as of 
                dates in the valuation calendar year after the valuation 
                date and decreased by distributions made in the valuation 
                calendar year after the valuation date.
           
           (ii) Exception  for second distribution calendar year. 
                For purposes of paragraph (i) above, if any portion of
                the minimum distribution for the first distribution calendar
                year is made in the second distribution calendar year on or
                before the required beginning date, the amount of the minimum
                distribution made in the second distribution calendar year
                shall be treated as if it had been made in the immediately
                preceding distribution calendar year.
     
     (f)  Required beginning date.
           
           (i)  General rule.  The required  beginning  date
                of a Participant is the first day of April of the
                calendar year following the calendar year in which the
                Participant attains  age 70 1/2.
           
           (ii) Transitional rules. The required beginning date of a 
                Participant who attains age 70 1/2  before January
                1, 1988, shall be determined in accordance with (A) or 
                (B) below:

                                    34 
<PAGE>

                (A) Non-5-percent owners.  The required beginning date  
                    of a Participant who is not a 5 percent owner is the 
                    first day of April of the calendar year following the 
                    calendar year in which the  later of retirement
                    or attainment of age 70 1/2 occurs.
                
                (B) 5-percent owners. The required beginning date of a 
                    Participant who is a 5-percent owner during  any
                    year beginning after December 31, 1979, is the first 
                    day of April following the later of:
                      
                    (1) the calendar year in which the Participant 
                        attains age 70 1/2, or

                    (2) the earlier of the calendar year with or within  
                        which ends the Plan Year in which the Participant 
                        becomes a 5-percent owner, or the calendar year
                        in  which  the Participant retires.

                    The required beginning date of a Participant who is 
                    not a  5-percent  owner  who attains age 70
                    1/2 during 1988 and who has not retired as of January 
                    1, 1989, is April 1, 1990.

          (iii) 5-percent owner.  A Participant is treated as
                a 5 percent owner for purposes of this  Section if such
                Participant is a  5-percent  owner  as  defined in Section
                416(i) of the Code (determined in accordance with Section
                416 but without regard to whether the Plan is top-heavy) at
                any time  during the Plan Year ending  with  or  within  the
                calendar year in which  such  owner attains age 66 1/2 or any
                subsequent Plan Year.

           (iv) Once distributions have begun to a 5-percent
                owner under this Section, they must continue  to be
                distributed, even if the Participant ceases to be a 
                5-percent owner  in  a subsequent year.

6.3  Designation of Beneficiary.
     --------------------------
     A Participant at the time he joins the Plan shall

designate a beneficiary or beneficiaries to receive the sums

credited  to his Account  in  the  event  of  his  death,

which designation may be changed by the Participant from time

to time.   To  be effective, the  original  designation  of

beneficiaries  and any subsequent change must be in writing on

the form provided for that purpose by the Plan Administrator.

6.4  Failure to Designate a Beneficiary or Select a Method of Payment
     ----------------------------------------------------------------
     In the event that no beneficiary is properly designated

or in the  event  that  a  beneficiary  designated  by  the

Participant predeceased the Participant and no  new

designation of beneficiary is made, the Plan Administrator, in

its discretion, may direct the Trustee  to  make  payment  of

all sums to  which  the  deceased Participant is entitled to

either:
                                  35
<PAGE>

     (a)   any one or more of the next of kin (including the

           surviving spouse) of the  Participant  and  in such

           proportions as the Plan Administrator may determine; or

     (b)   the legal representative or representatives of the

           estate of the last to die of the Participant or his

           beneficiary. 
           
6.5  Disability of a Participant.
     ---------------------------
     In  the  event of the Disability of a  Participant  prior

to attaining  Normal   Retirement  Age,  such  Participant

shall  be entitled to receive the  entire  amount  credited to

his Account. Payment shall begin not later than the sixtieth

(60th)  day  after the  close  of  the  Plan Year in which the

Administrator receives proof  of the Participant's

Disability, and  shall  be  made  in accordance  with  any  of

the  methods provided in Section 5, as selected by the

Participant.

6.6  Transitional Rule.
     -----------------
     Notwithstanding  the  other  requirements  of  this

Section, distribution  on  behalf of any Employee,  including

a 5-percent owner,  may be made  in  accordance  with  all  of

the  following requirements (regardless of when such

distribution commences):

     (a)   The distribution by the Plan is one which would not

           have disqualified such Plan under Section 401(a)(9) of the

           Code as in effect prior to amendment by the Deficit Reduction

           Act of 1984.

     (b)   The distribution is in accordance with a method of distribution 
           
           designated by the Employee whose interest in the Plan is 
           
           being distributed or, if the Employee is deceased, by a 
           
           beneficiary of such Employee.

     (c)   Such designation was in writing, was signed by the Employee 
           
           or the beneficiary, and was made before January 1, 1984.

     (d)   The Employee had accrued a benefit under the plan as of

           December 31, 1983.

     (e)   The method of distribution designated by the Employee

           or the beneficiary specifies the time at which distribution

           will commence, the period over which distributions will be

                                    36
<PAGE>
           
           
           made, and in the case of any distribution upon the Employee's

           death, the beneficiaries of the Employee listed in order of

           priority.

     A  distribution  upon  death  will  not  be  covered  by this 
     
transitional  rule  unless  the  information  in  the designation

contains the required information described above with respect to the 

distributions to be made upon the death of the Employee.

     For  any distribution which commences before January 1,

1984, but continues  after  December  31,  1983,  the

Employee, or the beneficiary  to  whom  such  distribution  is

being made, will be presumed to have designated the method of

distribution under which the distribution is being made if the

method of  distribution  was specified   in   writing   and

the  distribution  satisfies  the requirements in (a) and (e)

above.

     If a designation is revoked any  subsequent distribution

must satisfy the requirements of Section 401(a)(9)  of the

Code and the proposed  regulations  thereunder.   If a

designation is  revoked subsequent to the date distributions

are  required to  begin, the Plan must distribute by the end

of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the

revocation occurs the total amount  not yet  distributed  which  

would  have been required  to have been distributed  to  satisfy  Section

401(a)(9)  of the Code and  the proposed  regulations

thereunder,  but for the Section  242(b)(2) election.  For

calendar years beginning  after  December 31, 1988, such

distributions must meet the minimum distribution  incidental

benefit  requirements  in  Section  1.401(a)(9)-2  of the

proposed regulations.  Any changes in the designation will be

considered to be  a  revocation  of the  designation.  However, the  

mere substitution or addition of  another beneficiary (one not

named in the designation) under the designation  will  not be

considered to be a revocation of the designation, so long as

such  substitution or addition does not alter the period over

which distributions are to  be  made  under  the designation,

directly or indirectly  (for example, by altering the relevant

measuring life).  In the case in which an amount is transferred 

or  rolled  over  from one plan to another plan, the rules in Q&A J-2 

and Q&A J-3 shall apply.

                                  37
<PAGE>

6.7  Location of Participant or Beneficiary Unknown.
     ----------------------------------------------
     In  the  event that all, or any portion, of the distribution payable 
     
to a Participant or his Beneficiary hereunder shall, at the expiration of 

five (5) years after it shall  become payable, remain  unpaid  solely  by  

reason  of the inability of the  Plan Administrator, after sending a 

certified  letter, return receipt requested, to the last known address, 

and after further diligent effort, to ascertain  the whereabouts of

such Participant or his Beneficiary, the amount so distributable shall 

be allocated in the same manner as a forfeiture, pursuant to this Agreement.   

If an amount is forfeited pursuant to this Section, such amount will  be  

reinstated if a claim is made by the Participant or beneficiary.

                                   38
<PAGE>

                                  SECTION 7
                
        BENEFITS PAYABLE UPON BREAK IN SERVICE OR EMPLOYMENT TERMINATION

7.1  Vesting Schedule.
     ----------------
     Any  Participant who incurs a Break in Service during a vesting 
     
computation period for reasons other than his retirement, death or disability 

shall be entitled to receive at the time and in the manner described 

hereinafter that percentage of the amount credited to his Account as of

the Valuation Date or Interim Valuation Date coincident with or immediately  

preceding the Break in Service, determined as follows:

     (a)   A Regular Account shall be vested in accordance with the 
     
           following schedule:

                 YEARS OF SERVICE           VESTED PERCENTAGE
                 ----------------           -----------------
                   less than 5                      0 
                    5 or more                      100

     (b)   A Rollover Account shall be fully vested at all times. 
     
     Notwithstanding the above provisions of this Section 7.1, a 
     
Participant's vested interest shall not be less than it was before this 

amendment and restatement.  Also, notwithstanding the above vesting schedule,  

an  Employee's right to his or her Account balance is nonforfeitable upon the 

attainment of Normal Retirement Age.

7.2  Distribution.
     ------------  
     (a)  If an Employee terminates service, and the value of the Employee's  
     
vested  Account  balance  derived  from Employer and Employee contributions 

is not greater than $3,500, the Employee will receive a distribution 

of the value of the entire vested portion of such  Account 

balance and the nonvested portion will be treated as a forfeiture.  

For purposes of this Section, if the value of an Employee's vested Account 

balance is zero, the Employee shall be deemed to have received a 

distribution of such vested Account balance.  A Participant's vested 

Account balance shall not include accumulated deductible employee 

                                   39
<PAGE>

contributions within the meaning of Section 72(o)(5)(B) of the Code for 

Plan Years beginning prior to January 1, 1989.

     (b)   If an Employee terminates service, and elects, in accordance 
     
with the requirements of this Section 7, to receive the value of the 

Employee's vested Account balance, the nonvested portion will be treated as

a forfeiture. If the Employee elects to have distributed less than the 

entire vested portion of the Account balance derived from Employer 

contributions, the part of the nonvested portion that will be treated as 

a forfeiture is the total nonvested portion multiplied by a fraction,  

the numerator of which  is  the  amount  of  the distribution

attributable to Employer contributions and the denominator of which is 

the total value of the vested Employer derived Account balance.

     (c)   If  an  Employee receives or is deemed  to receive

a distribution pursuant to this  Section  and  the  Employee

resumes employment  covered  under  this  Plan,  the

Employee's Employer derived Account balance will be restored

to the amount on the date of distribution if the Employee

repays to the Plan the full amount of the distribution

attributable to Employer contributions before the earlier of

five (5) years after the first date  on  which  the

Participant  is  subsequently  reemployed by the Employer, or

the date the Participant incurs five  (5)  consecutive one-

year Breaks in Service following the date of the distribution.

If an Employee is deemed to receive a distribution pursuant

to this Section, and the Employee resumes employment covered

under this Plan before the date the Participant incurs five

(5) consecutive  one-year  Breaks in Service, upon the

reemployment of such Employee, the Employer derived  Account

balance  of the Employee will be restored to the amount on the

date of such deemed distribution.

     In  the event restoration  is  required  under  this

Section 7.2(c), the sources of restoration, in the order

listed, shall be:

           (i)  Forfeitures. To the extent used for restoration,
                they shall not be reallocated, or  used  to  reduce  the
                Employer contribution, as normally provided in Section 4.3.

           (ii) Employer  contribution.   Notwithstanding  Section 3.1,  
                the  Employer  shall  make  any  contribution
                required  for restoration.
                                  
                                   40
<PAGE>


     Such  restoration  shall  be  made  for  the  year  in

which repayment  occurs  within  the  time  prescribed by law,

including extensions  of  time,  for  the filing of the

Employer's  Federal income tax return for such year.

     For purposes of applying  the  limitations  of  Code

Sections 415(c)  and  (e),  and  Section  4.8  and  4.9  of

this Plan,  the repayment  by  the  Participant and the restoration

provided  for above shall not be treated as annual additions.

7.3  Restrictions on Immediate Distributions.
     ---------------------------------------
     (a)  If the value  of  a Participant's vested Account

balance derived from Employer and Employee  contributions

exceeds  (or at the  time  of  any  prior  distribution

exceeded) $3,500, and the Account balance is immediately

distributable, the Participant must consent  to any

distribution of such Account  balance.The  Plan Administrator

shall notify the Participant of the right to defer any distribution

until  the  Participant's  Account  balance is no longer

immediately distributable.  Such notification shall include a

general description of the material features, and an

explanation of the relative values of, the optional forms of

benefit available under  the  Plan  in  a  manner  that  would

satisfy the notice requirements of Section 417(a)(3), and

shall be provided  no  less than  30  days  and  no  more

than  90  days prior to the annuity starting date.  However,

distribution may commence  less  than 30 days  after  the

notice  described  in the preceding sentence is given,

provided  the  distribution is  one  to   which  Sections

401(a)(11) and 417 of the Code do not apply, the Plan

Administrator clearly informs the Participant that the

Participant has a right to a period of  at  least  30 days

after receiving the notice  to consider the decision of

whether or not to elect a distribution (and, if applicable, a particular  

distribution option), and the  Participant, after receiving the notice, 

affirmatively elects a distribution.

     (b)  The consent of the Participant shall not be required to the  
     
extent that a distribution is required to satisfy Section 401(a)(9) or  

Section 415 of the Code. In addition, upon termination of this Plan if  

the Plan does not offer an annuity option (purchased from a commercial 

provider) and if the Employer or any entity within the same controlled group

as the  Employer does not maintain another defined

                                   41    
<PAGE>

contribution plan (other than an employee stock ownership

plan as defined in Section 4975(e)(7) of the Code), the

Participant's  Account balance  will,  without the

Participant's consent, be distributed to the Participant. However, 

if any entity within the  same controlled  group as the Employer

maintains another defined contribution plan (other than an

employee stock ownership plan as defined in Section 4975

(e)(7) of  the  Code) then the  Participant's  account

balance  will  be transferred, without the Participant's

consent, to the other plan if the Participant does not consent

to an immediate distribution.

     (c)  An Account balance is immediately distributable if any

part  of  the  Account  balance  could  be  distributed to the

Participant  (or surviving spouse) before the Participant

attains (or would have  attained  if  not  deceased)  the

later of Normal Retirement Age or age 62.

     (d)   For  purposes of determining the applicability  of

the foregoing consent  requirements  to  distributions made

before the first  day  of the first Plan Year beginning  after

December  31, 1988, the Participant's  vested  Account balance

shall not include amounts  attributable to accumulated deductible employee

contributions  within  the meaning of Section 72(o)(5)(B)  of the Code.

7.4  Payment of Account Balance.
     --------------------------
Unless  the Participant  elects  otherwise,  distribution of benefits will 

begin no later than the 60th day after the latest of the close of the 

Plan Year in which:

     (a)   the Participant attains age 65 (or Normal Retirement

           Age, if earlier);

     (b)   occurs the 10th anniversary  of the  year in which the

           Participant commenced participation in the Plan; or

     (c)   the Participant terminates service with the Employer.

Notwithstanding  the  foregoing,  the failure of a Participant

to consent to a distribution while a benefit is immediately

distributable,  within  the  meaning  of Section 7.3 of the Plan,

shall be deemed to be an election to defer commencement

of payment of any benefit sufficient to satisfy this Section. 

7.5  Treatment of Accounts in Pay Status.
     -----------------------------------
     If payments are to be made under Section  5.1(b)  or

(c), at the election of the Plan Administrator:

                                  42
<PAGE>

     (a)   The Participant's Account shall continue to share in

           the annual and interim valuations  of  the  trust  fund and

           in the adjustment of the accounts for investment income,

           gains  or losses as provided in Sections 4.4 and 4.5; or

     (b)   The  Plan  Administrator may instruct the trustee to

           segregate the Participant's Account which shall then be

           separately valued and adjusted each year to reflect the

           actual income derived thereon and any distributions made

           therefrom under this Plan. 
           
7.6  Direct Rollovers
     ----------------
     (a)   This Section applies to distributions  made on or after

           January 1, 1993.  Notwithstanding any provision of the Plan

           to the contrary  that would otherwise limit distributee's

           election under this Section, a distributee may elect, at

           the time and in the manner prescribed by the Plan

           Administrator, to have any portion of  an eligible rollover

           distribution that is equal  to  at  least

           $500 paid directly to an eligible retirement plan specified

           by the distributee in a direct rollover.  The distributee may

           select only one (1) eligible retirement plan to which a

           direct rollover may be made.

     (b)   Definitions

           (i)  Eligible  rollover  distribution: An  eligible 
                rollover distribution is any distribution of all or
                any portion of the  balance  to  the credit of the
                distributee, except  that  an eligible rollover distribution
                does not include:  any distribution that is one of a series
                of substantially equal periodic payments (not less frequently
                than annually)  made  for  the  life (or life expectancy) of
                the distributee or the joint lives (or  joint  life
                expectancies) of the distributee and the distributee's
                designated beneficiary, or  for  a specified period of ten
                years or more; any distribution to the extent  such
                distribution is required under Section 401(a)(9) of the
                Code;  the  portion  of any  other distribution that is not
                includible  in  gross income (determined without  regard  to
                the exclusion for net unrealized  appreciation with   respect
                to employer securities); and  any other distribution(s) 
                that is reasonably  expected  to  total  less
                than $200 during a year.


           (ii) Eligible  retirement plan:  An eligible
                retirement plan  is an individual retirement  account
                described in  Section 408(a)  of the Code, an individual
                retirement annuity described in Section 408(b)  of  the Code,
                an annuity plan described in Section 403(a) of the Code, or a
                qualified plan  described  in  Section 401(a)  of  the  Code,
                that accepts  the  distributee's eligible rollover
                distribution. However,  in  the case  

                                    43
<PAGE>                
                
                of  an  eligible
                rollover  distribution to  the  surviving  spouse,   an
                eligible retirement plan is an individual retirement account
                or  individual retirement annuity.
           
          (iii) Distributee:  A distributee includes an
                Employee or former Employee. In addition, the
                Employee's or former Employee's surviving spouse  
                and the Employee's  or former Employee's 
                spouse  or  former  spouse  who  is the alternate
                payee under a qualified domestic relations order, as defined
                in Section 414(p) of the Code, are distributees with regard
                to the interest of the spouse or former spouse.


           (iv) Direct rollover:  A direct rollover is  a
                payment by  the Plan to the eligible retirement plan
                specified by the distributee.

7.7  Amendment of Vesting Schedule.
     -----------------------------
     If the Plan's vesting schedule  is  amended,  or  the

Plan is amended  in  any  way  that  directly  or  indirectly

affects the computation of the Participant's nonforfeitable

percentage  or  if the  Plan  is  deemed  amended by an

automatic change to or from a top-heavy vesting schedule,

each Participant with at least three (3)  Years  of  Service

with the Employer  may  elect,  within  a

reasonable period after the  adoption  of the amendment or

change, to  have  the nonforfeitable percentage computed

under the  Plan without regard  to such amendment or change.

For Participants who do not have at least  one  (1)  Hour  of

Service in any Plan Year beginning after December 31, 1988,

the preceding sentence shall be applied by substituting "five (5)

Years of Service" for "three (3) Years of Service" where

such language appears.

     The  period  during  which  the election may  be  made

shall commence with the date the amendment  is  adopted  or

deemed to be made and shall end on the latest of:

     (a)   60 days after the amendment is adopted;

     (b)   60 days after the amendment becomes effective; or 
     
     (c)   60 days after the Participant is issued written notice

           of the amendment by the Employer or Plan Administrator.

                                    44
<PAGE>

                          SECTION 8

                    FORM OF DISTRIBUTION

8.1  Payment in Shares or Cash.
     -------------------------
     Any distributions under Sections 5, 6, and 7 shall be

made by the  Trustee  by  distributing  whole  shares of

Company Stock, as determined by the Trustee, at the market

value of such shares on a national securities exchange or a

national quotation system, with the value of any fractional

shares paid in cash.

     The Trustee may, with the consent of the  Participant  or

if the  Participant  is deceased, his beneficiary, make

distributions under Sections 5, 6  and  7  in  cash.   The

amount of cash to be distributed to a Participant for shares

actually  allocated to his Account  shall  be  determined

based on the market value  of  the shares  of  Company  Stock

as  of the  trading  date  immediately preceding the

distribution. 

8.2  Dividends.
     ---------
     Cash  dividends  on  shares of  Company  Stock  allocated

to Participants' Accounts may  be  paid to Participants

currently, or at such time as payment is otherwise  due under

Sections 5, 6, and 7, as determined in the sole discretion of

the Plan Administrator, exercised in a uniform and nondiscriminatory manner.

                                  45
<PAGE>


                                SECTION 9

                        MERGER OR CONSOLIDATION

9.1  Merger or Consolidation.
     -----------------------
     In the event of a merger or consolidation  of  this Plan

with any  other  plan,  or  in  the  event  of a transfer of

assets  or liabilities of this Plan to any other plan,  each

Participant  in the  Plan  will  receive  a  benefit

immediately after the merger, consolidation, or transfer (as

if the Plan then terminated) which is at least equal to the

benefit  the Participant would have been entitled  to

immediately  before such merger,  consolidation,  or transfer

(as if the Plan had then terminated).

9.2  Merger Accounts.
     ---------------
     In the event any other plan transfers its assets to this

Plan or merges with this Plan, this  Plan being the surviving

plan, the Plan Administrator, or if the Plan  Administrator

so determines, the  Trustee, shall create a "Merger Account"

for each Participant whose  accounts  are  transferred  to

this Plan.  A Participant's Merger   Account  shall  be  paid

to the  Participant   or   his beneficiaries  in  accordance

with Sections 5, 6, 7 and 8.  Merger Accounts shall

participate  in the earnings and losses in the fund and in

forfeitures and Employer  contributions  in the same manner as

Regular Accounts. 

9.3  Merger Agreement or Agreement Relating to Transfer of Assets. 
     ------------------------------------------------------------
     Upon  instructions  of  the Plan Administrator, the Trustee

shall enter into a merger agreement  with  any other plan or

shall enter into an agreement respecting the transfer  of

assets of this Plan to another plan or from any other plan to

this Plan; however, if this Plan is a profit-sharing plan

which does not provide for a life    annuity   form   of

payment  to Participants,  the   Plan Administrator shall not enter  into

any agreement for the transfer of  assets  from  another  plan

to this Plan if the proposed transferor plan is a defined benefit plan,  

money purchase pension plan (including a target benefit plan), stock bonus,  

or profit sharing plan which would otherwise provide for a life

annuity form of payment to the participants in such plan.

                                   46
<PAGE>

                              SECTION 10

                           CLAIMS PROCEDURE

10.1 Filing of a Claim for Benefits.
     ------------------------------
     (a)   Every  Participant and beneficiary (the claimant) who

thinks he is entitled to a benefit under  the  Plan  or who is

not satisfied  that the correct benefit is being paid shall

have the right to file a claim for such benefit at any time.

     (b)  Such  claim  must  be  filed  in  writing  with the

Plan Administrator.  The claim shall set forth the grounds  on

which it is based, but no particular form of written claim is

required. 

10.2 Notification to Claimant of Decision.
     ------------------------------------
     (a)   The Plan Administrator shall furnish notice of its

decision (to grant the claim or to deny it in whole or in part)

to the claimant within sixty (60) days after the  claim is

filed. If the Plan Administrator fails to give notice within

sixty (60) days after the claim is filed, it shall be

considered wholly denied.

     (b)  If the claim is denied in whole or in  part,  the  notice

of  denial  by  the  Plan Administrator to the claimant shall

set forth in writing in a  manner  calculated  to be understood

by the claimant:

          (i)   The specific reason or reasons for the denial;
           
          (ii)  Specific reference to pertinent plan provisions on
                which the denial is based;
           
          (iii) A description of any additional material or information 
                necessary for the claimant to perfect the claim
                and an explanation of why such material or information is
                necessary; and
          
          (iv)  An explanation of the Plan's claim review
                procedure as set forth in Section 10.3.

10.3 Review Procedure.
     ----------------
     (a)  A claimant may appeal the denial of a claim,

including a claim considered denied, to the Plan Administrator

for a full and fair review of the claim.

                                   47
<PAGE>

     (b)  A request for review of a denied claim must  be

made in writing to the Plan Administrator within sixty (60)

days after the date  of  the  notice  denying the claim or

within sixty (60) days after the date on which the claim is

considered denied.

     (c)  The claimant or his authorized representative shall

have the right, during the review  procedure,  to  review all

pertinent documents and to submit issues and comments in

writing to the Plan Administrator.

10.4 Decision on Review.
     ------------------
     (a)  A decision on review shall be made promptly  by the

Plan Administrator and not later than sixty (60) days after

it receives the request for review.

     (b)   The  decision  on review shall be in writing and

shall include specific reasons for  the  decision,  written

in a manner calculated to be understood by  the claimant

and  specific references to pertinent  Plan  provisions on

which the decision is based.

10.5 Agent for Service of Process.
     ----------------------------
     In  any  action  against  the  Plan   or   Trust,   the

Plan Administrator,  whose  address  is 100 Century Park

Drive, Monroe, Louisiana 71203, shall be the agent  for

service of process of the Plan and Trust.

                                  48
<PAGE>

                              SECTION 11

                      ADOPTION BY OTHER COMPANIES

11.1 Rights of Other Companies to Participate.
     ----------------------------------------
     Any  other corporation, association, joint venture, proprietorship   
     
or  partnership (hereinafter called adopting companies) may adopt the 

terms of this Plan by a resolution of the Board of Directors of such 

entity in the form specified by the Plan Administrator, provided that 

the Board of Directors of the Employer  and the Plan Administrator

both approve such participation. Unless otherwise provided in the Plan  

or in a separate written agreement, all subsidiaries of the Employer shall

be  deemed to be adopting companies participating in the Plan.

A newly formed subsidiary, or a subsidiary acquired by the

Employer, shall  be  deemed  to  be  an  adopting  company as

of the date of formation  or acquisition, as the case may  be,

unless  otherwise provided in the Plan or in a separate written agreement.

11.2 Control of Plan by the Employer.
     -------------------------------
     The administrative  powers  and control  of the Employer as provided  
     
in the Plan, shall not be deemed diminished  under the Plan by reason of 

participation of adopting companies in the Plan, and such administrative

powers and control specifically granted herein to the Employer with respect 

to the appointment of the Plan Administrator and Trustee and other matters  

shall apply only  with respect to the Employer.  The Plan Administrator,

under  the control of the Employer, shall also be the Plan

Administrator for the adopting companies.

11.3 Allocations of Contributions and Forfeitures.
     --------------------------------------------
     The amounts forfeited by Employees of the Employer

and adopting  companies shall be allocated  across  company

lines  in accordance  with  the  provisions  of  Sections  4.3

hereof to all Participants  who  were  Employees of the

Employer and  applicable adopting companies during  the Plan

Year in which such forfeitures occurred and the contributions

made  by the  Employer  and  each adopting  company  shall  be

allocated across  company  lines in accordance  with  the

provisions of  Section  4.2  hereof  to Participants who were

Employees  of the  Employer  and applicable adopting companies      

during the Plan Year for which 

                                  49
<PAGE>

each contribution is made. One member of an  affiliated group may

make contributions  on  behalf  of  another member  of  such

group  in accordance with Regulations Section 1.404(a)-10, as

amended.  

11.4 Withdrawal of Employer or Adopting Companies.
     --------------------------------------------
     The Employer or adopting company  may  withdraw  at  any

time without affecting the others in the Plan.  Such

withdrawal may be accompanied  by  such  amendments  to  the

Plan as the withdrawing Employer or adopting company shall

deem  proper to continue a plan for its Employees separate and

distinct from this  Plan,  but, if such withdrawing party does

not provide for the continuance  of  a separate  plan for its

Employees, such withdrawal shall constitute

a termination of this Plan with respect to that withdrawing

party. The Employer may in its absolute discretion terminate

any adopting company's participation  at any time.  Withdrawal

from the Plan by any party shall not affect  the  continued

operation  of the Plan with respect to the other participating

parties.

11.5 Amendment of Plan.
     -----------------
     The participation in the Plan of adopting companies shall

not limit the power of the Employer under Trust Section 4.1;

provided, however, that the Employer shall deliver notice of

each  amendment to  the  Plan to each adopting company within

thirty (30) days  of such amendment.   Amendments by the

Employer shall be binding upon all adopting companies  to  the

extent  accepted by such adopting companies. Acceptance  by

each such company  shall  be  presumed unless  the  Employer and 

Trustee  are  given  written  notice of refusal to accept  

within  sixty  (60)  days after the date of the amendment.  

The Employer and each adopting  company may

modify the provisions of the Plan as it pertains only to its

own Employees by the  adoption  of  an  amendment  to  the

Plan specifying   such modifications which shall pertain only

to its Employees except  to the  extent  that Employer

amendments are presumed accepted by the adopting companies,

and  shall not affect the continued operation of the Plan with

respect to any other party.

                                   50            
<PAGE>

11.6 Termination of One or More Parties.
     ----------------------------------
     The Plan may be terminated  by all parties at any time

in the manner described in Trust Section  4.2, on the part of

each party. The  Plan  may be terminated in the manner

described above  with respect to one,  but less than all the

parties hereto and the Plan continued for the remaining

parties.

11.7 Reference to Employer in Plan.
     -----------------------------
     Except as provided  in this Section 11 and unless the

context indicates otherwise, references  to  "Employer" in

this Plan shall mean the Employer and all adopting companies.

                               51
<PAGE>

                             SECTION 12

                PROVISIONS RELATING TO PARTICIPANTS

12.1 Information Required of Participants.
     ------------------------------------
     Each Participant shall furnish to the Plan Administrator such

information as the Plan Administrator  shall  deem  necessary

and desirable for purposes of administering the Plan.

Any  notice or information which, according to the

provisions of the Plan,  must  be  filed with the Plan

Administrator shall be deemed so filed if addressed  to  100

Century Park Drive, Monroe, Louisiana 71203, and either

delivered in  person or mailed to such address, postage fully

paid.
                                  52                                 
<PAGE>
                              SECTION 13

                          PLAN ADMINISTRATOR

13.1 Administration by Plan Administrator.
     ------------------------------------
     This Plan shall be administered by a Committee, which shall be 
     
the "Plan Administrator" and "named fiduciary."

13.2 Appointment of Committee.
     ------------------------
     The  Board  of Directors of the Employer shall fix the

number of persons to be members  of  the  Committee  (which

number shall always be an odd number) and shall appoint

persons from  among the officers and Employees of the Employer to serve

as members  of the Committee.   The  Committee  shall  have

complete  control of the administration of the Plan.  Members

of the Committee  shall serve without  remuneration  for so

long as it is mutually agreeable  to them and to the Employer

but  they shall  be  reimbursed for all expenses incurred by

them in the performance of their duties.  Any member  may

resign by delivering his written resignation  to  the Employer

and to  the other members of the committee.  The Board of

Directors of the Employer  may remove or replace any member of

the Committee,  or fill  any  vacancy,  no  matter  how

created,  by notifying the member concerned  and  the  other

members  of  the Committee in writing.

13.3 Majority Action.
     ---------------
     Action  taken  by  a majority of the members of the

Committee shall,  to  the extent lawful,  be  binding  upon

the Employees, Participants,  and  all  persons claiming any

right under the Plan through any Employee or Participant.

The Committee  may  act by vote,  at a meeting, or in writing,

without a meeting. Any act  of the Committee  shall  be sufficiently 

evidenced if certified to by any two members thereof or by any person  

not a member of the Committee but who is designated, in writing, as

the Secretary  of the  Committee  by  a majority thereof.  A

member of the Committee who is a Participant  shall  not  vote

on  any question relating specifically to himself, and in the

event the remaining members of the  

                                53
<PAGE>

Committee are unable to agree to a determination of such question,  

another person shall  be selected  by  the  Board  of Directors  of  the

Employer   for the  purpose  of  making  such determination.

13.4 Powers of the Plan Administrator.
     --------------------------------
     The Committee as Plan Administrator  shall have the

following powers:

     (a)   To make rules and regulations for the administration  of

           the Plan which are not inconsistent with the  terms and

           provisions hereof;

     (b)   To construe all terms, provisions, conditions and

           limitations of this Plan;

     (c)   To correct any defect or supply any omission or

           reconcile any inconsistency that may appear in the Plan,  in

           such manner and to such extent as it shall deem expedient to

           carry this Plan  into  effect  for  the  greatest  benefit

           of all interested parties;

     (d)   To select, employ and compensate from time to time such

           consultants, actuaries, accounts, attorneys, and other

           agents and Employees as the Plan Administrator may deem

           necessary  or advisable in  the proper and efficient

           administration of this Plan and Trust to carry out

           nonfiduciary and fiduciary responsibilities (other  than

           trustee responsibilities  as  defined  in  Section 405(c)(3)

           of ERISA);

     (e)   To determine all  questions relating to the eligibility

           of Employees to become Participants,  and  to determine the

           amount of compensation upon  which the allocation of  each

           Participant shall be calculated;

     (f)   To make all determination  and  computations  concerning

           the  benefits,  credits  and  debits to which any

           Participant or beneficiary is entitled under the Plan;

     (g)   To  determine  all questions relating to the

           administration  of  this  Plan  and Trust (1) when

           differences of opinion arise between the Employer, the

           Trustee, a Participant, or any of them, and (2) whenever it
           
           is deemed advisable to determine such questions in order to 
           
           promote the uniform administration of the Plan for the greatest 
           
           benefit of all parties concerned;

                                    54
<PAGE>

     (h)   To appoint any Employee of the  Employer  to  act as

           secretary  for  the  Plan  Administrator, and  to  authorize

           the secretary so appointed to act  for  the  Plan

           Administrator in all routine matters connected with the

           administration of the Plan;

     (i)   To determine whether a Participant  is disabled for the

           purposes of Section 6.5 hereof;

     (j)   To  appoint  an  investment  manager  or  managers (as

           defined in Section 3(38) of ERISA) to manage (including  the

           power to  acquire  and dispose of) all or any part of the

           assets of  the Plan; and

     (k)   To provide for the allocation of fiduciary  responsibilities 
     
           (other  than  trustee responsibilities as defined in Section 
           
           405(c)(3) of ERISA). Actions  dealing  with fiduciary

           responsibilities shall be taken in writing and the performance

           of agents, counsel, and fiduciaries to whom  fiduciary

           responsibilities   have   been   delegated   shall   be

           reviewed periodically.

     The  foregoing list of express powers is not intended  to

be either complete  or  conclusive, but the Plan Administrator

shall, in addition, have such powers as it may reasonably

determine to be necessary to the performance  of  its  duties

under  the Plan and Trust.  The decision or judgment of the

Plan Administrator  on any question  arising  in  connection

with the exercise of any of its powers   or  any  matter  of

the Plan  administration  or the determination of benefits shall 

be final, binding and conclusive upon all parties concerned.

13.5 Duties of the Plan Administrator.
     --------------------------------
     The Committee as  Plan  Administrator shall, as a part of

its general duty to supervise and administer the Plan:

     (a)   Establish and maintain  the Accounts described herein

           and direct the maintenance of such  other  records  and

           the preparation  of  such  forms  as  are  required  for the

           efficient administration of the Plan;

     (b)   Give  the  Trustee  specific directions in  writing in

           respect to:

                                     55   
<PAGE>

           (i)  The making of distribution payments, giving the names  
                of the payees, the amounts to be paid and the time
                or times when payments shall be made; and
           
           (ii) The making of any other payments which the
                Trustee is not by the terms of the trust agreement
                authorized to make without a direction in writing 
                by the Plan Administrator; and 
                
     (c)   Prepare an annual report, as of the end of the Plan Year.

13.6 Expenses.
     --------
     The Employer shall reimburse the trust fund for  all

expenses (other  than  normal brokerage charges which are

included  in  the cost of securities purchased or charged to

proceeds in the case of sales) incurred  in  the

administration of  the Plan under Trust Section   1.5,

including  the  expenses and fees of the Trustee, except that any 

such expenses not so reimbursed by the Employer shall be paid from the 

trust fund.

                                    56
<PAGE>                              
                              SECTION 14

                              ROLLOVERS

14.1 Rollover Contributions.
     ----------------------
     If the Plan Administrator instructs the Trustee in writing

to accept  Rollover Contributions, any Employee who is a

Participant or who will become a Participant if he completes a

Year of Service in  an  Eligibility   Computation   Period

may make  a  Rollover Contribution  at  any time.  The Trustee  

shall  credit  the fair market value of any Rollover Contribution 

to a Rollover  Account of the  contributing  Participant  as  of the date

the  Rollover Contribution is made.  A Rollover Account  shall

be  fully vested and  shall  be  paid  to  the Participant or

his beneficiaries  in accordance with Section 5,  6,  7  and

8. Rollover Accounts shall participate in the earnings and

losses of the Trust Fund, but not in forfeitures or Employer

contributions.

14.2 Definition of Rollover Contribution.
     -----------------------------------
     The term Rollover Contribution is defined as the contribution of 
     
a Rollover Amount as defined in Section  14.3 to the Trustee on or 

before the sixtieth (60th) day immediately following the day the 

contributing Participant receives the Rollover Amount.

14.3 Definition of Rollover Amount.
     -----------------------------
     The term Rollover Amount is defined as:

     (a)   the  amount distributed to the Participant is deposited

           to the Plan no later than the sixtieth day after such

           distribution was received by the Participant;

     (b)   the amount  distributed  is  not  one  of  a series of

           substantially  equal periodic payments made for the life (or

           life expectancy) of the  Participant  or the joint lives (or

           joint life expectancies) of the Participant and  the

           Participant's designated beneficiary, or for a specified

           period of ten years or more;

     (c)   the  amount  distributed  is not  required  under Code

           Section 401(a)(9);

                                   57
<PAGE>     
     
     (d)   if  the  amount  distributed  included   property  such

           property is rolled over, or if sold the proceeds of such

           property may be rolled over;

     (e)   the  amount  distributed  is includible in gross income

           (determined  without regard to the exclusion  for  net

           unrealized appreciation with respect to employer securities).

     In addition, if the Plan Administrator so instructs the Trustee  
     
     in  writing, the Plan will accept any eligible rollover distribution 
     
     (as defined in Section 7.6) directly to the Plan. 
     
           Rollover Amounts which relate to distributions prior to

     January 1, 1993, must be  made  in  accordance with paragraphs (a) 
     
     through (e) and additionally meet the requirements  of paragraph (f):

     (f)   The  distribution  from  the qualified plan constituted

           the Participant's entire interest in such Plan and was

           distributed within one taxable year to the Participant:

           (i)  on  account of separation  from  service,  a
                Plan termination, or in the  case  of  a  profit-sharing or
                stock bonus plan, a complete discontinuance of contributions
                under  such plan within the meaning of Code Section
                402(a)(6)(A), or
           
           (ii) in  one  or  more distibutions which constitute 
                a qualified lump sum distribution within the
                meaning of Code Section 402(e)(4)(A), determined without
                reference  to subparagraphs (B) and (H).

14.4 Conduit Rollovers.
     -----------------
     Rollover Contribution may also be made through  an individual

retirement  account (IRA) qualified under Code Section  408

where the IRA was used  as a conduit from a qualified plan,

the Rollover Contribution is made  in  accordance with the

rules provided under paragraphs (a) through (e)  and the

Rollover Contribution does not include any regular IRA

contributions,  or earnings thereon, which the Participant may

have made to the IRA.  Rollover Contributions, which relate to

distributions prior to January  1,  1993,  may  be made

through an IRA in accordance with paragraphs (a) through (f)

and additional requirements as provided in the previous

sentence. The Trustee shall  not  be  held  responsible  for

determining the taxfree status of any Rollover Contribution

made under this Plan.

                                  58

<PAGE>                              

                               SECTION 15

               TRADES OR BUSINESSES UNDER COMMON CONTROL

15.1 Definitions.
     -----------
     All  employees  of all corporations which are  members

of a controlled groups of corporations (as defined in Section

414(b) of the Code) and all employees  of  all trades or businesses

(whether or not incorporated) which are under common control

(as defined in Section  414(c) of the Code) will be  treated

as employed  by  a single employer.

     Such  other trades or businesses in a group with the

Employer are  hereinafter   called   "Associated  Employer."

The   term "transferred  participant"  means  an Employee of the Employer

who was  a  Participant  in  this  Plan  and who  is  employed

by  an Associated  Employer  after his services  with  the

Employer  are terminated.

     In addition to the  foregoing,  Hours of Service will

also be credited  for  any  individual required under  Section

414(m)  or 414(n) of the Code to  be  considered  an employee

of any employer aggregated under Section 414(b), (c), or (m)

or the Code.

     Any Leased Employee as defined in Section  1.17(a), excluding any 
     
Leased Employee described in Section 1.17(b), shall be treated

as an employee of the recipient employer.

15.2 Allocation.
     ----------
     No  Employee  shall be credited with any compensation

for a year  under Section 4.2  of  this  Plan  except  with

respect to compensation  actually  paid  to him by the

Employer or accrued by the Employer with respect to him.

15.3 Participation and Vesting.
     -------------------------
     All  of an Employee's service  with  an  Associated

Employer shall be counted  as service with the Employer for

all purposes of this Plan, except as  otherwise  provided  in

the Plan  or  in a separate written agreement.

                                  59  
<PAGE>

15.4 Vesting and Distributions.
     -------------------------
     In  determining  whether  a  transferred participant

incurs a Break in Service under this Plan, his  service  with

the Employer shall  be  combined  with his service with an

Associated Employer. In  determining whether  a  transferred

participant  subsequently incurs  a  Break  in  Service  with

the  Employer for vesting and distribution  purposes, his Hours of Service  

with Associated Employers shall be counted.

                                  60
<PAGE>

                              SECTION 16

                         TOP HEAVY PLAN RULES

16.1 Key Employee.
     ------------
     Any  Employee or former Employee (and  the  beneficiaries

of such Employee) who at any time during the determination

period was an officer of the  Employer if such individual's  annual

compensation exceeds fifty percent (50%)  of the dollar

limitation under Section 415(b)(1)(A) of the Code, an owner

(or considered an owner under Section 318 of the Code) of one

of the  ten  largest interests  in  the  Employer  if  such

individual's  compensation exceeds one hundred percent (100%)

of the dollar limitation  under Section 415(c)(1)(A) of the

Code, a five percent (5%) owner of the Employer,  or a one

percent (1%) owner of the Employer who has  an annual

compensation  of  more than $150,000.  Annual compensation

means compensation as defined in  Section  415(c)(3)  of the

Code, but  including amounts contributed by the Employer

pursuant  to  a salary reduction  agreement   which  are

excludable  from  the Employee's  gross  income under Section

125,  Section 402(e)(3), Section  402(h)(1)(B)   or   Section

403(b)  of  the Code.   The determination period is the Plan

Year containing the determination date and the four (4)

preceding Plan Years.

     The determination of who is a Key Employee will be made in accordance 
     
with Section 416(i)(1) of the Code and the regulations thereunder.

16.2 Non-Key Employee.
     ----------------
     Any Employee who is not a Key Employee.

16.3 Super Top Heavy Plan.
     --------------------
     For  any Plan Year beginning after December  31,  1983,

this Plan is a Super  Top Heavy Plan if any of the following

conditions exists:

     (a)   If the top heavy ratio for this Plan exceeds ninety

           percent (90%) and this Plan is not part of any required  
           
           aggregation group or permissive aggregation group of plans.

                                   61
<PAGE>     
     
     (b)   If this Plan is a part of a required aggregation group of 
     
           plans but not part of a permissive aggregation group and the top 
           
           heavy ratio for the group of plans exceeds ninety percent (90%).

     (c)   If this Plan is a part of a required aggregation group

           and part of a permissive aggregation group of plans and the

           top heavy ratio for the permissive aggregation group

           exceeds ninety percent (90%).

16.4 Top Heavy Plan.
     --------------
     For any Plan Year  beginning  after  December  31, 1983,

this Plan  is  a  Top  Heavy  Plan  if  any of the following

conditions exists:

     (a)   If the top heavy ratio for this Plan  exceeds sixty

           percent (60%) and this Plan is not part of any required 
           
           aggregation group or permissive aggregation group of plans.

     (b)   If this Plan  is a part of a required aggregation group

           of plans but not part of a permissive aggregation group

           and the top heavy ratio for the group  of plans exceeds

           sixty percent (60%).

     (c)   If this Plan is a part of a required aggregation group

           and part of a permissive aggregation group of plans and

           the top heavy ratio for the permissive aggregation group

           exceeds sixty percent (60%).

16.5 Top Heavy Ratio.
     ---------------
     (a)   If the Employer  maintains  one  or more defined

contribution  plans  (including  any  Simplified Employee

Pension Plan) and the Employer has not maintained any

defined benefit plan which during the five (5) year period

ending  on the determination date(s) has or had accrued

benefits, the top heavy  ratio for this Plan alone or for

the required or permissive aggregation  group as appropriate

is  a fraction, the numerator of which is the sum  of the

account balances  of all Key Employees as of the determination date(s) 

(including any part of any account balance distributed in the five (5)

year period ending on the determination date(s)), and the

denominator of which  is  the  sum  of  all  Account  balances

(including any 
                                62
<PAGE>

part of any Account balance distributed in the

five  (5)  year  period  ending  on  the  determination  date(s)),

both computed  in  accordance  with  Section  416  of  the

Code and the regulations thereunder.  Both the numerator and

denominator of the top  heavy  ratio  are  adjusted  to

reflect any contribution  not actually made as of the

determination date, but which is required to be taken into

account on that date under  Section  416  of  the Code and the

regulations thereunder.

     (b)  if the Employer maintains one or more defined

contribution  plans (including  any  Simplified  Employee

Pension Plan) and the Employer  maintains  or  has  maintained

one or more defined benefit plans which during the five (5)

year period ending on the determination  date(s) has or has

had any accrued benefits, the  top  heavy  ratio for any

required or permissive  aggregation group as appropriate  is a

fraction, the numerator of which is the sum of account

balances  under the aggregated defined contribution plan or

plans for all Key Employees, determined in accordance with (a)

above, and the present  value  of  accrued  benefits under the

aggregated defined benefit plan or plans for all  Key

Employees as of the determination date(s), and the denominator

of which is the sum of the account balances under the aggregated defined

contribution  plan  or  plans  for  all Participants

determined in accordance  with  (a)  above,  and the present

value  of accrued benefits  under  the  defined  benefit

plan  or  plans for  all Participants as of the determination

date(s),  all determined  in accordance  with  Section  416

of  the  Code and the regulations thereunder.  The accrued

benefits under a defined  benefit plan in both  the  numerator

and denominator of the top heavy  ratio  are increased for any

distribution  of an accrued benefit made in the five (5) year  

period ending on the determination date.

     (c)  For purposes of (a) and (b)  above, the value of

account balances  and  the  present  value  of accrued

benefits will  be determined as of the most recent valuation

date that falls within or  ends  with  the  twelve  (12)

month period ending on the determination date, except as provided 

in Section 416 of the Code and the regulations thereunder for the first 

and second plan years of  defined benefit plan.   The  account balances and

accrued benefits of a Participant (1) who is not  a  Key

Employee but who was  a  Key  Employee  in  a prior year, or

(2) who has  not  been credited  with at least one Hour  of

Service with  any  

                                  63
<PAGE>

employer maintaining  the  Plan at any time

during the five (5) year period ending  on  the  determination

date will  be  disregarded. The calculation of the  top  heavy  

ratio, and to the extent to which distributions,  rollovers, and 

transfers are taken into account will be made in accordance  with  

Section  416 of the Code and the regulations  thereunder.  Deductible 

employee contributions  will not be taken into  account for purposes of

computing the top heavy ratio.  When aggregating  plans  the

value of account balances and accrued  benefits  will  be

calculated   with  reference  to  the determination dates that fall 

within the same calendar year.

     The  accrued  benefit  of  a  Participant other  than  a

Key Employee shall be determined under (a)  the  method,  if

any, that uniformly  applies for accrual purposes under all

defined  benefit plans maintained  by  the  Employer,  or  (b)

if there is no such method,  as  if  such  benefit accrued not

more rapidly  than  the slowest  accrual  rate permitted

under the  fractional  rule  of Section 411(b)(1)(C) of the

Code.

16.6 Top Heavy Plan Year.
     -------------------
     For a particular  Plan  Year  commencing  after

December 31, 1983, the Plan is a Top Heavy Plan.

16.7 Top Heavy Compensation.
     ----------------------
     For any Top Heavy Plan Year, compensation as defined  in

Code Section  415(c)(3) and Regs. Section 1.415-2(d), not in

excess  of  $200,000 (or  such  other  amounts as the Secretary of

Treasury or his  delegate  may  designate),which  shall  be

considered as compensation for all purposes of Section 16 of this Plan.

16.8 Determination Date.
     ------------------
     The last day of the preceding  Plan  Year, or, in the

case of the first Plan Year, the last day of such Plan Year.

16.9 Valuation Date.
     --------------
     The last day of the Plan Year, on which Account balances or accrued  
     
benefits are valued for purposes of calculating the Top Heavy Ratio.

                                   64  
<PAGE>

16.10  Aggregation Group.
       -----------------
       Either a Required Aggregation Group or a Permissive Aggregation 
       
Group as hereinafter determined.

      (a)  Required Aggregation  Group:  (i) Each qualified plan

 of the Employer in which at least one  Key  Employee participates or 
 
 participated at any time during the determination period (regardless 
 
 of whether the Plan has terminated), and (ii) any other  qualified  plan  
 
 of the Employer  which  enables lan described in (i) to meet

the requirements of Sections 401(a)(4) or 410 of the Code.

     In the case of a Required Aggregation Group, each plan in

the group  will  be  considered  a  Top  Heavy  Plan  if  the

Required Aggregation  Group is a Top Heavy Group.  No plan in

the  Required Aggregation Group  will  be  considered  a  Top

Heavy Plan if the Required Aggregation Group is not a Top

Heavy Group.

     (b)  Permissive Aggregation Group:  The required

aggregation group of plans plus any other plan or plans of the

Employer which, when  considered  as a group with the required

aggregation  group, would continue to satisfy  the

requirements of Sections 401(a)(4) and 410 of the Code.


     In the case of a Permissive  Aggregation  Group,  only a

plan that  is part of the Required Aggregation Group will be

considered a Top Heavy  Plan  if  the  Permissive  Aggregation

Group is a Top Heavy Group.  No plan in the Permissive

Aggregation  Group will be considered a Top Heavy Plan if the

Permissive Aggregation Group is not a Top Heavy Group.

16.11 Present Value of Accrued Benefits.
      ---------------------------------
      The  present  value  of  an  accrued  benefit under a

defined benefit plan shall be based on the interest  and

mortality  rates specified in such defined benefit plan.

                       TOP HEAVY REQUIREMENTS

16.12 Top Heavy Plan Requirements.
      ---------------------------
      If the Plan is or becomes top heavy in any Plan Year

beginning after December 31, 1983, the provisions of this

Section 16 will supersede any conflicting provisions in the

Plan. 

                                  65
<PAGE>

16.13 Top Heavy Reduction.
      -------------------
     (a) In  Section 4.9(a), 1.0 shall be substituted for 1.25

unless the extra minimum allocation  is  being  made  pursuant

to Section 16.14.  However, for any Plan Year in which this

Plan is a Super  Top  Heavy  Plan,  1.0 shall be substituted for 1.25 in

any event.

     (b)  $41,500 shall be  substituted for $51,875 in determining the 
     
"transition fraction" of Section 4.9(b).

16.14 Minimum Allocations.
      -------------------
     (a)  Except as otherwise provided in (c) and (d) below,

the Employer contributions and forfeitures allocated  on

behalf of any Participant who is not a Key Employee shall not

be  less than the lesser of three percent of such

Participant's compensation  or  in the  case  where  the

Employer  has no defined benefit plan which designates  this

Plan to satisfy Section  401  of  the  Code,  the largest

percentage of Employer contributions and forfeitures, as a

percentage of  the  Key Employee's  compensation,  as  limited

by Section  401(a)(17) of  the Code, allocated on behalf of

any  Key Employee  for that year.  The  minimum  allocation

is  determined without regard to any Social Security

contribution.  This minimum allocation shall be made even

though, under other Plan provisions, the Participant would

not  otherwise  be  entitled  to receive an allocation,  or

would have received a lesser allocation  for the year because

of (i)  the  Participant's  failure to complete 1,000 Hours of

Service (or any equivalent provided in the Plan), or (ii) the

Participant's failure to make mandatory employee contributions

to the Plan, or (iii) compensation less than a stated amount.

     (b)   For purposes of computing the minimum allocation,

compensation will mean compensation as defined  in  Section

1.7 of the Plan.

      (c)   The provision in (a) above shall not apply  to

any Participant who was not employed by the  Employer  on the last

day of the Plan Year.

                                 66
<PAGE>

      (d)   The  provision  in  (a)  above shall not apply  to any

Participant to the extent the Participant  is  covered  under

any other  plan  or plans of the Employer and the Employer has

elected that the minimum  allocation  or benefit requirement

applicable to top heavy plans will be met in the other plan or

plans.

     (e)  The minimum allocation  required (to the extent

required to be nonforfeitable under Section  416(b) of the

Code) may not be forfeited under Section 411(a)(3)(B) or

411(a)(3)(D) of the Code. 

16.15  Top Heavy Vesting.
       -----------------
     For  any  Plan  Year in which this  Plan  is  top-heavy,

the following vesting schedule  will  automatically apply to

the Plan, but only if the application of such  schedule

results in a higher vested percentage for the Participant:

       YEARS OF SERVICE              VESTED PERCENTAGE

                2                           20%
                3                           40%
                4                           60%
                5                           80%
                6                          100%

The  minimum vesting schedule applies to all benefits  within

the meaning of Section 411(a)(7) of the Code except those

attributable to employee  contributions,  including benefits

accrued before the effective date of Section 416  of  the

Code and benefits accrued before  the  Plan  became top-heavy.

Further, no  decrease  in  a Participant's nonforfeitable

percentage may occur in the event the Plan's status as top-

heavy changes  for  any Plan Year.  However, this Section does

not apply to the Account balance of any Employee who does not

have an Hour of Service after  the Plan has initially become

topheavy and such Employee's Account  balance attributable to

Employer  contributions  and  forfeitures will  be  determined

without regard to this Section.

16.16 Minimum Required Distribution.
      -----------------------------
      A Key Employee's benefits shall be distributed to him or begin to  
      
be distributed to him under Section 5 no later than the taxable year in 

which he attains age 70 1/2 regardless of when he retires.

                                   67
<PAGE>

16.17 Alternative Effective Date.
      --------------------------
     Notwithstanding  any  other provision of this Plan and

Trust, the effective date otherwise  provided for the

application of this Section 16 shall be extended in

accordance with  any legislative act of Congress.

                                 68
<PAGE>         
                              SECTION 17

                           ESOP PROVISIONS

17.1 Exempt Loans.
     ------------
     (a)   Subject to the provisions of this Section  17.1, the

Trustee may incur installment  obligations  from  time  to

time to finance the acquisition of Company Stock for the Trust

or to repay a prior loan.  Any such loan which is made or

guaranteed, directly or  indirectly,  by a disqualified period

or party in interest  is referred to herein as an "exempt

loan".

     (b)  An exempt  loan must be primarily for the benefit of

the Participants and beneficiaries of this Plan.  At the time

the loan is made, the interest  rate  and  price  of  Company

Stock  to be acquired  with  loan  proceeds  should  not  be

such that the Plan assets  might be drained off.  The terms of

a loan  must,  at  the time the loan is made, be at least as

favorable to the Plan as the terms of a comparable loan

resulting from arms length negotiations between independent

parties.

     (c)   The  proceeds  of an exempt loan must be used within a

reasonable time after receipt by  the  Plan and Trust only for

any or all of the following purposes:

           (i)   To acquire Company Stock;

           (ii)  To repay such loan; or

           (iii) To repay a prior exempt loan. A new loan  the proceeds  
                 of which are so used must satisfy the provisions of 
                 this paragraph (c).

     Except  as  otherwise  provided  in  this  section  17, or

as otherwise  required  by  applicable law, no Company Stock

acquired with the proceeds of an exempt loan may be subject to a put,

call, or other option, or buy-sell  or similar arrangement

while held by and when distributed from this  Plan,  whether

or not this Plan is then an ESOP.

     (d)   An exempt loan shall be without  recourse  against  the

Plan and Trust;  and only Company Stock acquired with the

proceeds of a prior exempt loan or with the proceeds of a

prior exempt loan repaid with the proceeds  of  the current

exempt loan may be given as collateral.

                                  69
<PAGE>

     (e)  No person entitled to  payment  under  the  exempt

loan shall  have  any  rights to the assets of the Plan and

Trust other than:

           (i)   Collateral given for the loan,

           (ii)  Contributions  other than contributions of
                 Company Stock that are made to the Plan  to meet its
                 obligations under the loan, and


           (iii) Earnings attributable  to  such collateral and
                 the investment of such contributions.

     The payment made with respect to an exempt  loan  by the

Plan and Trust during a Plan Year shall not exceed an amount

equal  to the sum of such contribution and earnings received

during or prior to the year less such payments in prior years.

Such contributions and  earnings  shall  be  accounted for

separately on the books of account of the Plan until the loan

is repaid.

     (f)  In the event of a default upon an exempt loan, the

value of the Plan assets transferred  in  satisfaction of the

loan shall not exceed the amount of default.  If the lender is

a disqualified person, the loan shall provide for a  transfer

of Plan assets upon default only upon and to the extent of

the failure of the Plan to meet the payment schedule of the

loan.

     (g)   The interest rate of an exempt loan must not be in

excess of a reasonable rate of interest.

     (h)  An  exempt  loan  shall  provide  for  the  release from

encumbrance under this subsection (h) of the Plan assets  used as

collateral  for  the  loan  in one of the two methods described in

this subsection (h):
           
           (i)  For each Plan  Year  during  the  duration  of the loan,  
                the number of securities released must equal the
                number of encumbered securities held immediately before
                release for the current Plan Year multiplied by a fraction,
                the numerator of which is the amount of principal and 
                interest paid for the  year and the denominator of which is  
                the sum  of the numerator plus the principal and interest  
                to be paid for all future years. The number of future years  
                on the loan must be definitely ascertainable and must be
                determined  without taking into account any possible
                extensions or renewal periods. If the interest rate under
                the loan is variable, the interest to be  paid in the future
                years must be computed by using the interest rate applicable
                as of the end of the Plan Year.

           (ii) The number of shares of Company Stock to be released from 
                encumbrance may be determined solely  with
                reference to  principal  payments  provided  the following
                requirements are satisfied. The loan must provide for annual
                payments of principal and interest at a cumulative rate that
                is not less rapid at any time  than  level  annual  payments
                of such amounts for  ten  (10) years.  Interest included in

                                  70
<PAGE>                
                
                any payment is disregarded only to the extent that it
                would  be determined to be  interest  under standard loan
                amortization tables.  This subparagraph (h)(ii) is not
                applicable  from the time, that, by reason of a renewal,
                extension or refinancing, the sum of the expired duration 
                of the exempt loan, the renewal period, the extension period,  
                and the duration of the new exempt loan exceeds ten (10) 
                years.

     (i)   All  assets  acquired  by  the  Plan and Trust with the

proceeds of an exempt loan shall be held in  a  Suspense Account, and shall 

be released from encumbrance under subsection (h). For purposes of the 

allocation to be made under Section 4.2, assets released from the Suspense 

Account shall be treated as  having been contributed to the Plan in the Plan  

Year in which they  are released.  Income with respect to Company Stock 

acquired with the proceeds of an  exempt  loan  shall  be  allocated  as

provided in Sections 4.4 and 4.5 except to the extent that income from such

Company Stock is to be used to repay the loan.

17.2 Voting Rights.
     -------------
     Each Participant in the Plan (or, in the event of the Participant's   

death, the Participant's beneficiary) is, for purposes  of this  Section 17.2,  

hereby designated  a  "named fiduciary" within the  meaning  of  Section

403(a)(1) of ERISA and shall be entitled to direct the Plan    

and Trustee as to the manner in which Company Stock released

pursuant  to Section  17.1(h) and (i)  and  allocated to the

Account or Accounts of such Participant is to be voted  on

each matter brought before an annual or special stockholders'

meeting  of the Employer.  Before each such meeting of

stockholders, the Trustee  shall  cause to be furnished to

each Participant  (or beneficiary) a copy of  the  proxy

solicitation material, together  with a form requesting

confidential directions on how such shares of  stock  released

pursuant to Section 17.1(h) and (i) and allocated to such

Participant's  Account  or  Accounts shall  be voted on each

such matter.  Upon timely receipt of

such directions  the Trustee shall on each such matter vote as

directed the number of  votes  attributable,  as  provided

below,  to such Participant.

     The  instructions  received  by the Trustee from

Participants shall be held by the Trustee in strict confidence

and shall not be divulged  or  released  to  any  person,

including  officers  or employees  of  the Employer or any

affiliate;  provided,  however, that to the extent  necessary

for the operation of the Plan, 

                                 71
<PAGE>

such instructions  may be relayed by the Trustee to a recordkeeper, 

auditor or other person providing  services to the Plan if such person  (i)

is not the Employer, an affiliate or  any employee, officer

or director  thereof,  and (ii) agrees not to divulge such

directions to any other person,  including employees, officers

and directors of the Employer and its affiliates.

     The number of votes attributable to each Participant

shall be determined as follows:

     (a)   first, the total number  of  shares  of  Company

Stock released  as  of the record date for the matter

requiring the vote shall be determined:

     (b)   next, the total number of votes attributable to

Company Stock owned by  the Plan, whether released or

unreleased, shall be determined;

     (c)   next,  the  number  of  votes  attributable to  released

shares  shall  be determined by multiplying the  total  number

of available votes by a fraction, the numerator of which shall

be the number of released  shares,  and the denominator of

which shall be total shares;

     (d)   next,  the  number of  votes  determined  under

(iii), above, shall be attributed to each Participant, in the

ratio which the  number of released shares  allocated  to

such Participant's Account or Accounts as of the immediately

preceding Valuation Date bears  to  the  total  number  of

released  shares  allocated  to Participants' Accounts as of

such date.

     Each  Participant,  as  a  named  fiduciary,  shall  also

be entitled  to separately direct the vote of a portion of the

number of  votes  with respect   to  which  a  signed  voting

direction  instrument is not timely received  from  the  Participants

and a portion of the number of votes with respect to any

shares of stock not  then released pursuant to Section 17.1(h)

and (i) and held in the Suspense  Account  and  a  portion of

the number of votes with respect  to  any  shares  of stock

released  pursuant to  Section 17.1(h)  and  (i)  and  not

allocated  to Participants'  Accounts ("Undirected  Votes").

Such direction  with  respect  to  each Participant who timely elects 

to  direct  the  vote  of Undirected Votes  as a named fiduciary shall 

be with respect to a  number  of Undirected  Votes  equal  to  the total

number of Undirected Votes multiplied by a 

                                  72
<PAGE>

fraction, the numerator  of which  is  the  total number   of     votes

attributable  to  such  Participant  and  the denominator of  which is the 

total number of votes attributable to all Participants  who  timely  

elect to vote  Undirected Votes as a named fiduciary.

17.3 Rights on Tender or Exchange Offer.
     ----------------------------------
     Each  Participant  (or, in the  event  of  the

Participant's death, the Participant's  beneficiary)  is,  for

purposes of this Section  17.3,  hereby designated a "named

fiduciary"  within  the meaning of Section 403(a)(1) of ERISA

and shall have the right, to the extent of the  number  of

shares of Company Stock allocated to such Participant's

Account or  Accounts,  to direct the Trustee in writing  as

to  the manner in which to respond  to  a  tender  or exchange

offer with  respect  to  shares  of  Company  Stock.  The

Trustee shall use its best efforts to timely distribute  or

cause to  be  distributed  to  each  Participant  (or

beneficiary) such information as will be distributed to

stockholders of the Employer in connection with any such

tender or exchange offer.  Upon timely receipt  of  such

instructions, the  Trustee  shall  respond  as instructed

with  respect to shares of Company Stock allocated  to such

Participant's Account or Accounts.  The instructions received

by the Trustee from Participants  shall be held by the Trustee

in strict confidence and shall not be divulged  or  released

to  any person, including  officers  or  employees of the

Employer or any affiliate; provided, however, that to the

extent necessary for the operation of the Plan, such

instructions  may  be  relayed by the Trustee  to  a

recordkeeper,  auditor  or  other person providing services to

the Plan if such person (i) is not  the Employer,  an

affiliate  or  any employee, officer or director thereof, and

(ii) agrees  not  to divulge  such  directions  to any  other

person, including employees,  officers  and directors of the

Employer and its  affiliates.   If  the Trustee  shall   not

receive  timely instruction from a Participant (or

beneficiary) as to  the  manner in which to respond to such a

tender or exchange offer, the Trustee shall not tender or exchange 

any shares of Company Stock with respect to which  such Participant  

has the right of direction.  Each Participant, as a named

fiduciary, shall also  be entitled to separately  direct  the

tender  of a  portion of the shares  of Company Stock not

released pursuant to Section  17.1(h) and (i) and held in the Suspense

Account and a portion of the shares of Company Stock released

                               73
<PAGE>

pursuant  to  Section 17.1(h) and (i) and not allocated to

Participants' Accounts.   Such  direction shall  be  with

respect  to the total of the number of shares  of Company

Stock in the Suspense  Account and the number of shares of

Company stock released and not allocated multiplied by a

fraction, the numerator  of  which is the total  shares  of

Company  Stock allocated  to  the  Participant's  Account  or

Accounts  and the denominator of which  is  the  total  number

of shares of Company Stock which are allocated to the Accounts of all

Participants.  In effecting the foregoing, to the extent

possible, the Trustee shall tender or exchange shares of

Company Stock entitled  to  one  vote per share prior to

shares of Company Stock having greater than one vote per

share.

17.4 Special Limitation Rules.
     ------------------------
     Any Employer contributions which are used by the Trustee

(not later than the due date, including extensions, for filing the

Company's Federal income tax return  for  the  Plan  Year)  to

pay interest  on  an  exempt  loan  shall  not  be  included

as annual additions under Section 4.8;  provided,  however,

that the provisions of this Section  17.4  shall  be  applicable only

for a Plan Year in which not more than one-third (1/3)  of

the Employer contributions  applied  to  pay  principal and/or

interest  on  an exempt loan are allocated to Participants

who are officers of the Employer,  shareholders  owning  more

than ten  percent  (10%)  of Company Stock, as determined

under Section 415(c)(6)(B)(iv) of the Code, or Employees whose

compensation  exceeds  an amount equal to twice  the  dollar

amount  referred  to in Section 4.8;  and  the Committee

shall reallocate such Employer  contributions  to  the extent

necessary to satisfy this special rule.

17.5 Limitation on Electing Shareholder.
     ----------------------------------
     To  the  extent that a shareholder sells Company Stock

to the Plan and elects (with the consent  of  the  Company)  special  tax

treatment  under  Section 1042 of the Code, no assets

attributable to such Company Stock may be allocated to the

Account of:

     (a)   Any person  who  owns  (after  application  of Section

           318(a)  of  the Code) more than twenty-five percent (25%)

           in value of the outstanding securities of the Employer; or

                                    74
<PAGE>

     (b)   the  shareholder, and any person who is related to such

           shareholder (within the meaning of Section 267(b) of the Code,

           but excluding lineal  descendants  of  such  shareholder as

           long as no more than five percent (5%) of the aggregate amount

           of all Company Stock sold by such shareholder in a transaction

           to which Section 1042  of  the  Code applies is allocated to

           lineal descendants  of such shareholder)  during  the

           Nonallocation Period  (as defined below).

     Further, no allocation of Employer contributions may  be

made to the Accounts of such persons unless additional

allocations  are made  to  other Participants, in accordance

with the provisions of Sections 401(a)  and  410  of the Code.

The phrase "Nonallocation Period" means the period beginning

on the date of sale and ending on the later of ten (10) years

after the date of sale or the date of the allocation attributable 

to the final payment on the exempt loan or other indebtedness 

incurred with respect to the sale.                                

17.6 Investment Diversification.
     --------------------------
     Each Participant who has completed at least ten (10)

years of participation under the Plan and has attained  age

fifty-five (55) may elect, within ninety (90) days after the

end of each Plan Year in the five (5) year period beginning

with the Plan Year after the Plan  Year  in  which the

Participant attains age fifty-five  (55) (or, if later,

beginning  with  the Plan Year after the first Plan Year in

which the individual completes  at least ten (10) years of

participation  under  the  Plan  and has attained  age  fifty-

five (55)), to direct the investment of twenty-five  percent

(25%) of the  Participant's  Account balance under the Plan,

to the extent such portion exceeds the amount to which a prior

election applied. For  the  last Plan Year in which  the

Participant  can  make  an election,  the Participant  shall

be  entitled  to  direct  the investment of fifty  percent

(50%)  of his Account balance in the Plan, to the extent such

portion exceeds  the  amount  to  which a prior election applied.

     If a Participant elects to diversify the investment of twenty-five  
     
(25%) or fifty percent (50%) of his Account balance, as the case may be,  

the Plan Administrator shall direct the Trustee to distribute, 

                                 75
<PAGE>

within ninety (90) days after the end of the Plan Year for which the election 

could be made, the portion of the Participant's Account balance covered by the

election.

17.7 Company Stock Distributions.
     ---------------------------
     (a)   Notwithstanding  the provisions of Sections 5, 6, 7

and 8, distributions of Company Stock  from  the Plan shall be

made in accordance  with  this  Section 17.7, unless  the

application  of Sections 5, 6, 7 and 8 would  result  in  an

earlier distribution date.

     (b)   Unless  the  Participant  (or his beneficiary,  if

the Participant  is  deceased)  elects  otherwise,  if  a

Participant retires, dies or becomes disabled while  employed

by the Employer, distribution  of  Company Stock in his

Account will  be  made  or commenced as soon as  practicable  

following the date on which the Participant retires, dies or becomes  

disabled, but not later than the sixtieth (60th) day next following  

the close of the Plan Year during which the Participant retires, dies or

becomes disabled.

     (c)   Unless  the  Participant  elects  otherwise, upon

termination of employment of the Participant with the Employer

for reasons  other than retirement, death or disability,

distribution of Company  Stock  in  his Account will be made

not later than the later of:

           (i)  one (1)  year  after  the  close  of the Plan
                Year which is the fifth (5th) Plan Year following 
                the Plan Year in which his employment terminates,  
                unless  the Participant  is reemployed by the 
                Employer before the end of such year; or


           (ii) the earlier of:
                
                (A)  the Plan Year in which an Exempt Loan
                     is fully repaid with respect to distributions 
                     of Company Stock acquired with the proceeds 
                     of that Exempt Loan; or
                
                (B)  the sixtieth (60th) day following the end
                     of the Plan Year in which the Participant  
                     attains Normal Retirement Age.

                                  76                              
<PAGE>                              
                              
                              SECTION 18
               QUALIFIED DOMESTIC RELATIONS ORDERS
                              DEFINITIONS

18.1 Domestic Relations Order.
     ------------------------
     Any  judgment, decree, or  order (including approval  of

a property settlement agreement) that  relates  to  the

provision of child support, alimony payments, or marital

property  rights  to a spouse,  former spouse, child or other

dependent of a Participant, made pursuant  to  a  state

domestic  relations  law, including a community property law.

18.2 Alternate Payee.
     ---------------
     Any  spouse,  former  spouse, child or other dependent  of

a Participant who is recognized  by  a  Qualified Domestic

Relations Order  as having a right to receive all,  or  a

portion  of,  the benefits payable under the Plan with respect

to a Participant. 

18.3 Qualified Domestic Relations Order.
     ----------------------------------
     A Domestic  Relations Order as described in Section 414(p)

of the Code which:

     (a)   Creates or recognizes the existence of an Alternate

           Payee's right to, or assigns to an Alternate Payee the right
           
           to, receive all or a portion of the benefits payable with

           respect to a Participant under the Plan; and

     (b)   Clearly specifies the following:

           (i)   the name and last known mailing address (if available)  
                 of the Participant and each Alternate Payee  to
                 which the order relates (unless the Plan Administrator has
                 reason to know such addresses independently);

           (ii)  the amount or percentage of the Participant's benefits to 
                 be paid to an Alternate Payee or the manner in which the 
                 amount is to be determined; and

           (iii) the number of payments or period for which payments are 
                 required.

     A  Qualified Domestic Relations Order does not include an order which:

     (a)   requires  the  Plan  to provide any  type  or  form of

           benefit, or any option, not otherwise provided under the Plan;

                                    77
<PAGE>     

     
     (b)  requires the Plan to provide increased benefits, i.e., provides 
     
          for the payment of benefits in excess of the benefits to which  
         
          the  Participant  would be entitled in the absence of the order; 
         
          or

     (c)  requires the payment  of benefits to an Alternate Payee

          that are required to be paid to another  Alternate  Payee

          under a previously existing Qualified Domestic Relations Order.

                            PROCEDURES

18.4 Notice.
     ------
     Upon receipt of a Domestic  Relations  Order, the Plan Administrator  
     
shall  promptly  notify  the  Participant and  any Alternate  Payee  of  

receipt  of  the  order  and of the Plan's procedures  for  determining  

whether  the  order  is a Qualified Domestic Relations Order.

18.5 Determination of Qualification.
     ------------------------------
Within a reasonable period of time after receipt of the order

(as  defined  in regulations to be prescribed by the

Secretary of Labor), the Plan  Administrator  shall determine

whether the order is qualified and notify the Participant and

any Alternate Payee of such determination.

18.6 Deferral of Payment.
     -------------------
     During any time period during  which  the  issue of

whether a Domestic  Relations  Order  is qualified is being determined,

any amount which would be payable  pursuant  to the terms of

the order shall be deferred and the amounts so payable  will

be segregated into a separate account.

18.7 Payment after Deferral.
     ----------------------
If, within eighteen (18) months after payment is deferred

in accordance  with  Section  18.6, the Plan Administrator

determines that  the  Domestic Relations  Order  is

qualified, the  amounts segregated into  the  separate

accounts,  plus earnings thereon, shall be paid to the

Alternate Payee(s) specified in the order, in accordance with

the terms of the order (subject, however,  to  the provisions

of  Code  Section 414  (p)  this Section 18 and other

applicable provisions of the Plan).

                                 78
<PAGE>

18.8 Payments after Eighteen Months.
     ------------------------------
     If,  after  eighteen  (18)  months  have  elapsed  after

the deferral   of   benefits  pursuant  to  Section  18.6,

the Plan Administrator determines  that  the  order  is qualified,

the Plan Administrator shall make payments pursuant to  the

order; however, such payments shall be made prospectively

only, and  any  amounts segregated  into  the  special

account  for periods  before  the determination  that  the

order  is qualified shall be paid to the person or persons who

would have received the amounts if the order had   not  been

issued. Neither  the  Plan, nor the Plan

Administrator, shall be liable for payments to any Alternate

Payee for any period before the order is determined to be

qualified. 

18.9 Payments Under Qualified Domestic Relations Order.
     -------------------------------------------------
     Payments  may made to an Alternate Payee prior to,

coincident with, or after Participant's  termination  of

employment  if made pursuant  to a Qualified Domestic

Relations Order.  A distribution

to an Alternate  Payee  may be made out of a Participant's

Account on a date coincident with  the  Participant's

"earliest retirement age,"  defined  as  the  earlier of (i)

the  date on  which  the Participant is entitled to  a

distribution under the Plan, or (ii) the later of (A) the

date the  Participant attains age 50, or (B) the earliest

date on which the Participant could  begin  receiving

benefits  under  the  Plan if he had separated from service.

In addition, this Plan specifically  authorizes

distributions  to an Alternate  Payee under a Qualified

Domestic Relations Order prior to the Participant's

attainment of the earliest retirement age (as defined above

and in Section 414(p) of the Code) but only if: (1) the order

specifies distribution at the earlier date or permits an

agreement between the  Plan and the Alternate Payee

authorizing an earlier distribution; and  (2)  the  Alternate

Payee consents to a distribution prior to the Participant's

earliest retirement age if the present value of the Alternate

Payee's benefits under the Plan exceeds  $3,500.   Nothing

in this Section  18  shall  provide  a Participant with a

right to receive  a  distribution at a time not otherwise

permitted under  the Plan, nor shall  it  provide  the

Alternate Payee with a right to  receive  a  form  of

payment not permitted under the Plan.
                                   79
<PAGE>

18.10 Non-qualification.
      -----------------
      If the Plan Administrator determines that the order  is

not qualified,  or if eighteen (18) months have expired since

deferral of  benefits,   the  Plan  Administrator  shall  pay

the  amounts segregated pursuant to Section 18.6 above to the

person or persons who would have received  the  amounts  if

the order had not been issued.

18.11 Effective Dates.
      ---------------
     The  provisions  of  this  Section 18 shall be effective

for orders  issued on or after January  1,  1985;  however,

the Plan Administrator  may  treat  any  order issued before

such  date as a Qualified  Domestic Relations Order  if  it

otherwise meets  the requirements  of this Section  18. Additionally, the

Plan Administrator  shall treat a  Domestic  Relations  Order

received before January 1,  1985 as a Qualified Domestic

Relations Order to the extent payments are being made pursuant

to the order.

                                  80 
<PAGE>
                              SECTION 19

                  AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION OF PLAN;

                        ASSIGNMENT OF BENEFITS

19.1 Amendment.
     ---------
     The Employer shall  have the right at any time, and from

time to  time, to amend, in whole  or  in  part,  any  or  all

of  the provisions   of  the  Plan.   However,  no  such

amendment  shall authorize or permit  any  part  of the Trust

Fund (other than such part as is required to pay taxes  and

administration expenses) to be used for or diverted to

purposes other  than  for the exclusive benefit  of  the

Participants or their beneficiaries  or  estates. Any  such

amendment  shall become  effective  upon  the  adoption

thereof  by an appropriate written instrument executed by

order of the Board of Directors or upon such later date as may

be specified in such instrument  provided  that  any

amendment  affecting  the powers  and duties of the Trustee

shall not be effective until the date it is accepted in

writing by the Trustee.

     No amendment  to  the  Plan  shall be effective to the

extent that  it  has  the effect of decreasing  a

Participant's accrued benefit.  Notwithstanding  the preceding

sentence, a Participant's Account  balance may be reduced  to

the  extent permitted  under Section 412(c)(8)  of the Code.

For purposes of this paragraph, a Plan amendment which  has

the effect of decreasing a Participant's Account balance or

eliminating  an optional  form of benefit with respect to

benefits attributable to service before  the  amendment shall

be treated as reducing an accrued benefit.  Furthermore,  if

the  vesting  schedule  of the Plan is amended, in the case of

an Employee who is a Participant  as  of  the  later of the

date such amendment  is adopted  or  the  date  it  becomes

effective,  the nonforfeitable percentage (determined as of  such  

date)  of such Employee's  right to his Employer-derived accrued benefit

will not be less than his percentage computed under the Plan

without regard to such amendment.

19.2 Termination; Discontinuance of Contributions.
     --------------------------------------------
     The  Employer  shall  have the right at any time

to terminate this  agreement  and the Trust hereby created.   Such

termination shall  be  effective   upon   execution  by  the  Employer  of

an appropriate  instrument  

                                  81
<PAGE>

terminating   the   Plan   and  Trust

as authorized  by the Board of Directors or upon such later

date as may be specified  in  such  instrument.  A copy of such

instrument shall be delivered to the Trustee.

     Upon termination or partial  termination  of  the Plan by

any method,  the  Regular  Accounts  of all Participants shall

become fully vested and the Plan Administrator  shall  direct

the Trustee to  distribute  all assets remaining in the Plan to

Participants, their beneficiaries  or  estates in the ratio of

the Participants' Account balances in the Plan.

     In   the   event   the   Employer   completely discontinues

contributions  for a fixed or indeterminate  period,  but

without terminating this  Plan, the Regular Accounts of

Participants shall be completely vested  and  nonforfeitable at

the values determined by the Trustee as of the close  of the

year in which contributions have been suspended, and all

adjustments in Participant's Accounts thereafter made under the

terms of the Plan and Trust with respect to the amounts so

vested shall similarly  be  completely vested in favor of each

Participant but no distribution shall be made of any Account

except on actual termination of the Plan or the occurrence of

any of the events stated in Sections 5, 6, and  7 and then only

in the manner provided in such Sections.

19.3 Assignment of Benefits.
     ----------------------
     No benefit or interest available hereunder will be

subject to assignment  or  alienation,  either  voluntarily or

involuntarily. The  interest  of each Participant or

beneficiary shall  be  held subject  to  the maximum

restraint  on alienation  permitted  or

required by applicable  Louisiana  or  Federal law.  The

preceding sentences  shall  also  apply  to  the  creation,

assignment,  or recognition of a right to any benefit payable

with  respect  to a Participant  pursuant  to  a Domestic

Relations Order, unless such order is determined to be a

Qualified Domestic Relations Order, as defined in Section

414(p) of the Code.

                                  82
<PAGE>

                            THE TRUST

                          TRUST SECTION 1

                             TRUSTEE

1.1  Establishment and Acceptance of Trust.
     -------------------------------------
     The Trustee shall receive  any  contributions  paid  to it

in cash,  or  other  property approved by the Plan

Administrator for acceptance by the Trustee.  All contributions

so received together with the income therefrom  (herein  called

the "Trust Fund") shall be held, managed, and administered in

Trust pursuant to the terms of this Agreement.  The Trustee

hereby accepts  the  Trust created hereunder and agrees to

perform the duties under this Agreement on its part to be

performed.  The assets of the trust will  be valued annually at

fair market value as of the last day of the Plan Year. On  such

date,  the earnings  and  losses  of the Trust will be

allocated  to  each Participant's account in the ratio  that  

such Account balance  bears to all Account balances.

1.2  Investment of Trust Fund.
     ------------------------
     The Trustee  shall  invest  and  reinvest  the

principal and income of the Trust Fund and keep the Trust

Fund invested, without distinction between principal and income.  All

contributions shall be applied by the Trustee as follows:

    (a)    To  the  payment  of  principal  and  interest  on  any

           outstanding exempt loan made to the Trust.

     (b)   To purchase shares of Company Stock under the direction

           of the Plan Administrator.

     Subject to the provisions of ERISA Section 404, as

additional shares  of  Company  Stock  become  available  and

subject to the direction  of  the  Plan  Administrator,  funds,

as  they  become available,  shall  be  used  for  the  purpose

of purchasing such shares.

     This Plan is designed to invest primarily in  Company

Stock, and  the  investment  policy of this Plan is to so

invest. To the extent funds remain after  acquiring  available Company Stock 

and until  other  Company  Stock  becomes  available, subject

to the direction of the Plan Administrator, the  Trustee  may

                                83
<PAGE>


invest in such  securities  or  in such property, real or

personal, wherever situated, as the Trustee  shall deem

advisable, including, but not limited to, stocks, common  or

preferred, bonds and mortgages, and other evidences of

indebtedness or ownership.   In  making  such investments,

the Trustee shall be restricted to securities or other

property of the character authorized  by applicable law from

time to time for trust investments.

1.3   Powers of Trustee.
      -----------------
     The Trustee shall have the following powers  and authority

in the administration of the Trust Fund:
     
     (a)   Purchase of Property.
           --------------------
           To  purchase or subscribe for any securities  or

           other property and to retain the same in trust.

     (b)   Sale, Exchange, Conveyance and Transfer of Property.

           To  sell,  exchange,  convey,  transfer,  or

           otherwise dispose of any securities or other property held by

           it, by private contract or at public auction.  No person

           dealing with the Trustee shall be bound to  see to the

           application of the purchase money or to inquire into the

           validity, expediency, or propriety of any such sale or other

           disposition.

     (c)   Exercise of Owner's and Voting Rights.
           -------------------------------------
           To vote any  stocks, bonds or other securities; to

           give general or special proxies  or  powers of attorney with or

           without power  of  substitution; to exercise  any  conversion

           privileges, subscription  rights,  or  other options, and to

           make any payments incidental thereto; to oppose,  or  to

           consent  to, or otherwise participate in,   corporate

           reorganizations  or other  changes

           affecting the corporate  securities, and to delegate

           discretionary powers,  and  to  pay any assessments  or

           charges in  connection therewith; and generally to exercise 
           
           any of the powers of an  owner with respect to stocks,  bonds,  
           
           securities or other property 
           
                                  84
<PAGE>           
           
           held as part of the Trust Fund.  
           
           The Trustee  shall vote Company Stock held  in the Plan in 
           
           accordance  with Section 17 and the instructions of the 
           
           Plan Administrator.

     (d)   Registration of Investments.
           ---------------------------
           To  cause any securities or other property held as

           part of the Trust Fund  to be registered in its own name or in

           the name of one or more of its  nominees,  and  to  hold any

           investments in bearer form, but the books and records of the

           Trustee shall at all times show that all such investments are a

           part of the Trust Fund.

     (e)   Borrowing and Lending.
           ---------------------
           To borrow or raise money for the  purposes of the

           Trust in such amount, and upon such terms and conditions, as

           the Trustee shall deem advisable; and, for any sum so borrowed,
           
           to issue its promissory note as Trustee, and to secure the

           repayment thereof by pledging  all,  or  any  part,  of  the

           Trust Fund; and no person lending  money  to  the  Trustee

           shall be bound to  see  to  the application of the money lent

           or to  inquire into  the  validity, expediency or propriety of

           any such borrowing.

     (f)   Retention of Cash.
           -----------------
           Subject to the direction of the Committee, to keep

           such portion of the Trust Fund in cash or cash balances as the

           Trustee may,  from  time to time, deem to be in the best

           interests of  the Trust created hereby.

     (g)   Execution of Instruments.
           ------------------------
           To  make, execute, acknowledge, and deliver any and

           all documents  of transfer  and  conveyance  and  any  and  all

           other instruments  that may be necessary or appropriate to

           carry out the powers herein granted.

     (h)   Settlement of Claims and Debts.
           ------------------------------
           To  settle, compromise, or submit to arbitration any

           claims, debts or damages due or 

                                  85
<PAGE>           
           
           owing to or from  the  
           
           Trust  Fund,  and to commence or defend suits or legal 
           
           or administrative proceedings.

     (i)   Employment of Agents and Counsel.
           --------------------------------
           To employ suitable agents and counsel  (who may also

           be counsel  for  the Employer), and to pay their reasonable

           expenses and compensation.

     (j)   Power to do any Necessary Act.
           -----------------------------
           To do  all  such  acts,  take all such proceedings,

           and exercise all such rights and privileges, although not

           specifically mentioned herein, as the Trustee may  deem

           necessary to administer the Trust Fund, and to carry out the

           purposes of this Trust.

1.4  Payments from the Trust.
     -----------------------
     The  Trustee  shall  from  time  to  time,   on  the

written directions of the Committee, make payments out of the

Trust  Fund to  such  persons,  in  such manner, in such

amounts, and for such purposes as may be specified  in  the

written directions  of the Committee,  and  upon  any  payment

being made, the amount thereof shall no longer constitute a

part  of the Trust Fund.  Each such written direction shall be

accompanied by  a  certificate  of  the Committee  that  the

payment is in accordance with the Plan.  The Trustee shall not

be responsible in any way for the application of such payments

or for the adequacy  of the Trust Fund to discharge any and all

liabilities under the Plan.

1.5  Payment of Compensation, Expenses and Taxes.
     -------------------------------------------
     The  Trustee shall be paid by the  Employer  such

reasonable compensation  as  shall  from  time  to time be

agreed upon by the Employer  and  the Trustee.  In addition,

the Trustee  shall  be reimbursed by the  Employer for any

reasonable expenses, including reasonable counsel fees,

incurred  by it in the administration of the Trust Fund.  All

taxes of any and  all kinds  whatsoever that may be levied or

assessed under existing or future laws  upon,  or in  respect

of, the Trust Fund or the income thereof shall be paid by the

Employer.   Nevertheless, if the Employer refuses to make

such payments, such compensation and expenses may be made from

the Trust Fund.

                                86
<PAGE>

1.6  Accounting.
     ----------
     The Trustee shall keep accurate  and detailed accounts

of all investments,  receipts,  disbursements,  and  other

transactions  hereunder. All accounts, books and records relating  to

such transactions  shall  be  open  for inspection  and

audit at  all reasonable times by any person designated by

the Committee.

     Within one hundred thirty-five (135) days following the close

of each fiscal year of the Trust  and within sixty (60) days

after the removal or resignation of the Trustee  as  provided

in Section 1.7  hereof, the Trustee shall file with the

Committee  a written account  setting  forth  all investments,

receipts, disbursements, and other transactions effected  by

it during such fiscal year or during the period from the close

of the  last fiscal  year to the date of such removal or

resignation, and setting forth the current value of the Trust

Fund.

1.7  Removal, Resignation and Appointment of Successor Trustee.
     ---------------------------------------------------------
     The Trustee may be removed by the Employer at any time upon

ten (10) days'  notice in writing to the Trustee.  The Trustee

may resign at any time  upon  ten  (10) days' notice in writing

to the Employer.  Upon such removal or  resignation  of  the

Trustee, the Employer shall appoint a successor Trustee who

shall have the same powers  and duties as those conferred upon

the Trustee  hereunder. Upon acceptance  of such appointment by

the successor Trustee, the Trustee shall assign,  transfer,

and pay  over to such successor Trustee the funds and

properties then constituting the Trust Fund. The Trustee is

authorized, however, to reserve  such sum of money, as it may

deem advisable, for payment of its fees  and expenses in

connection with the settlement of its account or otherwise

which the Employer  refuses  to  pay,  and  any  balance of

such reserve remaining  after the payment of such fees and

expenses  shall be paid over to the successor Trustee.

                                87
<PAGE>

                           TRUST SECTION 2

                       FIDUCIARY RESPONSIBILITY

2.1  Fiduciary Duties.
     ----------------
     The Trustee  shall discharge its duties with the care,

skill, prudence, and diligence  under  the  circumstances

then prevailing that  a prudent man acting in a like

capacity  and familiar  with such matters  would  use  in

the conduct of an enterprise of like character and with like aims, by

diversifying  the investments of the Plan so as to minimize

the risk of large losses,  unless under the  circumstances  it

is clearly  prudent not to do so, and  in accordance  with

the Plan and Trust provisions  insofar  as  the provisions

thereof are consistent  with  the  provisions  of  the

Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974.

2.2  Location of Assets.
     ------------------
     The Trustee  may not maintain the indicia of ownership of

any assets of the Plan  outside  the jurisdiction of the

courts of the United States.

2.3  Deposits with Trustee.
     ---------------------
     The investment of all or  part of the Plan's assets in

demand deposits and in deposits which bear  a reasonable rate

of interest in the commercial banking department of  the

corporate Trustee is hereby expressly authorized.

2.4  Common Trust Fund.
     -----------------
     Notwithstanding  any other provision of this  Agreement,

the Trustee may cause any part or all of the cash properly

held by the Trust to be invested as a part of any common trust

fund created by the corporate Trustee or  any  other  bank.

The bank  shall not receive  more  than  reasonable

compensation for its services  in operating and administering

the common trust funds.

2.5  Prohibited Transactions by Trustee.
     ----------------------------------
     A fiduciary under this Plan and Trust shall not:

     (a)   Deal with the assets of the Plan for its own account; 

                                   88     
<PAGE>

     (b)   Act in any capacity in any transaction involving the

           Plan on behalf of a party whose interests are adverse  to the

           Plan or its Participants; or

     (c)   Receive any consideration from any party in connection

           with any transaction involving Plan assets (other than for

           its compensation and expenses as provided for herein).

2.6  Party in Interest and Disqualified Person Transactions.
     ------------------------------------------------------
     A fiduciary of the Plan shall not cause the Plan to

engage in a  transaction,  if he knows or should know that

such transaction constitutes a direct or indirect:

     (a)   Sale, exchange  or lease of property between the Plan

           and a party in interest;

     (b)   Loan or extension of credit between the Plan and a

           party in interest, except as permitted in Plan Section 17;

     (c)   Furnishing of goods, services or facilities between the        

           Plan and a party in interest;

     (d)   Transfer  to,  or use by or for the benefit of, a party

           in interest of any assets of the Plan, or from the Plan; or

     (e)   An acquisition of Employer securities or real estate in

           violation of Section 407(a)  of  the  Employee  Retirement

           Income Security Act of 1974.

     Nothing  in  this  paragraph  shall  restrict  the

Trustee in investing  funds  in common trust funds maintained

by it  or from maintaining demand,  savings  or  time

deposits in its commercial banking department or from

providing other  ancillary services as defined  in  Section

408(b)(6) of the Employee Retirement  Income Security Act of

1974.   Nor  shall  the Trustee be prevented from borrowing

funds from its commercial department for the purposes of

covering overdrafts in its demand account or to permit

payments to Participants  without the necessity for immediate

liquidation  of assets.

2.7  Intent of Trust.
     ---------------
     The  provisions of this Trust are intended to comply with the fiduciary 
     
responsibility  requirements  of the Employee Retirement Income  Security  

Act  of 1974 and no provision  herein  shall be construed to authorize 

the Trustee to violate any of the fiduciary responsibility or prohibited  

transaction provisions of 

                                89
<PAGE>


that Act. Any provision herein which is contrary

to the provisions  of that Act shall be considered not written and any 

provision required  to be  written  into  the  Plan  and  Trust by that 

Act which is not expressly provided for in this instrument is  

hereby  incorporated herein by reference and shall be just as binding 

upon the  Trustee as  if it were  expressly written herein.  In order 

that this  Plan and Trust may  expressly  comply with that Act, 

it may be amended retroactively.

                                   90
<PAGE>

                           TRUST SECTION 3

                          SPENDTHRIFT CLAUSE

3.1  Restrictions on Alienation.
     --------------------------
     No benefit or interest available hereunder will be

subject to alienation or assignment, either voluntary or

involuntary, and the interest of each Participant  or

beneficiary shall be held subject to the maximum restraint on

alienation  permitted or  required by applicable Louisiana or

Federal law.

3.2  Qualified Domestic Relations Order.
     ----------------------------------
     Section 3.1 shall also apply to the creation, assignment,

or recognition  of  a  right to any benefit payable with

respect to a Participant pursuant  to  a  Domestic Relations

Order, unless such order is determined to be a Qualified

Domestic Relations Order, as defined in Section 414(p) of the

Code.

                                   91
<PAGE>
                         TRUST SECTION 4

                AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION OF TRUST

4.1  Amendment.
     ---------
     The Employer shall have the  right at any time, and from

time to  time,  to  amend,  in whole or in part,  any  or  all

of  the provisions  of  this Trust.   However, no such amendment  

shall authorize or permit  any  part  of the Trust Fund (other than

such part as is required to pay taxes  and  administration expenses) to

be used for or diverted to purposes other  than  for the

exclusive benefit  of the Participants and their beneficiaries

or  estates. Any  such amendment  shall  become  effective

upon the  adoption thereof by appropriate written instrument

executed by order of the Board  of Directors or upon such

later date as may be specified in such instrument  provided

that any amendment affecting the powers and duties of the

Trustee shall not be effective until the date it is accepted

in writing by the Trustee.

4.2  Termination; Discontinuance of Contributions.
     --------------------------------------------
     The Employer shall have  the  right  at any time to

terminate the  Trust hereby created.  Such termination  shall

be  effective upon execution  by  the  Employer  of  an

appropriate  instrument terminating  the  Plan  and  Trust  as

authorized by the Board  of Directors or upon such later date

as may  be  specified  in  such instrument.   A  copy of such

instrument shall be delivered to the Trustee.

     Upon termination  or  partial termination of the Trust by

any method,  the  Plan  Administrator  shall  direct  the

Trustee  to distribute all assets remaining in the Plan to

Participants, their beneficiaries or estates in the ratio of

the Participants' Account balances in the Plan.

     THUS DONE AND SIGNED  on  the  day  first above shown, in

the presence of the undersigned competent witnesses, who

hereunto sign their names with the said appearers and me,

Notary  after reading of the whole.






WITNESSES                  CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES,INC.

/S/ Merrie D. Rachal
- ---------------------      By:  /S/ R. Stewart Ewing, Jr.
                               ---------------------------  
/S/ Carol P. Caruso                 R. Stewart Ewing, Jr.
- ---------------------               Senior Vice President
                     
                   /S/  G. Robert Collier 
                   -----------------------
                        NOTARY PUBLIC


                                92

                                                          EXHIBIT 10.2

             CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC. 
             STOCK BONUS PLAN, PAYSOP AND TRUST
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
                                   1994 AMENDMENT AND RESTATEMENT

<PAGE>
                           TABLE OF CONTENTS


 SECTION 1..........................................................  2
       DEFINITIONS..................................................  2
           1.1  Account.............................................  2
           1.2  Active Participant..................................  2
           1.3  Adjustment Date.....................................  2
           1.4  Approved Absence....................................  2
           1.5  Break in Service....................................  2
           1.6  Company Stock.......................................  3
           1.7  Compensation........................................  3
           1.8  Date of Employment..................................  5
           1.9  Date of Reemployment................................  5
           1.10 Disability..........................................  6
           1.11 Eligibility Computation Periods.....................  6
           1.12 Employee............................................  6
           1.13 Employer............................................  6
           1.14 Entry Date..........................................  6
           1.15 Highly Compensated Employee.........................  7
           1.16 Hour of Service.....................................  8
           1.17 Leased Employee..................................... 10
           1.18 Limitation Year..................................... 11
           1.19 Merger Account...................................... 11
           1.20 Normal Retirement Age............................... 11   
           1.21 Plan Administrator.................................. 11
           1.22 Plan Year........................................... 11
           1.23 Regular Account..................................... 11
           1.24 Rollover Account    ................................ 12
           1.25 Suspense Account.................................... 12
           1.26 Top Heavy Valuation Date............................ 12
           1.27 Valuation Date...................................... 12
           1.28 Vesting Computation Period.......................... 12
           1.29 Year of Service..................................... 12

SECTION 2 .......................................................... 15
     ELIGIBILITY.................................................... 15
           2.1  Participation....................................... 15
           2.2  Determination of Eligibility........................ 15
           2.3  Election Not to Participate......................... 15

SECTION 3 .......................................................... 16
     CONTRIBUTIONS.................................................. 16
           3.1  Contributions by Employer........................... 16
           3.2  Determination of Contribution....................... 16
           3.3  Time of Payment of Contribution..................... 16
           3.4  Exclusive Benefit................................... 16
           3.5  Return of Contributions............................. 17

                                 i
<PAGE>

SECTION 4 .......................................................... 18
     ACCOUNTS OF PARTICIPANTS....................................... 18
           4.1  Individual Accounts for Each Participant............ 18
           4.2  Allocation of Employer Contributions................ 18
           4.3  Allocation of Forfeitures........................... 18
           4.4  Year-End Valuation of Accounts...................... 18
           4.5  Interim Valuation of Accounts....................... 19
           4.6  Debiting of Distributions........................... 19
           4.7  Effective Date of Entries............................19
           4.8  Coverage Under this Plan Only........................20
           4.9  Coverage Under a Prototype Plan......................21
           4.10 Coverage Under a Non-Prototype Plan..................23
           4.11 Combined Limits......................................23
           4.12 Definitions......................................... 23

SECTION 5 .......................................................... 29
     BENEFITS PAYABLE AFTER NORMAL RETIREMENT....................... 29
           5.1  Optional Methods of Payment Available at Retirement  29
           5.2  Manner of Payment Following Commencement of Payments 30
           5.3  Required Beginning Date............................. 30
           5.4  Determination of Amount to be Distributed Each Year  30
           5.5  Definitions......................................... 31
           5.6  Small Accounts...................................... 31
SECTION 6 .......................................................... 32
     BENEFITS PAYABLE IN THE EVENT OF DEATH OR DISABILITY........... 32
           6.1  Death Distribution Provisions....................... 32
           6.2  Definitions......................................... 33
           6.3  Designation of Beneficiary.......................... 35
           6.4  Failure to Designate a Beneficiary or Select 
                a Method of Payment................................. 35
           6.5  Disability of a Participant......................... 36
           6.6  Transitional Rule................................... 36
           6.7  Location of Participant or Beneficiary Unknown...... 38

SECTION 7 .......................................................... 39
     BENEFITS  PAYABLE  IN  THE  EVENT  OF  BREAK  IN  SERVICE  OR
           EMPLOYMENT TERMINATION................................... 39
           7.1  Vesting Schedule.................................... 39
           7.2  Distributions....................................... 39
           7.3  Restrictions on Immediate Distributions............. 41
           7.4  Payment of Account Balance.......................... 42
           7.5  Treatment of Accounts in Pay Status................. 42
           7.6  Direct Rollovers.................................... 43
           7.7  Amendment of Vesting Schedule....................... 44
SECTION 8 .......................................................... 45
     FORM OF DISTRIBUTION........................................... 45
           8.1  Payment in Shares or Cash........................... 45
           8.2  Dividends........................................... 45

                                   ii
<PAGE>

SECTION 9 .......................................................... 46
     MERGER OR CONSOLIDATION........................................ 46
           9.1  Merger or Consolidation............................. 46
           9.2  Merger Accounts..................................... 46
           9.3  Merger Agreement or Agreement Relating to Transfer.. 46

SECTION 10 ......................................................... 47
     CLAIMS PROCEDURE............................................... 47
           10.1  Filing of a Claim for Benefits..................... 47
           10.2  Notification to Claimant of Decision............... 47
           10.3  Review Procedure................................... 47
           10.4  Decision on Review................................. 48
           10.5  Agent for Service of Process....................... 48

SECTION 11 ......................................................... 49
     ADOPTION BY OTHER COMPANIES.................................... 49
           11.1  Rights of Other Companies to Participate........... 49
           11.2  Control of Plan by the Employer.................... 49
           11.3  Allocations of Contributions and Forfeitures....... 49
           11.4  Withdrawal of Employer or Adopting Companies....... 50
           11.5  Amendment of Plan.................................. 50
           11.6  Termination of One or More Parties................. 51
           11.7  Reference to Employer in Plan...................... 51

SECTION 12 ......................................................... 52
     PROVISIONS RELATING TO PARTICIPANTS............................ 52
           12.1  Information Required of Participants............... 52

SECTION 13 ......................................................... 53
     PLAN ADMINISTRATOR............................................. 53
           13.1  Administration by Plan Administrator............... 53
           13.2  Appointment of Committee........................... 53
           13.3  Majority Action.................................... 53
           13.4  Powers of Plan Administrator....................... 54
           13.5  Duties of Plan Administrator....................... 55
           13.6  Expenses........................................... 56

SECTION 14 ......................................................... 57
     ROLLOVERS ..................................................... 57
           14.1  Rollover Contributions............................. 57
           14.2  Definition of Rollover Contribution................ 57
           14.3  Definition of Rollover Amount...................... 57
           14.4  Conduit Rollovers.................................. 58

SECTION 15 ......................................................... 59
     TRADES OR BUSINESSES UNDER COMMON CONTROL...................... 59
           15.1  Definitions........................................ 59
           15.2  Allocation......................................... 59
           15.3  Participation and Vesting.......................... 59
           15.4  Vesting and Distributions.......................... 60

                                  iii   
<PAGE>

SECTION 16 ......................................................... 61
     TOP HEAVY PLAN RULES........................................... 61
           16.1  Key Employee....................................... 61
           16.2  Non-Key Employee................................... 61
           16.3  Super Top Heavy Plan............................... 61
           16.4  Top Heavy Plan..................................... 62
           16.5  Top Heavy Ratio.................................... 62
           16.6  Top Heavy Plan Year................................ 64
           16.7  Top Heavy Compensation............................. 64
           16.8  Determination Date................................. 64
           16.9  Valuation Date..................................... 64
           16.10 Aggregation Group.................................. 65
           16.11 Present Value of Accrued Benefits...................65
           16.12 Top Heavy Plan Requirements........................ 65
           16.13 Top Heavy Reduction................................ 66
           16.14 Minimum Allocation................................. 66
           16.15 Top Heavy Vesting.................................. 67
           16.16 Minimum Required Distribution...................... 67
           16.17 Alternative Effective Date......................... 68

SECTION 17 ......................................................... 69
     PAYSOP PROVISIONS.............................................. 69
           17.1  Nature of the Plan................................. 69
           17.2  Definitions........................................ 69
           17.3  Eligibility and Participation...................... 70
           17.4  Employer Contributions............................. 70
           17.5  Participant's Accounts............................. 71
           17.6  Expenses........................................... 73
           17.7  Distributions...................................... 73
           17.8  Future of the Plan................................. 73

SECTION 18 ......................................................... 74
     QUALIFIED DOMESTIC RELATIONS ORDERS............................ 74
           18.1  Domestic Relations Order........................... 74
           18.2  Alternate Payee.................................... 74
           18.3  Qualified Domestic Relations Order................. 74
           18.4  Notice............................................. 75
           18.5  Determination of Qualification..................... 75
           18.6  Deferral of Payment................................ 75
           18.7  Payment after Deferral............................. 75
           18.8  Payments after Eighteen Months..................... 76 
           18.9  Payments under Qualified Domestic Relations Order.. 76
           18.10 Non-qualification.................................. 77
           18.11 Effective Dates.................................... 77

SECTION 19    ...................................................... 78
     AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION OF PLAN; ASSIGNMENT OF BENEFITS...... 78
           19.1  Amendment.......................................... 78
           19.2  Termination; Discontinuance of Contributions....... 78
           19.3  Assignment of Benefits............................. 79

                                iv  
<PAGE>

THE TRUST .......................................................... 80
TRUST SECTION 1 .................................................... 80
     TRUSTEE........................................................ 80
           1.1  Establishment and Acceptance of Trust............... 80
           1.2  Investment of Trust Fund............................ 80
           1.3  Powers of Trustee................................... 81
           1.4  Payments from the Trust............................. 83
           1.5  Payment of Compensation, Expenses and Taxes......... 83
           1.6  Accounting.......................................... 84
           1.7  Removal, Resignation and Appointment of Successor
                Trustee............................................. 84

TRUST SECTION 2..................................................... 85
     FIDUCIARY RESPONSIBILITY....................................... 85
           2.1  Fiduciary Duties.................................... 85
           2.2  Location of Assets.................................. 85
           2.3  Deposits with Trustee............................... 85
           2.4  Common Trust Fund................................... 85
           2.5  Prohibited Transactions by Trustee.................. 85
           2.6  Party in Interest and Disqualified Person 
                Transaction......................................... 86
           2.7  Intent of Trust..................................... 86

TRUST SECTION 3..................................................... 88
     SPENDTHRIFT CLAUSE............................................. 88
           3.1  Restrictions on Alienation.......................... 88
           3.2  Qualified Domestic Relations Order.................. 88

TRUST SECTION 4..................................................... 89
     AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION OF TRUST............................. 89
           4.1  Amendment........................................... 89
           4.2  Termination; Discontinuance of Contributions........ 89

                                v
<PAGE>

STATE OF LOUISIANA

PARISH OF OUACHITA

     BE IT KNOWN, that on this 30th day of December, 1994,

before me, Notary Public, duly commissioned  and  qualified in and

for  the Parish of Ouachita, State of Louisiana, therein  residing

and in the presence of the undersigned witnesses:

     PERSONALLY CAME AND APPEARED:

     CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC. represented herein by its

Senior  Vice  President  and  Chief  Financial Officer, R. Stewart

Ewing, Jr., as Settlor.

     The Settlor appoints Regions Bank of Louisiana as Trustee.

     WHEREAS, the Trustee has previously  established  the Century

Telephone  Enterprises,  Inc. Stock Bonus Plan, PAYSOP and  Trust;

and

     WHEREAS, the Settlor  desires to incorporate in this document

various amendments to its Stock Bonus Plan, PAYSOP and Trust; and

     WHEREAS, the Settlor desires  to  amend its Stock Bonus Plan,

PAYSOP and Trust to comply with the Tax  Reform  Act  of 1986, the

Technical   and  Miscellaneous  Revenue  Act  of  1988,  technical

corrections and other statutory revisions; and

     WHEREAS,  the  Settlor  desires  that  the  Stock Bonus Plan,

PAYSOP  and  Trust,  as  amended and restated, shall constitute  a

qualified  employee benefit  plan  under  Section  401(a)  of  the

Internal Revenue  Code  of  1986,  as amended (the "Code") for the

exclusive benefit of employees who participate herein;

    NOW,  THEREFORE,  effective  January  1,  1989,  except  as may be

indicated  in specific Sections hereof, the Settlor hereby  amends

and restates  its  Stock  Bonus  Plan,  PAYSOP and Trust, upon the

terms and conditions as provided herein.

                                  1
<PAGE>

                          SECTION 1

                         DEFINITIONS

1.1  Account.
     -------
     The  Regular  Account,  the  Merger  Account,   the  Rollover

Account, and the Suspense Account of a Participant, whether or not

such accounts have been combined into one account.

1.2  Active Participant.
     ------------------
     A Participant who has completed a Year of Service  within the

Plan  Year  ending  on  the  Adjustment  Date,  whether or not the

Participant is employed on such date.

1.3  Adjustment Date.
     ---------------
     The last day of each Plan Year.

1.4  Approved Absence.
     ----------------
     An  absence  from  work  not  exceeding  one year,  including

absence  due to temporary disability, granted to  and/or  approved

for the Employee by an Employer in a uniform and nondiscriminatory

manner; or an absence from work for service in the Armed Forces or

other government  services,  provided  that,  and only so long as,

reemployment rights are protected by law.

1.5  Break in Service.
     ----------------
     A twelve-consecutive month period (computation period) during

which a Participant does not complete more than five hundred (500)

Hours of Service with the Employer.  Any Break in Service shall be

deemed  to  have commenced on the first day of the  Plan  Year  in

which it occurs.   No  Break  in  Service shall be deemed to occur

during an Employee's initial Eligibility Computation Period solely

because of the failure of the Employee  to complete more than five

hundred (500) Hours of Service during any  one Plan Year occurring

in part during such twelve-month period if the  Employee completes

a  Year  of  Service  during such initial Eligibility  Computation

Period.  A Break in Service  shall  not be deemed to have occurred

during any period of Approved Absence  if  the Employee returns to

the  service  of the Employer on or before the  last  day  of  the

Approved Absence.

                                2
<PAGE>

1.6  Company Stock.
     -------------
     Shares of voting common stock, $1.00 par value, issued by the

Employer.

1.7  Compensation.
     ------------
     Compensation  will  mean compensation as that term is defined

in Section 4.12(b) of the  Plan, and will include any amount which

is contributed by the Employee  pursuant  to  a  salary  reduction

agreement and which is not includible in the gross income  of  the

Employee  under Sections 125, 402(e)(3), 402(h)(1)(B) or 403(b) of

the Code.

     Notwithstanding  the  foregoing, compensation for purposes of

this  Section  shall not include:   (i)  reimbursements  or  other

expense allowances,  fringe  benefits  (cash  or  noncash), moving

expenses,  deferred  compensation,  and  welfare  benefits;   (ii)

overtime;  or (iii) bonuses and special awards.  In the case of  a

commission salesman,  compensation  shall mean the lesser of:  (i)

the base draw of such salesman; or (ii)  the  commissions  paid by

the  Employer  to  such salesman as reported on his Federal income

tax withholding statement (Form W-2).

     For Plan Years  beginning  on  or  after January 1, 1989, and

before   January  1,  1994,  the  annual  compensation   of   each

Participant  taken  into  account  for  determining  all  benefits

provided  under  the  Plan  for  any  Plan  Year  shall not exceed

$200,000.  This limitation shall be adjusted by the  Secretary  at

the  same  time  and in the same manner as under Section 415(d) of

the Code, except that  the  dollar increase in effect on January 1

of any calendar year is effective for Plan Years beginning in such

calendar year and the first adjustment  to the $200,000 limitation

is effective on January 1, 1990.

     For Plan Years beginning on or after  January  1,  1994,  the

annual  compensation  of  each  Participant taken into account for

determining all benefits provided under the Plan for any Plan Year

shall not exceed $150,000, as adjusted  for increases in the cost-of-

living in accordance with Section 401(a)(17)(B)  of  the  Code. The

cost-of-living  adjustment  in  effect  for  a  calendar year

applies  to  any  determination period beginning in such  calendar

year.

                                 3
<PAGE>

     If a determination  period  consists of fewer than 12 months,

the annual compensation limit is an  amount equal to the otherwise

applicable annual compensation limit multiplied by a fraction, the

numerator  of  which  is  the  number  of  months   in  the  short

determination period, and the denominator of which is 12.

     In determining the compensation of a Participant for purposes

of  this  limitation, the rules of Section 414(q)(6) of  the  Code

shall apply,  except  in  applying  such  rules, the term "family"

shall include only the spouse of the Participant  and  any  lineal

descendants of the Participant who have not attained age 19 before

the close of the year.  If, as a result of the application of such

rules  the  adjusted  annual  compensation limitation is exceeded,

then  (except  for  purposes  of  determining   the   portion   of

compensation up to the integration level if this Plan provides for

permitted  disparity),  the limitation shall be prorated among the

affected  individuals  in proportion  to  each  such  individual's

compensation  as  determined  under  this  Section  prior  to  the

application of this limitation.

     If compensation  for  any prior determination period is taken

into account in determining  a  Participant's  allocations for the

current  Plan Year, the compensation for such prior  determination

period is  subject  to the applicable annual compensation limit in

effect for that prior  period.   For  this purpose, in determining

allocations in Plan Years beginning on  or  after January 1, 1989,

the annual compensation limit in effect for determination  periods

beginning   before   that  date  is  $200,000.   In  addition,  in

determining allocations  in  Plan  Years  beginning  on  or  after

January  1,  1994,  the  annual  compensation  limit in effect for

determination periods beginning before that date if $150,000.

     In addition to other applicable limitations  set forth in the

Plan, and notwithstanding any other provision of the  Plan  to the

contrary, for Plan Years beginning on or after January, 1994,  the

annual  Compensation of each Employee taken into account under the

Plan shall not exceed the OBRA '93 annual compensation limit.  The

OBRA '93 annual compensation limit is $150,000, as adjusted by the

Commissioner  for  increases  in  the cost of living in accordance

with  Section  401(a)(17)(B)  of  the  Code.   The  cost-of-living

adjustment in effect for a calendar year  applies  to  any period,

not  exceeding  12  

                                4
<PAGE>

months,  over which compensation is determined

(determination period) beginning  in  such  calendar  year.   If a

determination  period  consists  of fewer than 12 months, the OBRA

'93 annual compensation limit will  be  multiplied  by a fraction,

the   numerator   of   which  is  the  number  of  months  in  the

determination period, and the denominator of which is 12.

     For plan years beginning  on  or  after  January 1, 1994, any

reference in this Plan to the limitation under  Section 401(a)(17)

of the Code shall mean the OBRA '93 annual compensation  limit set

forth in this provision.

     If Compensation for any prior determination  period  is taken

into account in determining an Employee's benefits accruing in the

current  Plan  Year, the Compensation for that prior determination

period is subject  to  the  OBRA  '93 annual compensation limit in

effect for that prior determination period.  For this purpose, for

determination periods beginning before  the first day of the first

Plan  Year beginning on or after January 1,  1994,  the  OBRA  '93

annual compensation limit is $150,000.

     For  any  self-employed  individual  covered  under the Plan,

compensation will mean earned income.  Compensation  shall include

only  that  compensation which is actually paid to the Participant

during the determination  period.  Except as provided elsewhere in

this plan, the determination period shall be the Plan Year.

     For  employees  of San Marcos  Telephone  Company,  Inc.,  SM

Telecorp, Inc., and subsidiaries  thereof, who become participants

in the Plan on or after June 20, 1993,  compensation  for the Plan

Year ending December 31, 1993 shall be recognized commencing as of

the effective date of participation of each such employee pursuant

to Section 2.1.

1.8  Date of Employment.
     ------------------
     The  date  on  which  an  Employee first performs an Hour  of

Service for the Employer.

1.9  Date of Reemployment.
     --------------------
     The first date occurring after an Employee's Break in Service

on which he performs an Hour of Service.

                                 5
<PAGE>
      

1.10 Disability.
     ----------
     A Participant shall be considered disabled if the Participant

cannot  perform  each  of  the  material  duties  of  his  regular

occupation and is likely to remain thus incapacitated continuously

and permanently.

1.11 Eligibility Computation Periods.
     -------------------------------
     In determining Years of Service  and  Breaks  in  Service for

purposes  of  eligibility,  the  initial  Eligibility  Computation

Period is the twelve (12) consecutive month period beginning on an

Employee's Date of Employment or Date of Reemployment.  Subsequent

Eligibility  Computation  Periods shall be twelve (12) consecutive

month periods beginning on  the first anniversary of an Employee's

Date  of  Employment  or  Date  of   Reemployment  and  succeeding

anniversaries thereof.

     Years  of  Service,  and Breaks in Service,  for  eligibility

purposes  will be measured on  the  same  Eligibility  Computation

Period.

1.12 Employee.
     --------
     Those  persons  regularly employed by the Employer, including

employees of any other employer required to be aggregated with the

Employer under Sections  414(b), (c), (m) or (o) of the Code.  The

term Employee shall also include  any leased employee deemed to be

an employee of the Employer as provided  in Sections 414(n) or (o)

of  the  Code.   The term Employee shall not  include  any  owner

employee, as defined in Code Secton 401(c)(3).

1.13 Employer.
     --------
     Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc.

1.14 Entry Date.
     ----------
     (a)   The January  1  or  July  1  on  which  or  immediately

            following the date on which an Employee satisfies the 
            
            requirements of Section 2.1; or

     (b)   In  the case of an Employee whose Years of Service  are

           disregarded pursuant to Section 1.29(c), such Employee will be

           treated as a new Employee for eligibility purposes. If an

           Employee's Years of Service may not be disregarded pursuant to

           Section 1.29(c),  such  

                                  6
<PAGE>


           Employee  shall continue to participate in

           the Plan, or, if terminated, shall participate immediately 
           upon his Date of Reemployment.

1.15 Highly Compensated Employee.
     ---------------------------
     A  highly  compensated  active employee includes any Employee

who  performs service for the Employer  during  the  determination

year  and   who,   during   the   look-back  year:   (i)  received

compensation from the Employer in excess  of  $75,000 (as adjusted

pursuant   to   Section   415(d)   of  the  Code);  (ii)  received

compensation from the Employer in excess  of  $50,000 (as adjusted

pursuant to Section 415(d) of the Code) and was  a  member  of the

top-paid  group  for  such  year;  or  (iii) was an officer of the

Employer  and  received  compensation during  such  year  that  is

greater than fifty percent  (50%)  of  the  dollar  limitation  in

effect  under  Section  415(b)(1)(A) of the Code.  The term Highly

Compensated Employee also  includes:   (i)  Employees who are both

described  in  the  preceding sentence if the term  "determination
year"  is substituted  for  the  term  "look-back  year"  and  the

Employee  is  one  of the one hundred (100) Employees who received

the most compensation  from  the Employer during the determination

year; and (ii) Employees who are  five  percent (5%) owners at any

time during the look-back year or determination year.

     If no officer has satisfied the compensation  requirement  of

(iii)  above during either a determination year or look-back year,

the highest  paid  officer  for  such  year  shall be treated as a

Highly Compensated Employee.

     For this purpose, the determination year  shall  be  the Plan

Year.   The  look-back  year  shall  be  the  twelve-month  period

immediately preceding the determination year.

     A  highly  compensated  former employee includes any Employee

who separated from service (or was deemed to have separated) prior

to the determination year, performs  no  service  for the Employer

during  the  determination  year,  and  was  a  Highly Compensated

Employee for either the separation year or any determination  year

ending on or after the Employee's fifty-fifth (55th) birthday.

                                 7
<PAGE>

     The  term  Highly  Compensated  Employee includes both highly

compensated  active  employees  and  highly   compensated   former

employees.

     If  an  Employee is, during a determination year or look-back

year, a family  member  of either a five percent (5%) owner who is

an active or former Employee  or a Highly Compensated Employee who

is one of the ten (10) most Highly Compensated Employees ranked on

the basis of compensation paid  by  the Employer during such year,

then the family member and the five percent  (5%) owner or top-ten

Highly Compensated Employee shall be aggregated.   In  such  case,

the  family  member  and  the  five  percent (5%) owner or top-ten

Highly Compensated Employee shall be treated  as a single Employee

receiving compensation and plan contributions or benefits equal to

the sum of such compensation and contributions  or benefits of the

family  member and the five percent (5%) owner or  top-ten  Highly

Compensated  Employee.   For  purposes  of  this  Section,  family

members  include the spouse, lineal ascendants and descendants  of

the Employee  or  former  Employee  and the spouses of such lineal

ascendants and descendants.

     The  determination of who is a Highly  Compensated  Employee,

including  the   determination  of  the  number  and  identity  of

Employees  in  the top-paid  group,  the  top  one  hundred  (100)

Employees, the number  of  Employees  treated as officers, and the

compensation that is considered, will be  made  in accordance with

Section 414(q) of the Code and the regulations thereunder.

1.16 Hour of Service.
     ---------------
     Each hour for an Employee under (a) through  (c),  determined

from the employment records of the Employer.  Any ambiguity  which

may  arise  shall be resolved in favor of crediting Employees with

an Hour of Service.

     (a)   Each hour for which an Employee is paid, or entitled to

           payment, for the performance  of duties for the Employer. These

           hours will be credited to the Employee for the computation period

           in which the duties are performed;

                                 8
<PAGE>

     (b)   Each hour for which an Employee is paid, or entitled to

           payment, by the Employer on account of a period of time during

           which no duties are performed  (irrespective  of  whether  the

           employment relationship has terminated) due to vacation, holiday,
           
           illness, incapacity (including disability), layoff, jury duty,

           military duty or leave of absence. No more than five hundred one

           (501) Hours of Service will be credited under this paragraph for

           any single continuous period (whether or not such period occurs 
           
           in a single computation period). Hours under this paragraph will 
           
           be calculated and credited pursuant to Section 2530.200(b) of the

           Department of Labor Regulations, which is incorporated herein by

           this reference; and

     (c)   Each   hour   for   which  back  pay,  irrespective  of

           mitigation of damages, is either  awarded  or  agreed  to  
           
           by  the Employer.  The same Hours of Service will not be 
           
           credited both under paragraph (a) and (b), as  the  case  may 
           
           be, and under this paragraph (c).  These hours will be credited  
           
           to  the Employee for the computation period or periods to 
           
           which the award or agreement pertains rather than the 
           
           computation period in which the award, agreement or payment 
           
           is made.

     Notwithstanding  the above, (i) an hour for which an Employee

is directly or indirectly paid, or entitled to payment, on account

of a period during which  no  duties are performed is not required

to be credited to the Employee  if  such  payment  is  made or due

under  a plan maintained solely for the purpose of complying  with

applicable  worker's  compensation,  unemployment  compensation or

disability  insurance  laws;  and  (ii) Hours of Service  are  not

required to be credited for a payment  which  solely reimburses an

Employee for medical or medically-related expenses incurred by the

Employee.

     Hours of Service will be credited for employment  with  other

members  of an affiliated service group (under Section 414(m)),  a

controlled  group  of  corporations  (under  Section 414(b)), or a

group of trades or businesses under common control  (under Section

414(c))  of  which the Employer is a member, 

                               9
<PAGE>

and any other  entity

required to be  aggregated  with  the Employer pursuant to Section

414(o) and the regulations thereunder.

     Hours of Service will also be  credited  for  any  individual

considered  an  Employee  for  purposes of this Plan under Section

414(n) or Section 414(o) and the regulations thereunder.

     Solely  for  purposes  of  determining  whether  a  Break  in

Service, as defined in Section 1.5,  for participation and vesting

purposes has occurred in a computation  period,  an individual who

is  absent  from  work  for  maternity or paternity reasons  shall

receive credit for the Hours of Service which would otherwise have

been credited to such individual  but  for such absence, or in any

case  in  which such hours cannot be determined,  eight  Hours  of

Service per  day of such absence.  For purposes of this paragraph,

an absence from  work  for maternity or paternity reasons means an

absence (1) by reason of  the  pregnancy of the individual, (2) by

reason of the birth of a child of the individual, (3) by reason of

the placement of a child with the  individual  in  connection with

the adoption of such child by the individual, or (4)  for purposes

of  caring  for  such  child  for  a  period beginning immediately

following such birth or placement.  The  Hours of Service credited

under  this  paragraph shall be credited (1)  in  the  computation

period in which  the  absence begins if the crediting is necessary

to prevent a Break in Service  in that period, or (2) in all other

cases, in the following computation period.

1.17 Leased Employee.
     ---------------
     (a)   Any person (other than  an  employee  of the recipient)

           who pursuant to an agreement between the recipient  and  
           
           any other person  ("leasing  organization")  has performed 
           
           services for  the recipient (or for the recipient and  
           
           related persons determined in  accordance with Code Section 
           
           414(n)(6))  on  a  substantially full time  basis for a 
           
           period of at least one year, and  such  services

           are of a type historically performed by employees in the 
           
           business field  of  the  recipient  employer.   Contributions  
           
           or  benefits provided a leased employee by the leasing 
           
           organization which are attributable to  services  performed  
           
           for  the  recipient employer shall be treated as provided by 
           
           the recipient employer.

                                 10
<PAGE>


     (b)   A leased employee shall not be considered  an  employee

of  the  recipient  if:   (i)  such employee is covered by a money

purchase pension plan providing:   (1)  a  nonintegrated  employer

contribution  rate  of at least ten percent (10%) of compensation,

as  defined  in  Code Section  415(c)(3),  but  including  amounts

contributed pursuant  to  a  salary  reduction agreement which are

excludable from the leased employee's  gross  income under Section

125, Section 402(e)(3), Section 402(h)(1)(B) or  Section 403(b) of

the Code, (2) immediate participation, and (3) full  and immediate

vesting;  and  (ii)  leased employees do not constitute more  than

twenty  percent (20%) of  the  recipient's  nonhighly  compensated

workforce.

1.18 Limitation Year.
     ---------------
     The  Plan Year unless any other twelve (12) consecutive month

period is designated  pursuant  to a written resolution adopted by

the Employer.

1.19 Merger Account.
     --------------
     The account maintained for a  Participant  with  respect to a

plan which has merged with this Plan or transferred its  assets to

this Plan, in accordance with Section 9.2.

1.20 Normal Retirement Age.
     ---------------------
     The  fifty-fifth  (55th) birthday of a Participant, at  which

time the Participant shall become fully vested.

1.21 Plan Administrator.
     ------------------
     The Committee referred to in Section 13 of this Plan.

1.22 Plan Year.
     ---------
     The calendar year.

1.23 Regular Account.
     ---------------
     The individual  account maintained for a Participant to which

is credited his share of Employer contributions  and  forfeitures,

adjusted as herein provided for investment income, gain or loss.

                                 11
<PAGE>

1.24 Rollover Account.
     ----------------
     The  account maintained in accordance with Section  14.1  for

each Participant who has made a rollover contribution.

1.25 Suspense Account.
     ----------------
   The account maintained in accordance with Section 4.8.

1.26 Top Heavy Valuation Date.
     ------------------------
     The date specified in Section 16.9 of this Plan.

1.27 Valuation Date.
     --------------
     The date on which the Trustee shall make a revaluation of the

trust fund pursuant to Section 4.4.

1.28 Vesting Computation Period.
     --------------------------
     For purposes  of  determining  Years of Service and Breaks in

Service for computing an Employee's nonforfeitable  right  to  the

Account   balance   derived   from   Employer  contributions,  the

computation period shall be the Plan Year.

1.29 Year of Service.
     ---------------
     A twelve-consecutive month period (computation period) during

which an Employee completes at least five  hundred  (500) Hours of

Service.   Effective  January  1,  1994,  a Year of Service  is  a

twelve-consecutive month period (computation  period) during which

an  Employee  completes  at  least one thousand (1,000)  Hours  of

Service.  All of an Employee's  Years of Service shall be counted,

subject to the following qualifications and exceptions:

     (a)   A Year of Service will  not  be credited for any period

           of Approved Absence after the Employee incurs  a  Break 
           
           in Service during such absence from the service of the 
           
           Employer;

     (b)   Service performed prior to a Break in Service shall not

           be taken into account until the Employee has completed  
           
           a  Year of Service  after such Break in Service.  Such 
           
           Years of Service  will be measured by the twelve (12) 
           
           consecutive month period beginning on  the  

                                    12
<PAGE>           
           
           Employee's   
           
           Date of Reemployment and, if necessary, subsequent twelve 
           
           (12)  consecutive month periods beginning on anniversaries 
           
           of the Employee's date of Reemployment;

     (c)   In  the  case  of  an  Employee  who  does not have any

           nonforfeitable right to his Regular Account, Years of Service,
           
           whether or not consecutive, before a period of consecutive one

           year Breaks in Service shall not be taken into account if the

           number of consecutive one-year Breaks in Service in such period

           equals or exceeds the greater of five (5) or the aggregate number

           of Years of Service. Such aggregate number of Years of Service

           will not include any Years of Service disregarded under the

           preceding sentence by reason of prior Breaks in Service;

     (d)   In the case of a Participant  who  has five (5) or more

           consecutive  one-year  Breaks in Service, all service  
           
           after  such Breaks in Service will be  disregarded for 
           
           purposes of vesting the Employer-derived Account balance  
           
           that  accrued before such Breaks in Service.  Such 
           
           Participant's pre-break  service  will  count in

           vesting the post-break Employer-derived Account balance only if

           either:

           (i)  such  Participant  has any nonforfeitable interest
                in the Account balance attributable to Employer 
                contributions at the time of separation from service; or
           
           (ii) upon returning to service the number of consecutive 
                one-year Breaks in Service  is less than the number of
                Years of Service.

           Separate accounts will be maintained for the Participant's 
           
           pre-break and post-break Employer-derived Account  balance.

           Both accounts will share in the earnings and losses of the  
           
           trust; and

     (e)   Any  Employee who was employed by Central Telephone  of

           Ohio ("Central") on March 31, 1992 and who was not a member of

           local chapter 4370 of the Communications Workers of America at

           such time, who became employed by the Employer on or about April

           1, 1992 pursuant to an offer of employment by the Employer, shall

           be credited for all purposes under this Plan with service

           performed prior to April 1, 1992 for Centel 
           
                                  13
<PAGE>           
           Corporation, Central,

           or any member of a controlled  group in which Centel Corporation

           and Central were  members.

     (f)   Service  with San Marcos Telephone  Company,  Inc.,  SM

           Telecorp, Inc., and subsidiaries thereof, and any successors

           thereto by merger or otherwise, shall be counted for all purposes

           under this Plan.

                                    14 
<PAGE>

                          SECTION 2

                         ELIGIBILITY

2.1  Participation.
     -------------
     Every Participant  in  the  Plan  prior to this Amendment and

Restatement shall continue to participate  in  the  Plan as of the

effective  date  hereof.   Additionally,  every Employee  who  has

completed   one   (1)  Year  of  Service  during  an   Eligibility

Computation Period,  shall  become a Participant in the Plan as of

the Entry Date.  However, Employees  whose terms of employment are

subject  to  a  collective bargaining agreement,  which  does  not

provide for their  coverage  under this Plan, as well as Employees

for  whom  union representation  negotiations  have  begun,  which

negotiations  do  not  provide for their coverage under this Plan,

are not eligible to participate.   In addition, Employees employed

by  Century  Business  Communications,   Inc.   (formerly  Century

Printing  &  Publishing, Inc.), Interactive Communications,  Inc.,

and Metro Access Networks, Inc. are not eligible to participate in

this Plan.

2.2  Determination of Eligibility.
     ----------------------------
     The Plan  Administrator  shall  determine  the eligibility of

each  Employee for participation in the Plan.  Such  determination

shall be conclusive and binding upon all persons.

2.3  Election Not to Participate.
     ---------------------------
     An  Employee  may,  subject  to the approval of the Employer,

elect voluntarily not to participate  in  the  Plan.  The election

not  to  participate  must  be  communicated  to the Employer,  in

writing, at least thirty (30) days before the beginning  of a Plan

Year.   The  foregoing  election  not to participate shall not  be

available with respect to partners in a partnership.

                                 15
<PAGE>                         
                          SECTION 3

                        CONTRIBUTIONS

3.1  Contributions by Employer.
     -------------------------
     For the current Plan Year and  for each Plan Year thereafter,

the Employer may make a contribution  to  the  Trust  in  cash  or

shares of Company Stock.  The Employer's contribution for any Plan

Year  shall not exceed the maximum amount allowable as a deduction

to the Employer under Section 404 of the Code.

     Notwithstanding  the  foregoing,  the  Employer  shall make a

contribution  to  the  extent  necessary to provide the top  heavy

minimum allocations under Section 16.14, even if such contribution

exceeds current or accumulated net  profits  or the maximum amount

deductible from the Employer's income for the year.

3.2  Determination of Contribution.
     -----------------------------
     The Employer shall determine the amount of  any contributions

to  be made by it to the Trust under the terms of this  Agreement.

The  Employer's  determination  of  such  contributions  shall  be

binding on all Participants and the Trustee.

     The  Trustee  shall have no right or duty to inquire into the

amount of the Employer's annual contribution or the method used in

determining the amount  of  the Employer's contribution, but shall

be accountable only for funds actually received by it.

3.3  Time of Payment of Contribution.
     -------------------------------
     The Employer shall pay to  the  Trustee  its contribution for

each  Plan  Year  within  the  time  prescribed by law,  including

extensions  of  time, for the filing of  its  Federal  income  tax

return for such year. 

3.4  Exclusive Benefit.
     -----------------
     Any  and  all contributions made by the Employer to the trust

fund shall be irrevocable, and  neither such contributions nor any

income therefrom shall be used for, or diverted to, purposes other

than  for  

                                 16
<PAGE>


the  exclusive  benefit  of   Participants   or   their

beneficiaries under the Plan.

3.5  Return of Contributions.

     Any contribution made by the Employer because of a mistake of

fact  must  be  returned  to  the  Employer within one year of the

contribution.

     In  the  event  that  the Commissioner  of  Internal  Revenue

determines that the Plan is  not  initially  qualified  under  the

Internal  Revenue  Code,  any  contribution  made incident to that

initial  qualification  by the Employer must be  returned  to  the

Employer within one year  after the date the initial qualification

is denied, but only if the  application  for qualification is made

by the time prescribed by law for filing the Employer's return for

the taxable year in which the Plan is adopted,  or such later date

as the Secretary of the Treasury may prescribe.

     In  the  event the deduction of a contribution  made  by  the

Employer  is disallowed  under  Section  404  of  the  Code,  such

contribution  (to  the  extent disallowed) must be returned to the

Employer within one year of the disallowance of the deduction.

                                 17
<PAGE>

                              SECTION 4

                       ACCOUNTS OF PARTICIPANTS

4.1  Individual Accounts for Each Participant
     ---------------------------------------- 
     The Plan Administrator  or,  if  the  Plan  Administrator  so

determines, the Trustee, shall maintain a Regular Account for each

Participant.   With  respect  to a Participant who incurs five (5)

consecutive  one-year  Breaks  in   Service   before  receiving  a

distribution,  the  vested  portion of such Participant's  Regular

Account shall remain in his Regular  Account,  and  the  nonvested

portion of the Participant's Regular Account shall be forfeited as

provided in Section 7.2.

4.2  Allocation of Employer Contributions.
     ------------------------------------
     Contributions made by the Employer for a Plan Year shall,  as

of  the  Adjustment  Date  occurring  within  such  Plan  Year, be

allocated  among  and posted to the Regular Account of each Active

Participant in the  proportion which the Compensation paid to such

Active Participant for  such  year bears to the total Compensation

of all Active Participants for such year.

4.3  Allocation of Forfeitures.
     -------------------------
     The amount of forfeitures  determined under Section 7.2 shall

be  reallocated as of the Adjustment  Date  on  which  forfeitures

occurred  to the Regular Accounts of Active Participants by adding

the total amount of forfeitures to the Employer's contribution for

the year and allocating the sum thereof in accordance with Section

4.2.  If there  were  no  Employer contributions for the year, the

forfeitures shall be allocated in accordance with Section 4.2. 

4.4  Year-End Valuation of Accounts.
     ------------------------------
     The Trustee, as of each  Adjustment Date, shall determine the

net worth of the assets of the  trust  fund.   In determining such

net worth, the Trustee shall value the assets of the trust fund at

their  fair  market  value as of such Adjustment Date,  and  shall

deduct all liabilities  of  the Plan and all expenses payable from

the  trust  fund  for  which the  Trustee  has  not  yet  obtained

reimbursement.  Such valuation  shall not include any contribution

for the year made by the Employer as of the Valuation Date.

                               18
<PAGE>     

     As of each Adjustment Date,  before allocation of forfeitures

and Employer contributions for the  year, the Trustee shall adjust

the  net  credit  balance  in  the Accounts  of  all  Participants

(whether or not active) upward or  downward, pro-rata, so that the

total of such net credit balances will  equal the net worth of the

trust fund as of the Adjustment Date.  As  used  herein  the  term

"net  credit  balance"  means  the  balance  to the credit of each

Participant  as  of the immediately preceding Adjustment  Date  or

Interim Valuation Date, if later, as reduced for payments from the

Accounts and forfeitures on or subsequent to such date.

4.5  Interim Valuation of Accounts.
     -----------------------------
     As of the end  of  any  month,  the  Plan  Administrator  may

request  the Trustee to determine, in accordance with the rules of

Section 4.4,  the  then  net  worth of the assets constituting the

trust fund.  The last day of each  month  as  of  which  the  Plan

Administrator   has   requested   the  Trustee  to  determine  the

aforementioned net worth is referred  to  herein  as  an  "Interim

Valuation Date."

     All  distributions  which  are to be made as of or after  any

such Interim Valuation Date, but  prior  to  the  next  succeeding

Adjustment  Date,  or,  if  earlier,  the  next succeeding Interim

Valuation  Date, shall be made as if the credit  balances  to  all

Participants'  Accounts  had  actually been credited or debited so

that the total credit balances to all Accounts would equal the net

worth of the assets constituting the trust fund as of such Interim

Valuation Date.

4.6  Debiting of Distributions.
     -------------------------
     The amounts, if any, paid to or on behalf of a Participant at

any time shall, concurrent with  such  payment, be debited against

his Account.

4.7  Effective Date of Entries.
     -------------------------
     Each Account entry which,  in  accordance with the provisions

hereof, needs to be made shall be considered as having  been  made

on  the  date  herein  specified  regardless of the date of actual

entry.

                                 19
<PAGE>

                  LIMIT ON ANNUAL ADDITIONS

4.8  Coverage Under This Plan Only.
     -----------------------------
     (a)   If the Participant does not  participate  in,  and  has

never participated  in  another  qualified  plan maintained by the

Employer, or a welfare benefit fund, as defined  in Section 419(e)

of the Code, maintained by the Employer, or an individual  medical

account,  as  defined in Section 415(l)(2) of the Code, maintained

by the Employer,  or  a simplified employee pension, as defined in

Section 408(k) of the Code,  maintained  by  the  Employer,  which

provides an annual addition as defined in Section 4.12, the amount

of  annual  additions  which  may be credited to the Participant's

Account for any Limitation Year  will not exceed the lesser of the

maximum permissible amount or any  other  limitation  contained in

this  Plan.  If the Employer contribution that would otherwise  be

contributed  or allocated to the Participant's Account would cause

the annual additions for the Limitation Year to exceed the maximum

permissible amount,  the  amount  contributed or allocated will be

reduced so that the annual additions  for the Limitation Year will

equal the maximum permissible amount.

     (b)    Prior   to   determining   the  Participant's   actual

compensation for the Limitation Year, the  Employer  may determine

the maximum permissible amount for a Participant on the basis of a

reasonable  estimate  of  the Participant's compensation  for  the

Limitation  Year,  uniformly   determined   for  all  Participants

similarly situated.

     (c)  As soon as is administratively feasible after the end of

the  Limitation  Year,  the  maximum permissible  amount  for  the

Limitation  Year  will  be  determined   on   the   basis  of  the

Participant's actual compensation for the Limitation Year.

     (d)   If,  pursuant to Section 4.8(c) or as a result  of  the

allocation of forfeitures,  there  is an excess amount, the excess

will be disposed of as follows:

           (i)  Any nondeductible voluntary employee contributions, 
                to the extent  they would reduce the excess amount,
                will be returned to the Participant;

           (ii) If  after  the application  of  paragraph  (i)  an
                excess amount still exists, and the Participant is 
                covered by the Plan at the end of the Limitation Year,  
                the excess 
                                  
                                  20
<PAGE>                
                
                amount in the Participant's Account will   
                be used to reduce Employer contributions (including 
                any allocation of forfeitures) for such Participant  
                in  the  next  Limitation  Year,  and each succeeding
                Limitation Year if necessary;

         (iii) If after  the application of paragraphs  (i)  and
               (ii) an excess amount still  exists,  and  the  
               Participant is not covered  by the Plan at the end 
               of a Limitation Year, the excess amount will be held  
               unallocated  in  a  Suspense  Account.  The
               Suspense  Account  will  be  applied  to  reduce  
               future  Employer contributions   for   all remaining  
               Participants  in  the  next Limitation Year, and each 
               succeeding Limitation Year if necessary;

          (iv) If a Suspense  Account is in existence at any time
               during a Limitation Year pursuant to this Section,  
               it will not participate in the allocation of the 
               Trust's investment  gains and losses. If a Suspense 
               Account is in existence at any time  during
               a particular Limitation Year, all amounts in the 
               Suspense Account must be allocated and reallocated 
               to Participants' Accounts before any Employer or 
               any Employee contributions may be made to the Plan
               for  that  Limitation Year.  Excess amounts may not 
               be distributed to Participants or former Participants.

4.9  Coverage Under A Prototype Plan.
     -------------------------------
     (a)  This  Section  applies if, in addition to this Plan, the

Participant  is covered under  a  qualified  master  or  prototype

defined contribution  plan  maintained  by the Employer, a welfare

benefit fund  maintained by the Employer,   an  individual medical

account  maintained  by  the  Employer,  or a simplified  employee

pension  maintained  by  the  Employer,  that provides  an  annual

addition as defined in Section 4.12 during  any  Limitation  Year.

The  annual  additions  which  may  be credited to a Participant's

Account  under this Plan for any such  Limitation  Year  will  not

exceed the  maximum  permissible  amount  reduced  by  the  annual

additions  credited  to  a  Participant's  account under the other

qualified master or prototype defined contribution  plans, welfare

benefit   funds,   individual  medical  accounts,  and  simplified

employee pensions  for  the  same  Limitation Year.  If the annual

additions with respect to the Participant  under  other  qualified

master  or  prototype  defined contribution plans, welfare benefit

funds,  individual  medical   accounts,  and  simplified  employee

pensions maintained by the Employer  are  less  than  the  maximum

permissible  amount  and  the  Employer  contribution  that  would

otherwise be contributed or allocated to the Participant's Account

under   this  Plan  would  cause  the  annual  additions  for  the

Limitation  Year to exceed this limitation, the amount contributed

or allocated  will  be  reduced so that the annual additions 

                                   21
<PAGE>

under

all such plans and funds  for  the  Limitation Year will equal the

maximum permissible amount.  If the annual  additions with respect

to the Participant under such other qualified  master or prototype

defined  contribution  plans,  welfare  benefit funds,  individual

medical  accounts,  and  simplified  employee   pensions   in  the

aggregate  are  equal  to  or greater than the maximum permissible

amount,  no  amount  will  be  contributed  or  allocated  to  the

Participant's Account under this Plan for the Limitation Year.

     (b)    Prior   to   determining  the   Participant's   actual

compensation for the Limitation  Year,  the Employer may determine

the  maximum permissible amount for a Participant  in  the  manner

described in Section 4.8(b).

     (c)  As soon as is administratively feasible after the end of

the Limitation  Year,  the  maximum  permissible  amount  for  the

Limitation   Year   will   be  determined  on  the  basis  of  the

Participant's actual compensation for the Limitation Year.

     (d)  If, pursuant to Section  4.9(c)  or  as  a result of the

allocation of forfeitures, a Participant's annual additions  under

this  Plan  and  such other plans would result in an excess amount

for a Limitation Year, the excess amount will be deemed to consist

of  the  annual  additions  last  allocated,  except  that  annual

additions attributable  to  a  simplified employee pension will be

deemed to have been allocated first,  followed by annual additions

to  a  welfare  benefit  fund  or  individual   medical   account,

regardless of the actual allocation date.

     (e)  If an excess amount was allocated to a Participant on an

allocation  date  of  this Plan which coincides with an allocation

date of another plan, the  excess  amount  attributed to this Plan

will be the product of:

           (i)  the total excess amount allocated as of such date,
                times

           (ii) the ratio of (A) the annual additions allocated to
                the Participant for the Limitation Year as of such 
                date under this Plan to (B) the total annual additions  
                allocated to the Participant for the Limitation Year 
                as of such date under this and all the other qualified 
                master or prototype defined contribution plans.

                                   22
<PAGE>

     (f)  Any  excess  amount  attributed  to  this  Plan  will be

disposed in the manner described in Section 4.8(d).

4.10 Coverage Under A Non-Prototype Plan.
     -----------------------------------
     If the Participant is covered under another qualified defined

contribution plan maintained by the Employer which is not a master

or  prototype plan, annual additions which may be credited to  the

Participant's Account under this Plan for any Limitation year will

be limited in accordance with Section 4.9 as though the other plan

were a master or prototype plan.

4.11 Combined Limits.
     ---------------
     If  the  Employer  maintains,  or  at  any time maintained, a

qualified  defined benefit plan covering any Participant  in  this

Plan, the sum  of  the Participant's defined benefit plan fraction

and defined contribution  plan fraction will not exceed 1.0 in any

Limitation Year.  If the sum  of the defined benefit plan fraction

and the defined contribution plan fraction shall exceed 1.0 in any

Limitation  Year  for  any Participant  in  this  Plan,  the  Plan

Administrator shall adjust  the  numerator  of the defined benefit

plan fraction so that the sum of both fractions  shall  not exceed

1.0 in any Limitation Year for such Participant.

4.12 Definition.
     ----------
     (a)   Annual  additions:   The  sum  of the following amounts

credited to a Participant's Account for the Limitation Year:

           (i)   Employer contributions;

           (ii)  Employee contributions;

           (iii) Forfeitures;

           (iv)  Amounts allocated, after March  31,  1984,  to  an
                 individual medical account, as defined in Section 
                 415(l)(2) of the Code, which is part of a pension 
                 or annuity plan maintained by the Employer are 
                 treated as annual additions to a defined contribution
                 plan.  Also amounts derived from contributions paid 
                 or accrued after December 31, 1985, in taxable  years 
                 ending after such date, which  are  attributable  to  
                 post-retirement medical benefits, allocated to the 
                 separate account of a key employee, as defined in
                 Section 419A(d)(3) of the Code, under a welfare benefit  
                 fund, as defined  in Section 419(e) of the Code, 
                 maintained by the Employer are treated as annual 
                 additions to a defined contribution plan; and


                                  23
<PAGE>
           (v)   Allocations under a simplified employee pension.

     For this purpose, any  excess  amount  applied under Sections

4.8(d)  or  4.9(f)  in  the  Limitation  Year  to reduce  Employer

contributions  will  be  considered  annual  additions   for  such

Limitation Year.

     (b)    Compensation:    For   purposes   of   this   Section,

compensation  shall  mean  Section  415  safe-harbor compensation,

which is defined as all of a Participant's  wages,  salaries,  and

fees for professional services and other amounts received (without

regard  to  whether or not an amount is paid in cash) for personal

services actually  rendered  in  the course of employment with the

Employer maintaining the Plan to the  extent  that the amounts are

includable in gross income (including, but not limited to, commis

sions paid salesmen, compensation for services  on  the basis of a

percentage  of  profits, commissions on insurance premiums,  tips,

bonuses, fringe benefits,  and  reimbursements  or  other  expense

allowances  under  a  nonaccountable plan (as described in Section

1.61-2(c))), and excluding the following:

           (i)  Employer  contributions  to  a  plan  of  deferred
                compensation  which  are  not  includible  in the 
                Employee's gross income  for  the  taxable year in 
                which contributed, or Employer contributions under   
                a  simplified  employee pension plan, or any
                distributions from a plan of deferred compensation;
           
           (ii) Amounts  realized from  the  exercise  of  a  non
                qualified stock option, or  when  restricted  stock  
                (or property) held by the Employee either becomes 
                freely transferable or is no longer subject to a 
                substantial risk of forfeiture;

          (iii) Amounts realized from the sale, exchange or other
                disposition of stock acquired under a qualified 
                stock option; and
           
           (iv) Other amounts which received special tax benefits,
                or contributions made by the Employer (whether or  
                not under a salary reduction agreement) towards the 
                purchase of an annuity described in Section  403(b)  
                of the Code (whether or not the amounts are actually 
                excludable from the gross income of the Employee).

     For any  self-employed individual, compensation will mean

earned income.

     For  purposes  of  applying  the limitations of this Section,

compensation for a Limitation Year  is  the  compensation actually

paid or includable in gross income during such Limitation Year.

     Notwithstanding  the preceding sentence, compensation  for  a

Participant in a defined  contribution plan who is permanently and

totally disabled (as defined in Section 22(e)(3) of the Code) is the  


                                 24
<PAGE>

compensation such Participant would  have  received  for  the

Limitation  Year  if  the Participant had been paid at the rate of

compensation  paid immediately  before  becoming  permanently  and

totally disabled;  such  imputed  compensation  for  the  disabled

Participant  may be taken into account only if the Participant  is

not a highly compensated employee (as defined in Section 414(q) of

the Code) and contributions made on behalf of such Participant are

nonforfeitable when made.

     (c)  Defined  benefit fraction:  A fraction, the numerator of

which is the sum of  the  Participant's  projected annual benefits

under  all  defined  benefit  plans  (whether or  not  terminated)

maintained by the Employer, and the denominator  of  which  is the

lesser  of  one  hundred  twenty-five percent (125%) of the dollar

limitation  determined  for the  Limitation  Year  under  Sections

415(b) and (d) of the Code  or one hundred forty percent (140%) of

the highest average compensation,  including any adjustments under

Section 415(b) of the Code.

     Notwithstanding  the  above,  if  the   Participant   was   a

participant  as  of  the  first  day  of the first Limitation Year

beginning after December 31, 1986, in one  or more defined benefit

plans maintained by the Employer which were in existence on May 6,

1986, the denominator of this fraction will  not  be less than one

hundred  twenty-five  percent  (125%)  of  the  sum of the  annual

benefits under such plans which the Participant had  accrued as of

the close of the last Limitation Year beginning before  January 1,

1987, disregarding any changes in the terms and conditions  of the

Plan  after  May 5, 1986.  The preceding sentence applies only  if

the  defined benefit  plans  individually  and  in  the  aggregate

satisfied  the  requirements  of  Section  415 of the Code for all

Limitation Years beginning before January 1, 1987.

     (d)  Defined contribution dollar limitation:   $30,000  or if

greater,  one-fourth  of the defined benefit dollar limitation set

forth in Section 415(b)(1)  of  the  Code  as  in  effect  for the

Limitation Year.

     (e)    Defined   contribution   fraction:   A  fraction,  the

numerator  of  which  is the sum of the annual  additions  to  the

Participant's  account  under   all   defined  contribution  plans

(whether or not terminated)  maintained  by  the  Employer for the

current  and  all  prior  limitation  years (including the  annual

additions attributable to the Participant's nondeductible employee

contributions  to  all  defined  benefit  plans,  whether  

                                 25

<PAGE>


or  not

terminated, maintained by the Employer, and  the  annual additions

attributable  to  all  welfare  benefit funds, individual  medical

accounts,  and  simplified employee  pensions  maintained  by  the

Employer), and the  denominator of which is the sum of the maximum

aggregate amounts for  the  current and all prior limitation years

of service with the Employer  (regardless  of  whether  a  defined

contribution  plan  was  maintained by the Employer).  The maximum

aggregate amount in any limitation  year  is  the  lesser  of  one

hundred  twenty-five  percent  (125%)  of  the  dollar  limitation

determined  under  Sections  415(b)  and (d) of the Code in effect

under  Section  415(c)(1)(A) of the Code  or  thirty-five  percent

(35%) of the Participant's compensation for such year.

     If the Employee  was a participant as of the end of the first

day of the first Limitation  Year  beginning  after  December  31,

1986,  in one or more defined contribution plans maintained by the

Employer  which were in existence on May 6, 1986, the numerator of

this fraction will be adjusted if the sum of this fraction and the

defined benefit  fraction  would  otherwise  exceed  1.0 under the

terms of this Plan.  Under the adjustment, an amount equal  to the

product  of  (1)  the excess of the sum of the fractions over 1.0,

times (2) the denominator  of  this  fraction, will be permanently

subtracted from the numerator of this fraction.  The adjustment is

calculated using the fractions as they would be computed as of the

end of the last Limitation Year beginning  before January 1, 1987,

and disregarding any changes in the terms and  conditions  of  the

Plan  made  after  May  5,  1986,  but  using the Code Section 415

limitation applicable to the first Limitation Year beginning on or

after January 1, 1987.

     The annual addition for any Limitation  Year beginning before

January  1,  1987, shall not be recomputed to treat  all  Employee

contributions as annual additions.

     (f)  Employer:   For purposes of this Section, Employer shall

mean  the  Employer and all  members  of  a  controlled  group  of

corporations (as defined in Section 414(b) of the Code as modified

by Section 415(h)),  all  commonly controlled trades or businesses

(as defined in Section 414(c)  of  the Code as modified by Section

415(h)) or affiliated service groups (as defined in Section 414(m)

of the Code) of 

                                  26   
<PAGE>


which the Employer is a part, and any other entity

required   to  be  aggregated  with  the  Employer   pursuant   to

regulations under Section 414(o) of the Code.

     (g)  Excess  amount:   The excess of the Participant's annual

additions for the Limitation  Year  over  the  maximum permissible

amount.

     (h)  Highest average compensation:  The average  compensation

for the three consecutive Years of Service with the Employer  that

produces the highest average.  A Year of Service with the Employer

is  the  twelve  (12)  consecutive month period defined in Section

1.29 of this Plan.

     (i)  Limitation year:   The  calendar  year.   All  qualified

plans  maintained  by  the  Employer  must use the same Limitation

Year.  If the Limitation Year is amended  to  a  different  twelve

(12)  consecutive month period, the new Limitation Year must begin

on a date  within  the  Limitation  Year in which the amendment is

made.

     (j)  Master or prototype plan:   A  plan the form of which is

the  subject  of  a  favorable opinion letter  from  the  Internal

Revenue Service.

     (k)  Maximum permissible amount:  The maximum annual addition

that may be contributed  or  allocated  to a Participant's Account

under the Plan for any Limitation Year shall not exceed the lesser

of:

           (i)  the defined contribution dollar limitation, or 
           
           (ii) 25 percent of the Participant's  compensation  for
                the Limitation Year.

     The  compensation  limitation  referred  to in (ii) shall not

apply to any contribution for medical benefits (within the meaning

of  Section  401(h) or Section 419A(f)(2) of the  Code)  which  is

otherwise treated as an annual addition under Section 415(l)(1) or

419A(d)(2) of the Code.

     If a short Limitation Year is created because of an amendment

changing  the  Limitation   Year   to   a  different  twelve  (12)

consecutive month period, the maximum permissible  amount will not

exceed  the  defined contribution dollar limitation multiplied  by

the following fraction:

                                27

<PAGE>

            Number of months in the short Limitation Year
            ---------------------------------------------
                                  12

     (l)  Projected annual benefit:  The annual retirement benefit

(adjusted to an  actuarially  equivalent  straight life annuity if

such  benefit is expressed in a form other than  a  straight  life

annuity  or  qualified  joint  and  survivor annuity) to which the

Participant  would  be  entitled  under  the  terms  of  the  Plan

assuming:




           (i)  the  Participant  will continue  employment  until
                Normal Retirement Age under the Plan  (or  current 
                age, if later), and

           (ii) the  Participant's compensation  for  the  current
                Limitation Year and all other relevant factors used 
                to determine benefits under the Plan will remain  
                constant  for  all  future Limitation Years.


                                  28
<PAGE>                          
                          
                             SECTION 5

             BENEFITS PAYABLE AFTER NORMAL RETIREMENT

5.1  Optional Methods of Payment Available at Retirement.
     ---------------------------------------------------
     All sums credited  to  a  Participant's  Account shall become

fully  vested  upon  attainment  of Normal Retirement  Age.   Upon

actual retirement at or after Normal Retirement Age, a Participant

shall  be  entitled to receive the full  amount  credited  to  his

Account  as of  the  Valuation  Date  or  Interim  Valuation  Date

immediately  preceding  the  month in which payment is to be made,

which amount shall be paid to  the  Participant  in  one lump sum:

(i)  within  sixty (60) days after the close of the Plan  Year  in

which the Participant  retires,  or  (ii)  within  sixty (60) days

after the distributable amount has been determined retroactive  to

the  date in 5.1(i), unless prior to the date of his retirement he

elects,  in  the  manner prescribed by the Plan Administrator, any

one of the following method or methods:

     (a)   Payment  of  the  entire  amount  of  the Participant's

           Account  in one lump sum at some future date, not later  
           
           than  one year after Normal Retirement Date;

     (b)   Payment  in  substantially  equal  annual, quarterly or

           monthly  installments (including net investment  income,  
           
           gain  or loss) until  the value of such Participant's 
           
           Account is exhausted. Unless the Participant elects otherwise, 
           
           the payment period shall not exceed five (5) years. This  
           
           five (5) year period shall be extended by one (1) year, up 
           
           to five (5) additional  years, for each $113,980 (or  fraction  
           
           thereof)  by which such Participant's  Account balance exceeds 
           
           $569,900 (the dollar amounts herein are subject to cost of 
           
           living adjustments prescribed by the Secretary of the Treasury); 
           
           or

     (c)   Any combination of the foregoing.

     Notwithstanding  anything contained in this Section 5.1, lump

sum, installment or any  other  benefits  may not be paid directly

from  the  Plan  in  any  form of a life annuity  or  through  the

distribution of property in any form of a life annuity.


                                 29
<PAGE>

     In  addition,  if  the  Participant's   spouse   is  not  the

designated  beneficiary, the method of distribution selected  must

assure that at  least  fifty percent (50%) of the present value of

the amount available for  distribution  is  paid  within  the life

expectancy of the Participant.

     All  distributions  required  under  this  Section  shall  be

determined  and  made  in accordance with the proposed regulations

under  Section  401(a)(9)  of  the  Code,  including  the  minimum

distribution   incidental    benefit    requirement   of   Section

1.401(a)(9)-2 of the proposed regulations.

5.2  Manner of Payment Following Commencement of Payments.
     ----------------------------------------------------
     Following the commencement of payments  under  Section 5.1, a

Participant  and  the Plan Administrator may, notwithstanding  the

fact that periodic  benefits  are being paid, agree that as of any

subsequent date the balance credited to such Participant's Account

shall be paid to or applied for  the benefit of the Participant in

accordance with any other payout method of Section 5.1.

5.3  Required Beginning Date.
     -----------------------
     The entire interest of a Participant  must  be distributed or

begin  to be distributed no later than the Participant's  required

beginning date, as defined in Section 6.2(f).

5.4  Determination of Amount to be Distributed Each Year.
     ---------------------------------------------------
     If  a  Participant's  interest  is to be distributed in other

than a single-sum, the following minimum  distribution rules shall

apply on or after the required beginning date:

     (a)   If a Participant's benefit is to  be  distributed  over

           (1)  a  period  not  extending  beyond  the life expectancy 
           
           of the Participant or the joint life and last survivor  
           
           expectancy of the Participant and the Participant's 
           
           designated beneficiary or (2) a period not extending beyond 
           
           the life expectancy of the designated beneficiary, the amount  
           
           required to be distributed for each calendar year, beginning  
           
           with  distributions for the first distribution calendar year,  
           
           must at least equal the quotient obtained by dividing the 
           
           Participant's benefit by the applicable life expectancy.

                                      30

<PAGE>
     
     
     (b)   For calendar years beginning before January 1, 1989, if
           
           the Participant's  spouse  is  not the designated beneficiary, 
           
           the method of distribution selected  must  assure  that at 
           
           least fifty percent  (50%)  of the present value of the amount  
           
           available  for distribution is paid  within  the life expectancy  
           
           of the Participant.

     (c)   For calendar years beginning after December  31,  1988,

           the amount to be distributed each  year,  beginning  with

           distributions for the first  distribution calendar year 
           
           shall not be less than the quotient obtained by dividing  
           
           the  Participant's benefit by the lesser of (1) the applicable 
           
           life expectancy or (2) if the Participant's spouse is not 
           
           the designated beneficiary, the applicable divisor determined 
           
           from the table set forth in Q&A-4 of Section  1.401(a)(9)-2 
           
           of the proposed regulations.  Distributions

           after the  death of the Participant shall be distributed 
           
           using the applicable life expectancy in Section 5.4(a) 
           
           above as the relevant divisor  without regard to proposed   
           
           regulations  Section 1.401(a)(9)-2.

     (d)   The minimum distribution required for the Participant's

           first distribution calendar year  must be made on or before 
           
           the Participant's required beginning date. The minimum 
           
           distribution for other calendar years, including the minimum 
           
           distribution  for the distribution calendar year in which 
           
           the Participant's required beginning  date  occurs,  must 
           
           be made on or before December 31 of that distribution calendar 
           
           year.  
           
5.5  Definitions.
     -----------
     For purposes of this Section,  the  definitions  contained in

Section 6.2 shall apply.

5.6  Small Accounts.
     --------------
     Any  provision  of  the Plan to the contrary notwithstanding,

the  Administrator  shall  have   the   authority  to  direct  the

settlement  of any Account having a balance  of  less  than  three

thousand five  hundred dollars ($3,500) by the payment of one lump

sum.

                                  31
<PAGE>
                          SECTION 6

         BENEFITS PAYABLE IN THE EVENT OF DEATH OR DISABILITY 
         
6.1  Death Distribution Provisions.
     -----------------------------
     Upon the death  of  a Participant, the following distribution

provisions shall take effect:

     (a)  If the Participant dies after distribution of his or her

interest has begun, the remaining  portion  of  such interest will

continue to be distributed at least as rapidly as under the method

of distribution being used prior to the Participant's death.

     (b)  If the Participant dies before distribution  of  his  or

her  interest  begins,  distribution  of  the Participant's entire

interest shall be completed by December 31  of  the  calendar year

containing the fifth anniversary of the Participant's death except

to the extent that an election is made to receive distributions in

accordance with (i) or (ii) below:

           (i)  if  any  portion of the Participant's interest  is

payable to a designated beneficiary,  distributions  may  be  made

over the life expectancy or over a period certain not greater than

the life expectancy of the designated beneficiary commencing on or

before  December 31 of the calendar year immediately following the

calendar year in which the Participant died;

           (ii) if the designated beneficiary is the Participant's

surviving  spouse, the date distributions are required to begin in

accordance with  (i)  above shall not be earlier than the later of

(1) December 31 of the calendar year in which the Participant died

and (2) December 31 of  the calendar year in which the Participant

would have attained age 70 1/2.

     If the Participant has  not made an election pursuant to this

Section 6.1(b) by the time of  his or her death, the Participant's

designated beneficiary must elect  the  method  of distribution no

later than the earlier of (1) December 31 of the  calendar year in

which distributions would be required to begin under this Section,

or (2) December 31 of the calendar year which contains  the  fifth

anniversary  of  the  date  of  

                                32
<PAGE>


death  of the Participant.  If the

Participant has no designated beneficiary,  or  if  the designated

beneficiary does not elect a method of distribution,  distribution

of the Participant's entire interest must be completed by December

31  of the calendar year containing the fifth anniversary  of  the

Participant's death.

     (c)   For  purposes of Section 6.1(b) above, if the surviving

spouse dies after  the  Participant,  but  before payments to such

spouse begin, the provisions of Section 6.1(b), with the exception

of paragraph (ii) therein, shall be applied  as  if  the surviving

spouse were the Participant.

     (d)  For purposes of this Section 6.1, any amount  paid  to a

child of the Participant will be treated as if it had been paid to

the  surviving  spouse  if  the  amount  becomes  payable  to  the

surviving spouse when the child reaches the age of majority.

     (e)  For the purposes of this Section 6.1, distribution of  a

Participant's interest is considered to begin on the Participant's

required   beginning   date   (or,  if  Section  6.1(c)  above  is

applicable, the date distribution  is  required  to  begin  to the

surviving   spouse   pursuant   to   Section  6.1(b)  above).   If

distribution in the form of an annuity  irrevocably  commences  to

the  Participant  before  the  required  beginning  date, the date

distribution  is  considered  to  begin  is  the date distribution

actually commences.

6.2  Definitions.
     -----------
     For  purposes of this Section and Section  5,  the  following

definitions shall apply:

     (a)  Applicable  life  expectancy.   The  life expectancy (or

joint and last survivor expectancy) calculated using  the attained

age  of  the  Participant  (or  designated beneficiary) as of  the

Participant's  (or  designated  beneficiary's)   birthday  in  the

applicable  calendar  year  reduced by one for each calendar  year

which  has  elapsed  since  the date  life  expectancy  was  first

calculated.   If  life  expectancy   is  being  recalculated,  the

applicable  life expectancy shall be the  life  expectancy  as  so

recalculated.   The  applicable  calendar  year shall be the first

distribution  calendar  year,  and  if  life expectancy  is  being

recalculated such succeeding calendar year.

     (b)    Designated   beneficiary.   The  individual   who   is

designated as the beneficiary  under  the  Plan in accordance with

Section 401(a)(9) and the proposed regulations thereunder.

                                  33     

<PAGE>     


     (c)  Distribution calendar year.  A calendar year for which a

minimum  distribution  is  required.  For distributions  beginning

before the Participant's death,  the  first  distribution calendar

year is the calendar year immediately preceding  the calendar year

which  contains  the Participant's required beginning  date.   For

distributions beginning  after  the Participant's death, the first

distribution  calendar  year  is  the   calendar   year  in  which

distributions are required to begin pursuant to Section 6.1 above.

     (d)   Life  expectancy.  Life expectancy and joint  and  last

survivor expectancy  are  computed  by  use of the expected return

multiples in Tables V and VI of Section 1.72-9  of  the income tax

regulations.

     Unless  otherwise elected by the Participant (or  spouse,  in

the case of distributions  described  in Section 6.1(b)(ii) above)

by the time distributions are required to begin, life expectancies

shall   be   recalculated  annually.   Such  election   shall   be

irrevocable as  to  the Participant (or spouse) and shall apply to

all  subsequent  years.    The  life  expectancy  of  a  nonspouse

beneficiary may not be recalculated.

     (e)  Participant's benefit.

           (i)  The Account  balance as of the last valuation date
                in  the  calendar  year  immediately  preceding  the  
                distribution  calendar year (valuation calendar year) 
                increased by the amount of any contributions or 
                forfeitures  allocated to the Account balance
                as of dates in the valuation calendar year after the  
                valuation date and decreased by distributions made in 
                the valuation calendar year after the valuation date.


           (ii) Exception  for second distribution calendar  year.
                For purposes of paragraph (i) above, if any portion 
                of the minimum distribution for the first distribution  
                calendar  year is made in the second distribution 
                calendar year on or before the  required beginning date, 
                the amount of the minimum distribution made in the
                second distribution  calendar year shall be treated as 
                if it had been made in the immediately preceding 
                distribution calendar year.


     (f)  Required beginning date.


           (i)  General rule.  The required  beginning  date  of a
                Participant  is  the  first  day  of April of the 
                calendar year following the calendar year in which the 
                Participant attains age 70 1/2.


           (ii) Transitional  rules.   The required beginning date
                of a Participant who attains age 70 1/2  before  
                January 1, 1988, shall be determined in accordance 
                with (A) or (B) below:

                                   34
<PAGE>

                (A)  Non-5-percent  owners.  The required
                     beginning  date  of a Participant who is not 
                     a 5-percent owner  is the first day of April of 
                     the calendar year following the calendar
                     year in which the  later of retirement or attainment 
                     of age 70 1/2 occurs.

                (B)  5-percent  owners. The required beginning date of a 
                     Participant who is a 5-percent owner during  any  year
                     beginning after  December  31,  1979,  is  the  first 
                     day of April following the later of:

                      (1)  the   calendar   year   in  which   the
                           Participant attains age 70 1/2, or
                      (2)  the earlier of the calendar  year  with
                           or  within  which  ends  the  Plan  Year  
                           in which the Participant becomes a 5-percent 
                           owner, or the calendar  year  in  which  the
                           Participant retires.
                      
                      The required beginning date of a Participant
                      who is not a  5-percent  owner  who attains age 
                      70 1/2 during 1988 and who has not retired as of 
                      January 1, 1989, is April 1, 1990.
           
          (iii) 5-percent owner.  A Participant is treated as a 5
                percent owner for purposes of this  Section if such 
                Participant is a 5-percent owner as defined in Section  
                416(i) of the Code (determined in accordance with Section 
                416 but without regard to whether the Plan is top-heavy) 
                at  any  time  during the Plan Year ending  with or within  
                the  calendar year in which  such owner attains age 66 1/2 
                or any subsequent Plan Year.
           
           (iv) Once distributions have begun to a 5-percent owner
                under this Section, they must continue  to be distributed, 
                even if the Participant ceases to be a 5-percent owner in  
                a subsequent year.

6.3  Designation of Beneficiary.
     --------------------------
     A Participant at the time he joins the Plan shall designate a

beneficiary or beneficiaries to receive the sums credited  to  his

Account  in  the  event  of  his  death,  which designation may be

changed by the Participant from time to time.   To  be  effective,

the  original  designation  of  beneficiaries  and  any subsequent

change must be in writing on the form provided for that purpose by

the Plan Administrator.

6.4  Failure to Designate a Beneficiary or Select a Method of Payment.
     ----------------------------------------------------------------
     In the event that no beneficiary is properly designated or in

the  event  that  a  beneficiary  designated  by  the  Participant

predeceased the Participant and no  new designation of beneficiary

is made, the Plan Administrator, in its discretion, may direct the

Trustee  to  make  payment  of  all  sums to  which  the  deceased

Participant is entitled to either:

                                  35
<PAGE>

     (a)   any  one  or more of the next  of  kin  (including  the
           surviving spouse) of the Participant and in such proportions 
           as the Plan Administrator may determine; or

     (b)   the legal representative or representatives of the
           estate of the last to die of the Participant or his beneficiary.

6.5  Disability of a Participant.
     ---------------------------
     In  the  event of the Disability of a  Participant  prior  to

attaining  Normal   Retirement  Age,  such  Participant  shall  be

entitled to receive the  entire  amount  credited  to his Account.

Payment shall begin not later than the sixtieth (60th)  day  after

the  close  of  the  Plan Year in which the Administrator receives

proof  of the Participant's  Disability,  and  shall  be  made  in

accordance  with  any  of  the  methods  provided in Section 5, as

selected by the Participant.

6.6  Transitional Rule.
     -----------------
     Notwithstanding  the  other  requirements  of  this  Section,

distribution  on  behalf of any Employee,  including  a  5-percent

owner,  may be made  in  accordance  with  all  of  the  following

requirements (regardless of when such distribution commences):

     (a)   The  distribution  by  the  Plan is one which would not
           
           have disqualified such Plan under Section 401(a)(9) of 
           
           the Code as in effect prior to amendment by the Deficit 
           
           Reduction Act of 1984.

     (b)   The  distribution is in accordance  with  a  method  of
           
           distribution designated by the Employee whose interest in 
           
           the Plan is being distributed or, if the Employee is deceased,  
           
           by a beneficiary of such Employee.

     (c)   Such  designation  was  in  writing,  was signed by the

           Employee or the beneficiary, and was made before January 1, 1984.

     (d)   The Employee had accrued a benefit under the Plan as of

           December 31, 1983.

     (e)   The method of distribution designated by  the  Employee

           or the beneficiary specifies the time at which distribution will
           
           commence, the period over which distributions will be 

                                   36           
<PAGE>           
           
           made, and in the case of any distribution upon the Employee's 
           
           death, the beneficiaries of the Employee listed in order of 
           
           priority.

     A  distribution  upon  death  will  not  be  covered  by this

transitional  rule  unless  the  information  in  the  designation

contains the required information described above with respect  to

the distributions to be made upon the death of the Employee.

     For  any distribution which commences before January 1, 1984,

but continues  after  December  31,  1983,  the  Employee,  or the

beneficiary  to  whom  such  distribution  is  being made, will be

presumed to have designated the method of distribution under which

the distribution is being made if the method of  distribution  was

specified   in   writing   and   the  distribution  satisfies  the

requirements in (a) and (e) above.

     If a designation is revoked any  subsequent distribution must

satisfy the requirements of Section 401(a)(9)  of the Code and the

proposed  regulations  thereunder.   If a designation  is  revoked

subsequent to the date distributions are  required  to  begin, the

Plan must distribute by the end of the calendar year following the

calendar year in which the revocation occurs the total amount  not

yet  distributed  which  would  have  been  required  to have been

distributed  to  satisfy  Section  401(a)(9)  of the Code and  the

proposed  regulations  thereunder,  but for the Section  242(b)(2)

election.  For calendar years beginning  after  December 31, 1988,

such  distributions must meet the minimum distribution  incidental

benefit  requirements  in  Section  1.401(a)(9)-2  of the proposed

regulations.  Any changes in the designation will be considered to

be   a   revocation   of   the  designation.   However,  the  mere

substitution or addition of  another beneficiary (one not named in

the designation) under the designation  will  not be considered to

be a revocation of the designation, so long as  such  substitution

or addition does not alter the period over which distributions are

to  be  made  under  the designation, directly or indirectly  (for

example, by altering the relevant measuring life).  In the case in

which an amount is transferred  or  rolled  over  from one plan to

another plan, the rules in Q&A J-2 and Q&A J-3 shall apply.

                                37 
<PAGE>


6.7  Location of Participant or Beneficiary Unknown.
     ----------------------------------------------
     In  the  event that all, or any portion, of the  distribution

payable to a Participant  or  his  Beneficiary hereunder shall, at

the expiration of five (5) years after  it  shall  become payable,

remain  unpaid  solely  by  reason  of  the inability of the  Plan

Administrator, after sending a certified  letter,  return  receipt

requested,  to  the last known address, and after further diligent

effort, to ascertain  the  whereabouts  of such Participant or his

Beneficiary, the amount so distributable shall be allocated in the

same manner as a forfeiture, pursuant to  this  Agreement.   If an

amount is forfeited pursuant to this Section, such amount will  be

reinstated if a claim is made by the Participant or beneficiary.

   
                                38    
<PAGE>

                            SECTION 7
                BENEFITS PAYABLE UPON BREAK IN SERVICE
                  OR EMPLOYMENT TERMINATION

7.1  Vesting Schedule.
     ----------------
     Any  Participant  who  incurs  a  Break  in  Service during a

vesting computation period for reasons other than his  retirement,

death or disability shall be entitled to receive at the  time  and

in  the manner described hereinafter that percentage of the amount

credited  to  his  Account  as  of  the  Valuation Date or Interim

Valuation Date coincident with or immediately  preceding the Break

in Service, determined as follows:

     (a)   A  Regular Account shall be vested in  accordance  with

           the following schedule:

               YEARS OF SERVICE            VESTED PERCENTAGE
               ----------------            -----------------
                 less than 5                      0

                 5  or  more                     100

     (b)   A Rollover Account shall be fully vested at all times.

     Notwithstanding  the  above provisions of this Section 7.1, a

Participant's vested interest shall not be less than it was before

this amendment and restatement.   Also,  notwithstanding the above

vesting  schedule,  an  Employee's  right to his  or  her  Account

balance is nonforfeitable upon the attainment of Normal Retirement

Age.

7.2  Distributions.
     -------------
     (a)  If an Employee terminates service,  and the value of the

Employee's  vested  Account  balance  derived  from  Employer  and

Employee  contributions is not greater than $3,500,  the  Employee

will receive  a  distribution  of  the  value of the entire vested

portion of such Account balance and the nonvested  portion will be

treated  as  a forfeiture.  For purposes of this Section,  if  the

value  of  an Employee's  vested  Account  balance  is  zero,  the

Employee shall  be  deemed to have received a distribution of such

vested Account balance.   A  Participant's  vested Account balance

shall  not  include accumulated deductible employee  


                                 39
<PAGE>


contributions  within the meaning of Section 72(o)(5)(B) of the Code 

for Plan Years beginning prior to January 1, 1989.

     (b)   If  an  Employee  terminates  service, and  elects,  in

accordance with the requirements of this

Section 7, to receive the value of the Employee's  vested  Account

balance,  the  nonvested  portion will be treated as a forfeiture.

If the Employee elects to have  distributed  less  than the entire

vested  portion  of  the  Account  balance  derived  from Employer

contributions,  the  part  of the nonvested portion that  will  be

treated as a forfeiture is the  total nonvested portion multiplied

by  a  fraction,  the numerator of which  is  the  amount  of  the

distribution  attributable   to  Employer  contributions  and  the

denominator of which is the total  value  of  the vested Employer

derived Account balance.

     (c)   If  an  Employee  receives or is deemed  to  receive  a

distribution pursuant to this  Section  and  the  Employee resumes

employment  covered  under  this  Plan,  the Employee's  Employer

derived Account balance will be restored to the amount on the date

of distribution if the Employee repays to the Plan the full amount

of the distribution attributable to Employer  contributions before

the earlier of five (5) years after the first date  on  which  the

Participant  is  subsequently  re-employed by the Employer, or the

date the Participant incurs five  (5)  consecutive one-year Breaks

in Service following the date of the distribution.  If an Employee

is deemed to receive a distribution pursuant  to this Section, and

the Employee resumes employment covered under this Plan before the

date the Participant incurs five (5) consecutive  one-year  Breaks

in  Service, upon the reemployment of such Employee, the Employer

derived  Account  balance  of the Employee will be restored to the

amount on the date of such deemed distribution.

     In  the event restoration  is  required  under  this  Section

7.2(c), the sources of restoration, in the order listed, shall be:

           (i)  Forfeitures. To the extent used for restoration,
                they shall not be reallocated, or used to reduce the  
                Employer contribution, as normally provided in 
                Section 4.3.

           (ii) Employer contribution. Notwithstanding Section 3.1, the  
                Employer shall make any contribution required for 
                restoration.
     
                                  40
<PAGE>


     Such  restoration  shall  be  made  for  the  year  in  which

repayment  occurs  within  the  time  prescribed by law, including

extensions  of  time,  for  the filing of the  Employer's  Federal

income tax return for such year.

     For purposes of applying  the  limitations  of  Code Sections

415(c)  and  (e),  and  Section  4.8  and  4.9  of this Plan,  the

repayment  by  the  Participant and the restoration  provided  for

above shall not be treated as annual additions.

7.3  Restrictions on Immediate Distributions.
     ---------------------------------------
     (a)  If the value  of  a Participant's vested Account balance

derived from Employer and Employee  contributions  exceeds  (or at

the  time  of  any  prior  distribution  exceeded) $3,500, and the

Account balance is immediately distributable, the Participant must

consent  to any distribution of such Account  balance.   The  Plan

Administrator  shall  notify the Participant of the right to defer

any distribution until  the  Participant's  Account  balance is no

longer immediately distributable.  Such notification shall include

a general description of the material features, and an explanation

of the relative values of, the optional forms of benefit available

under  the  Plan  in  a  manner  that  would  satisfy  the  notice

requirements  of  Section 417(a)(3), and shall be provided no less

than 30 days and no  more  than  90  days  prior  to  the  annuity

starting  date.   However, distribution may commence less than  30

days after the notice  described  in  the  preceding  sentence  is

given,   provided  the  distribution  is  one  to  which  Sections

401(a)(11)   and   417   of  the  Code  do  not  apply,  the  Plan

Administrator clearly informs the Participant that the Participant

has a right to a period of  at  least  30 days after receiving the

notice  to consider the decision of whether  or  not  to  elect  a

distribution   (and,  if  applicable,  a  particular  distribution

option),  and  the   Participant,   after  receiving  the  notice,

affirmatively elects a distribution.

     (b)  The consent of the Participant  shall not be required to

the  extent  that a distribution is required  to  satisfy  Section

401(a)(9)  or  Section   415  of  the  Code.   In  addition,  upon

termination of this Plan if  the  Plan  does  not offer an annuity

option (purchased from a commercial provider) and  if the Employer

or  any  entity  within the same controlled group as the  Employer

does not maintain another defined 


                                   41
<PAGE>


contribution plan (other than an

employee stock ownership  plan as defined in Section 4975(e)(7) of

the Code), the Participant's  Account  balance  will,  without the

Participant's   consent,   be   distributed  to  the  Participant.

However, if any entity within the  same  controlled  group  as the

Employer  maintains  another defined contribution plan (other than

an employee stock ownership plan as defined in Section 4975 (e)(7)

of  the  Code) then the  Participant's  account  balance  will  be

transferred,  without the Participant's consent, to the other plan

if the Participant does not consent to an immediate distribution.

     (c)  An Account  balance  is immediately distributable if any

part  of  the  Account  balance  could   be   distributed  to  the

Participant  (or surviving spouse) before the Participant  attains

(or would have  attained  if  not  deceased)  the  later of Normal

Retirement Age or age 62.

     (d)   For  purposes of determining the applicability  of  the

foregoing consent  requirements  to  distributions made before the

first  day  of the first Plan Year beginning  after  December  31,

1988, the Participant's  vested  Account balance shall not include

amounts   attributable   to   accumulated    deductible   employee

contributions  within  the meaning of Section 72(o)(5)(B)  of  the

Code.

7.4  Payment of Account Balance.
     --------------------------
     Unless  the Participant  elects  otherwise,  distribution  of

benefits will begin no later than the 60th day after the latest of

the close of the Plan Year in which:

     (a)   the Participant attains age 65 (or Normal Retirement Age, 
           
           if earlier);

     (b)   occurs the 10th anniversary  of  the  year in which the

           Participant commenced participation in the Plan; or

     (c)   the Participant terminates service with the Employer.

Notwithstanding  the  foregoing,  the failure of a Participant  to

consent  to  a  distribution  while  a  benefit   is   immediately

distributable,  within  the  meaning  of Section 7.3 of the  Plan,

shall be deemed to be an election to defer commencement of payment

of any benefit sufficient to satisfy this Section.

7.5  Treatment of Accounts in Pay Status.
     -----------------------------------
     If payments are to be made under Section 5.1(b) or (c), at the 
     
election of the Plan Administrator:

                                  42
<PAGE>


     (a)   The  Participant's  Account shall continue to share  in

           the annual and interim valuations of the trust fund and in the

           adjustment of the accounts for investment income, gains or losses

           as provided in Sections 4.4 and 4.5; or

     (b)   The  Plan  Administrator  may  instruct the trustee  to

           segregate the Participant's Account which shall then be separately

           valued and adjusted each year to reflect the actual income derived

           thereon and any distributions made therefrom under this Plan. 
           
7.6  Direct Rollovers.
     ----------------
     (a)   This Section applies to distributions  made on or after

           January 1, 1993.  Notwithstanding any provision of the 
           
           Plan to the contrary that would otherwise limit a distributee's 
           
           election under this Section, a distributee may elect, at the 
           
           time and in the manner prescribed by the Plan Administrator, 
           
           to have any portion of an eligible rollover distribution that  
           
           is  equal to at least $500 paid directly to an eligible 
           
           retirement plan specified by the distributee in a direct 
           
           rollover.  The distributee may select only one (1) eligible 
           
           retirement plan to which a direct rollover may be made.

     (b)   Definitions

           (i)  Eligible rollover distribution:  An  eligible
                rollover distribution is any distribution of all or 
                any portion of the balance to the credit of the  
                distributee,  except  that  an eligible rollover 
                distribution does not include:  any distribution
                that is  one  of a series of substantially equal 
                periodic payments (not less frequently than annually)  
                made for the life (or life expectancy) of the 
                distributee or the joint lives  (or  joint life
                expectancies)  of the distributee and the distributee's 
                designated beneficiary, or for a specified period of 
                ten years or more; any distribution to the extent  
                such  distribution  is  required under
                Section  401(a)(9) of the Code; the portion of any  
                other distribution that is not includible in gross 
                income (determined without  regard  to the exclusion 
                for net unrealized  appreciation with  respect  to   
                employer    securities);   and   any   other
                distribution(s) that is reasonably expected to total  
                less than $200 during a year.

           (ii) Eligible  retirement plan:  An eligible retirement
                plan  is an individual retirement  account  described  
                in Section 408(a) of the Code, an individual retirement 
                annuity described in Section 408(b) of the Code, an 
                annuity plan described in Section 403(a) of the Code, or  
                a  qualified  plan  described  in  Section
                401(a)  of  the  Code,  that  accepts  the  distributee's 
                eligible rollover  distribution.  However, in the case  
                

                                 43
<PAGE>                
                
                of  an  eligible rollover  distribution  to  the  surviving  
                spouse, an  eligible retirement plan is an individual 
                retirement account or individual retirement annuity.

          (iii) Distributee:   A  distributee includes an Employee
                or former Employee.  In addition, the Employee's  
                or former Employee's surviving spouse and the Employee's   
                or former Employee's spouse or former spouse who is the 
                alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations 
                order, as defined in Section 414(p) of the Code, are 
                distributees with regard to the interest
                of the spouse or former spouse.

           (iv) Direct rollover:  A direct rollover is  a  payment
                by the Plan to the eligible retirement plan specified 
                by the distributee.

7.7  Amendment of Vesting Schedule.
     -----------------------------
     If the Plan's vesting schedule  is  amended,  or  the Plan is

amended  in  any  way  that  directly  or  indirectly  affects the

computation of the Participant's nonforfeitable percentage  or  if

the  Plan  is  deemed  amended by an automatic change to or from a

top-heavy vesting schedule,  each  Participant with at least three

(3)  Years  of  Service  with the Employer  may  elect,  within  a

reasonable period after the  adoption  of the amendment or change,

to  have  the nonforfeitable percentage computed  under  the  Plan

without regard  to such amendment or change.  For Participants who

do not have at least  one  (1)  Hour  of  Service in any Plan Year

beginning after December 31, 1988, the preceding sentence shall be

applied by substituting "five (5) Years of Service" for "three (3)

Years of Service" where such language appears.

     The  period  during  which  the election may  be  made  shall

commence with the date the amendment  is  adopted  or deemed to be

made and shall end on the latest of:

     (a)   60 days after the amendment is adopted;

     (b)   60 days after the amendment becomes effective; or

     (c)   60 days after the Participant is issued written  notice

           of the amendment by the Employer or Plan Administrator.


                                   44
<PAGE>                              
                              

                                   SECTION 8

                              FORM OF DISTRIBUTION

     8.1   Payment in Shares or Cash.
           -------------------------
           Any distributions under Sections 5, 6, and 7 shall be made by the

     Trustee by distributing whole shares of Company Stock, as determined by

     the  Trustee,  at  the  market  value  of  such shares  on  a  national

     securities exchange or a national quotation  system,  with the value of

     any fractional shares paid in cash.

           The Trustee may, with the consent of the Participant or if the

     Participant  is  deceased,  his beneficiary, make  distributions  under

     Sections 5, 6 and 7 in cash.  The amount of cash to be distributed to a

     Participant for shares actually  allocated  to  his  Account  shall  be

     determined  based on the market value of the shares of Company Stock as

     of the trading date immediately preceding the distribution.

     8.2   Dividends.
           ---------
           Cash dividends on shares of Company Stock allocated to Participants'

     Accounts may be paid to Participants  currently,  or  at  such  time as

     payment  is otherwise due under Sections 5, 6, and 7, as determined  in

     the sole discretion  of  the Plan Administrator, exercised in a uniform

     and nondiscriminatory manner.

                                   45
                                    
    <PAGE>
                                   SECTION 9

                            MERGER OR CONSOLIDATION

     9.1   Merger or Consolidation.
           -----------------------
           In the event of a merger or consolidation of this Plan with any 
           
     other plan, or in the event of a transfer of assets or liabilities of this

     Plan  to  any  other plan, each Participant in the Plan will receive  a

     benefit immediately after the merger, consolidation, or transfer (as if

     the Plan then terminated)  which  is  at least equal to the benefit the

     Participant would have been entitled to immediately before such merger,

     consolidation, or transfer (as if the Plan had then terminated).

     9.2   Merger Accounts.
           ---------------
           In the event any other plan transfers its assets to this Plan or 
           
     merges with this Plan, this Plan being the surviving  plan, the  Plan

     Administrator, or if the Plan Administrator so determines, the Trustee,

     shall create a "Merger Account" for each Participant whose accounts are

     transferred to this Plan.  A Participant's Merger Account shall be paid

     to the Participant or his beneficiaries in accordance with  Sections 5,

     6,  7  and  8.   Merger Accounts shall participate in the earnings  and

     losses in the fund and in forfeitures and Employer contributions in the

     same manner as Regular Accounts.

     9.3   Merger Agreement or Agreement Relating to Transfer of Assets.
           ------------------------------------------------------------
           Upon instructions of the Plan Administrator, the Trustee shall enter

     into a merger agreement with  any  other  plan  or  shall enter into an

     agreement  respecting  the transfer of assets of this Plan  to  another

     plan or from any other plan  to  this  Plan; however, if this Plan is a

     profit-sharing plan which does not provide  for  a life annuity form of

     payment to Participants, the Plan Administrator shall  not  enter  into

     any agreement for the transfer of assets from another plan to this Plan

     if  the  proposed  transferor  plan  is  a  defined benefit plan, money

     purchase pension plan (including a target benefit  plan),  stock bonus,

     or profit sharing plan which would otherwise provide for a life annuity

     form of payment to the participants in such plan.

                                   46      
     <PAGE>

                                   SECTION 10

                                CLAIMS PROCEDURE

     10.1  Filing of a Claim for Benefits.
           ------------------------------
           (a)  Every Participant and beneficiary (the claimant) who thinks  
           
     he is entitled to a benefit under the Plan or who is not satisfied that 
     
     the correct benefit is being paid shall have the right to file a claim 
     
     for such benefit at any time.

           (b)  Such claim must be filed in writing with the Plan 
           
     Administrator. The claim shall set forth the grounds on which it is 
     
     based, but no particular form of written claim is required.

     10.2  Notification to Claimant of Decision.
           ------------------------------------
           (a) The Plan Administrator shall furnish notice of its decision  
           
     (to grant the claim or to deny it in whole or in part) to the claimant

     within  sixty  (60)  days  after the  claim  is  filed.   If  the  Plan

     Administrator fails to give  notice  within  sixty  (60) days after the

     claim is filed, it shall be considered wholly denied.

           (b) If the claim is denied in whole or in part, the notice of denial
     
     by the Plan Administrator to the claimant shall set forth in writing in

     a manner calculated to be understood by the claimant:

               (i)   The specific reason or reasons for the denial;

               (ii)  Specific reference to pertinent plan provisions on 
                     which the denial is based;

               (iii) A description of any additional material or 
                     information necessary for the claimant to perfect the 
                     claim and an explanation of why such material or 
                     information is necessary; and
               (iv)  An explanation of the Plan's claim review procedure as 
                     set forth in Section 10.3.

     10.3  Review Procedure.
           ----------------
           (a)   A claimant may appeal the denial of a claim, including a claim

     considered denied, to the Plan Administrator for a full and fair review

     of the claim.

                                 47
 <PAGE>

           (b)  A request for review of a denied claim must be made in writing 
           
     to the Plan Administrator within sixty (60) days after the date of the

     notice denying the claim or within sixty (60) days after the date on

     which the claim is considered denied.

           (c)   The claimant or his authorized representative shall have the

     right, during  the  review procedure, to review all pertinent documents

     and to submit issues and comments in writing to the Plan Administrator.

     10.4  Decision on Review.
           ------------------
           (a)   A decision on review shall be made promptly by the Plan

     Administrator and not later  than sixty (60) days after it receives the

     request for review.

           (b)  The decision on review shall be in writing and shall include

     specific reasons for the decision, written in a manner calculated to be

     understood  by  the  claimant and specific references to pertinent Plan

     provisions on which the decision is based.

     10.5  Agent for Service of Process.
           ----------------------------
           In any action against the Plan or Trust, the Plan Administrator, 
     
     whose address is 100 Century Park  Drive, Monroe, Louisiana 71203, shall 
     
     be the agent for service of process of the Plan and Trust.

                                   48
<PAGE>

                                 SECTION 11

                          ADOPTION BY OTHER COMPANIES

     11.1  Rights of Other Companies to Participate.
           ----------------------------------------
           Any other corporation, association, joint venture, proprietorship  
           
     or partnership (hereinafter called adopting companies) may adopt the 
     
     terms of this Plan  by a resolution of the Board of Directors of such 
     
     entity in the form specified  by  the  Plan  Administrator,  provided 
     
     that the Board of Directors of the Employer and the Plan Administrator  
     
     both approve such participation.   Unless  otherwise provided in the 
     
     Plan or in a separate written agreement, all subsidiaries of the Employer 
     
     shall be deemed to be adopting companies participating  in the Plan.  
     
     A newly formed subsidiary, or a subsidiary acquired by the  Employer,  
     
     shall be deemed to be an adopting company as of the date of formation or

     acquisition, as the case may be, unless otherwise  provided in the Plan

     or in a separate written agreement.

     11.2  Control of Plan by the Employer.
           -------------------------------
           The administrative powers and control of the Employer as provided  
           
     in the  Plan, shall not be deemed diminished under the Plan by reason 
     
     of participation  of  adopting companies in the Plan, and such

     administrative  powers  and  control specifically granted herein to the

     Employer with respect to the appointment  of the Plan Administrator and

     Trustee  and  other  matters  shall  apply only  with  respect  to  the

     Employer.  The Plan Administrator, under  the  control of the Employer,

     shall also be the Plan Administrator for the adopting companies.

     11.3  Allocations of Contributions and Forfeitures.
           --------------------------------------------
           The amounts forfeited by Employees of the Employer and adopting

     companies shall be allocated across company lines  in  accordance  with

     the  provisions  of  Sections  4.3  hereof to all Participants who were

     Employees of the Employer and applicable  adopting companies during the

     Plan Year in which such forfeitures occurred and the contributions made

     by  the Employer and each adopting company shall  be  allocated  across

     company  lines  in accordance with the provisions of Section 4.2 hereof

     to Participants who  were  Employees  of  the  Employer  and applicable

     adopting companies during the Plan Year for which 
     
                                49
<PAGE>     
     
     each contribution  is

     made.   One  member  of  an  affiliated group may make contributions on

     behalf of another member of such  group  in accordance with Regulations

     Section 1.404(a)-10, as amended.

     11.4  Withdrawal of Employer or Adopting Companies.
           --------------------------------------------
           The Employer or adopting company may withdraw at any time without

     affecting the others in the Plan.  Such withdrawal may be accompanied

     by such amendments to the Plan  as the withdrawing Employer or adopting

     company shall deem proper to continue a plan for its Employees separate

     and distinct from this Plan, but,  if  such  withdrawing party does not

     provide for the continuance of a separate plan  for its Employees, such

     withdrawal shall constitute a termination of this  Plan with respect to

     that  withdrawing  party.  The Employer may in its absolute  discretion

     terminate any adopting company's participation at any time.  Withdrawal

     from the Plan by any  party shall not affect the continued operation of

     the Plan with respect to the other participating parties.

     11.5  Amendment of Plan.
           -----------------
           The participation in the Plan of adopting companies shall not 
           
     limit the power of the Employer under Trust Section 4.1; provided, 
     
     however, that the Employer shall deliver notice of each amendment to 
     
     the Plan to each  adopting company within thirty (30) days of such 
     
     amendment.  Amendments by the Employer shall be binding upon all 
     
     adopting  companies to the extent accepted by such adopting companies.  
     
     Acceptance  by  each  such company  shall  be  presumed  unless the 
     
     Employer and Trustee are given written notice of refusal to accept  
     
     within  sixty  (60) days after the date of the amendment.  The Employer 
     
     and each adopting  company  may modify the provisions of the Plan as it  
     
     pertains  only to its own Employees  by the adoption of an amendment to 
     
     the Plan specifying  such modifications  which  shall pertain only to 
     
     its Employees except to the extent that Employer amendments  are  
     
     presumed accepted by the adopting  companies, and shall not affect 
     
     the continued  operation  of  the  Plan with respect to any other party.

                                 50
<PAGE>

     11.6  Termination of One or More Parties.
           ----------------------------------
           The  Plan  may  be  terminated by all parties at any time in the 
           
     manner described in Trust Section  4.2,  on  the part of each party.  
     
     The Plan may be terminated in the manner described  above  with respect 
     
     to one, but less than all the parties hereto and the Plan continued for  
     
     the remaining parties.

     11.7  Reference to Employer in Plan.
           -----------------------------
           Except as provided in this Section 11 and unless the context 
           
     indicates otherwise, references to "Employer" in this Plan shall mean  
     
     the Employer and all adopting companies.

                                 51
<PAGE>

                                SECTION 12

                       PROVISIONS RELATING TO PARTICIPANTS

     12.1  Information Required of Participants.
           ------------------------------------
           Each Participant shall furnish to the Plan Administrator such

     information as the Plan  Administrator shall deem necessary  and

     desirable for purposes of administering the Plan.

           Any notice or information which, according to the provisions of 
           
     the Plan, must be filed with the Plan Administrator shall be deemed so
     
     filed if addressed  to 100 Century Park Drive, Monroe, Louisiana 71203,

     and either delivered in person or mailed to such address, postage fully

     paid.
 
                                  52 
 <PAGE>
 
                                   SECTION 13

                               PLAN ADMINISTRATOR

     13.1  Administration by Plan Administrator.
           ------------------------------------
           This Plan shall be administered by a Committee, which shall be 
           
     the "Plan Administrator" and "named fiduciary."

     13.2  Appointment of Committee.
           ------------------------
           The Board of Directors of the Employer shall fix the number of
           
     persons to be members of the Committee (which number shall always be 
     
     an odd number) and shall appoint persons from among the officers and 
     
     Employees of the Employer to  serve  as  members of the Committee.  
     
     The Committee   shall have complete control of the administration 
     
     of the Plan.  Members of the Committee shall serve without  
     
     remuneration for so long as it is  mutually  agreeable  to  them 
     
     and to the Employer  but  they  shall  be  reimbursed for all 
     
     expenses  incurred  by  them  in  the performance of

     their  duties.   Any  member  may  resign  by  delivering  his  written

     resignation to the Employer and to the other members of the  committee.

     The Board of Directors of the Employer may remove or replace any member

     of  the  Committee,  or  fill  any  vacancy, no matter how created,  by

     notifying the member concerned and the  other  members of the Committee

     in writing.

     13.3  Majority Action.
           ---------------
           Action taken by a majority of the members of the Committee shall,  
           
     to the extent lawful, be binding upon the Employees, Participants, 
     
     and all persons  claiming  any  right  under  the  Plan through 
     
     any Employee or Participant.   The Committee may act by vote, at 
     
     a meeting, or in writing, without a meeting. Any act of the Committee  
     
     shall be  sufficiently evidenced if certified to by any two members 
     
     thereof or by any person not a member of the Committee but who is 
     
     designated, in writing, as the Secretary of the Committee by a 
     
     majority  thereof.  A member of the Committee who is  a Participant 
     
     shall not vote on any question relating specifically to himself, and  
     
     in the event the remaining members of the 
     
                                 53
<PAGE>     
     
     Committee  are  unable to 
     
     agree to a determination of such question, another person shall be 
     
     selected by the Board of Directors of the Employer for the purpose of  
     
     making  such determination.

     13.4  Powers of the Plan Administrator.
           --------------------------------
           The Committee as Plan Administrator shall have the following 
           
     powers:

           (a) To make rules and regulations  for  the  administration  
           
               of the Plan which are not inconsistent with the terms 
               
               and provisions hereof;

           (b) To  construe  all  terms, provisions, conditions and 
           
               limitations  of this Plan;

           (c) To correct any defect  or  supply  any  omission  or  
           
               reconcile  any  inconsistency  that  may appear in the Plan, 
               
               in such manner and to such extent as it shall deem  expedient  
               
               to  carry this Plan into effect for the greatest benefit 
               
               of all interested parties;

           (d) To select, employ and compensate from time to time such 
           
               consultants, actuaries, accounts, attorneys, and other  
               
               agents  and Employees as the Plan Administrator may deem 
               
               necessary or advisable in the proper and efficient 
               
               administration   of  this  Plan  and  Trust  to  carry  out
               
               nonfiduciary  and  fiduciary  responsibilities (other than  
               
               trustee responsibilities as defined in Section 405(c)(3) 
               
               of ERISA);

           (e) To determine all questions relating to the eligibility of  
           
               Employees to become Participants, and to determine the amount 
               
               of compensation upon which the allocation of each Participant 
               
               shall be calculated;

           (f) To make all determination and  computations concerning the 
           
               benefits, credits and debits to which any Participant or 
               
               beneficiary is entitled under the Plan;

           (g) To determine all questions relating to the administration of  
           
               this Plan and Trust (1) when differences of opinion arise 
               
               between the Employer, the Trustee, a Participant, or any of  
               
               them, and (2) whenever it is deemed advisable to determine 
               
               such questions in order to promote the uniform administration 
               
               of the Plan for the greatest benefit of all parties concerned;

                                 54
<PAGE>

           (h) To appoint any Employee of the Employer to act as secretary  
           
               for the Plan Administrator, and to authorize the secretary 
               
               so appointed to act for  the  Plan  Administrator in all 
               
               routine matters connected with the administration of the Plan;

           (i) To determine whether a Participant is disabled for the purposes 
           
               of Section 6.5 hereof;

           (j) To appoint an investment manager  or managers (as defined in 
           
               Section 3(38) of ERISA) to manage (including the  power to 
               
               acquire and dispose of) all or any part of the assets of 
               
               the Plan; and

           (k) To provide for the allocation of fiduciary responsibilities  
           
               (other than trustee  responsibilities  as  defined  in  Section  
               
               405(c)(3) of ERISA). Actions dealing with fiduciary 
               
               responsibilities shall be taken in writing and the performance 
               
               of agents, counsel, and fiduciaries to whom fiduciary  
               
               responsibilities  have been delegated shall be reviewed

               periodically.

           The foregoing list of express powers is not intended to be either

     complete  or conclusive, but the Plan Administrator shall, in addition,

     have such powers  as it may reasonably determine to be necessary to the

     performance of its  duties  under  the Plan and Trust.  The decision or

     judgment  of  the  Plan  Administrator  on   any  question  arising  in

     connection with the exercise of any of its powers or any matter of Plan

     administration,  or  the  determination of benefits,  shall  be  final,

     binding and conclusive upon all parties concerned.

     13.5  Duties of the Plan Administrator.
           --------------------------------
           The Committee as Plan Administrator shall, as a part of its general

     duty to supervise and administer the Plan:

           (a)  Establish and maintain the Accounts described herein  
           
                and direct the maintenance of such other records and the 
                
                preparation of such forms as are required for the 
                
                efficient administration of the Plan;

           (b)  Give the Trustee specific directions in writing in respect to:

                                   55 
 <PAGE>

                (i)  The making of distribution payments, giving the names 
                     of the payees, the amounts to be paid and the time or 
                     times when payments shall be made; and

                (ii) The making of any other payments which the Trustee is 
                     not by the terms of the trust agreement authorized to  
                     make without a direction in writing by the Plan 
                     Administrator; and 
                     
           (c)  Prepare an annual report, as of the end of the Plan Year.

     13.6  Expenses.
           --------
           The Employer shall reimburse the trust fund for all expenses  
           
     (other than normal  brokerage  charges  which  are  included  in  the  
     
     cost of securities  purchased  or  charged  to  proceeds  in the case of 
     
     sales) incurred  in  the administration of the Plan under Trust  Section  
     
     1.5, including the expenses and fees of the Trustee, except that any such

     expenses not so reimbursed by the Employer shall be paid from the trust
     
     fund.

                                 56    
<PAGE>
                                   
                                   SECTION 14

                                   ROLLOVERS

     14.1  Rollover Contributions.
           ----------------------
           If the Plan Administrator instructs  the  Trustee  in writing to 
           
     accept Rollover Contributions, any Employee who is a Participant or  
     
     who will become a Participant if he completes a Year of Service in an

     Eligibility  Computation Period may make a Rollover Contribution at any

     time.  The Trustee  shall  credit the fair market value of any Rollover

     Contribution to a Rollover Account  of  the contributing Participant as

     of  the date the Rollover Contribution is  made.   A  Rollover  Account

     shall  be  fully  vested  and  shall  be paid to the Participant or his

     beneficiaries in accordance with Section  5,  6,  7  and  8.   Rollover

     Accounts  shall  participate  in  the  earnings and losses of the Trust

     Fund, but not in forfeitures or Employer contributions.

     14.2  Definition of Rollover Contribution.
           -----------------------------------
           The term Rollover Contribution is defined as the contribution of  
     
     a Rollover Amount as defined in Section 14.3 to the Trustee on or before

     the sixtieth  (60th) day immediately following the day the contributing

     Participant receives the Rollover Amount.

     14.3  Definition of Rollover Amount.
           -----------------------------
           The term Rollover Amount is defined as:

           (a)  The amount distributed to the Participant is deposited to 
           
                the Plan no later than the sixtieth day after such 
                
                distribution was received by the Participant.

           (b)  the amount distributed is not one of a series of substantially 
             
                equal periodic  payments  made  for  the life (or  life  
                
                expectancy) of the Participant or the joint lives (or joint 
                
                life expectancies) of the Participant and the Participant's  
                
                designated  beneficiary, or for a specified period of ten 
                
                years or more:

           (c)  the amount distributed is not required under Code Section 
           
                401(a)(9);

                                 57
<PAGE>

     
           (d)  if the amount distributed included property such property 
           
                is rolled over, or if sold the proceeds of such property 
                
                may be rolled over;

           (e)  the amount distributed is includible in gross income  
           
                (determined without regard to the exclusion  for  net  
                
                unrealized appreciation with respect to employer securities).

     In  addition,  if the Plan Administrator so instructs  the  Trustee  in

     writing, the Plan  will  also accept any eligible rollover distribution

     (as defined in Section 7.6) directly to the Plan.

           Rollover Amounts, which relate to distributions prior to January 1,

     1993,  must be made in accordance with paragraphs (a) through (e) and

     additionally meet the requirements of paragraph (f):

     (f)   The distribution from the qualified plan constituted the

           Participant's  entire interest in such Plan and was distributed  
           
           within one taxable year to the Participant:

           (i)  on account of separation from Service, a Plan termination, 
                or in the case of a profit-sharing or stock bonus plan, a 
                complete discontinuance of contributions under such plan  
                within the meaning of Code Section  402(a)(6)(A), or

           (ii) in one or more distibutions which constitute a qualified 
                lump sum distribution within the meaning of Code Section  
                402(e)(4)(A), determined without reference to subparagraphs 
                (B) and (H).

     14.4  Conduit Rollovers.
           -----------------
           Rollover Contribution may also be made through an individual 
           
     retirement account (IRA) qualified under Code Section 408 where the IRA 
     
     was used as a conduit from a qualified plan, the Rollover Contribution  
     
     is made in accordance with the rules provided under paragraphs (a) 
     
     through (e) and the Rollover Contribution does not include any regular  
     
     IRA contributions, or earnings thereon, which the Participant may have 
     
     made to the IRA. Rollover Contributions, which relate to distributions

     prior to January 1, 1993, may be made through an IRA in accordance with

     paragraphs (a) through (f) and additional requirements  as  provided in

     the  previous sentence.  The Trustee shall not be held responsible  for

     determining  the taxfree status of any Rollover Contribution made under

     this Plan.

                                  58
<PAGE>

                                   SECTION 15

                   TRADES OR BUSINESSES UNDER COMMON CONTROL

     15.1  Definitions.
           -----------
           All employees of all corporations which are members of a controlled
           
     groups of corporations (as defined in Section  414(b)  of the Code) and

     all employees of all trades or businesses (whether or not incorporated)

     which  are  under common control (as defined in Section 414(c)  of  the

     Code) will be treated as employed by a single employer.

           Such other trades or businesses in a group with the Employer are

     hereinafter  called "Associated Employer."  The  term  "transferred

     participant" means an Employee of the Employer who was a Participant in

     this Plan and who  is  employed  by  an  Associated  Employer after his

     services with the Employer are terminated.

           In addition to the foregoing, Hours of Service will also be credited

     for any  individual required under Section 414(m) or 414(n) of the Code

     to be considered  an  employee of any employer aggregated under Section

     414(b), (c), or (m) or the Code.

           Any Leased Employee as defined in Section 1.17(a), excluding any 
           
     Leased Employee described in Section  1.17(b), shall be treated as an 
     
     employee of the recipient employer.

     15.2  Allocation.
           ----------
           No Employee shall be credited with any compensation for a year 
           
     under Section 4.2 of this Plan except with respect to compensation 
     
     actually paid to him by the Employer or accrued by the Employer with 
     
     respect to him.

     15.3  Participation and Vesting.
           -------------------------
           All of an Employee's service with an Associated Employer shall 
           
     be counted as service with the Employer for all purposes of this Plan,

     except as otherwise provided  in  the  Plan  or  in  a separate written

     agreement.

                                 59
     <PAGE>


     15.4  Vesting and Distributions.
           -------------------------
           In determining whether a transferred participant incurs a Break in

     Service under this  Plan,  his  service  with  the  Employer  shall  be

     combined  with his service with an Associated Employer.  In determining

     whether  a transferred  participant  subsequently  incurs  a  Break  in

     Service with  the  Employer  for vesting and distribution purposes, his

     Hours of Service with Associated Employers shall be counted.

                                60    
<PAGE>

                                   SECTION 16

                              TOP HEAVY PLAN RULES

     16.1  Key Employee.
           ------------
           Any Employee or former Employee (and the beneficiaries of such

     Employee)  who  at any time during  the  determination  period  was  an

     officer  of  the Employer  if  such  individual's  annual  compensation

     exceeds fifty  percent  (50%)  of  the  dollar limitation under Section

     415(b)(1)(A)  of  the  Code,  an owner (or considered  an  owner  under

     Section 318 of the Code) of one  of  the  ten  largest interests in the

     Employer if such individual's compensation exceeds  one hundred percent

     (100%) of the dollar limitation under Section 415(c)(1)(A) of the Code,

     a five percent (5%) owner of the Employer, or a one percent  (1%) owner

     of  the  Employer who has an annual compensation of more than $150,000.

     Annual compensation  means compensation as defined in Section 415(c)(3)

     of the Code, but including amounts contributed by the Employer pursuant

     to  a  salary  reduction   agreement  which  are  excludable  from  the

     Employee's gross income under  Section  125, Section 402(e)(3), Section

     402(h)(1)(B) or Section 403(b) of the Code.   The  determination period

     is  the Plan Year containing the determination date and  the  four  (4)

     preceding Plan Years.

           The determination of who is a Key Employee will be made in 
           
     accordance with Section 416(i)(1) of the Code and the regulations 
     
     thereunder.

     16.2  Non-Key Employee.
           ----------------
           Any Employee who is not a Key Employee.

     16.3  Super Top Heavy Plan.
           --------------------
           For any Plan Year beginning after December 31, 1983,this Plan is a

     Super Top Heavy Plan if any of the following conditions exists:

           (a)  If the top heavy ratio for this Plan exceeds ninety percent 
                
                (90%) and this Plan is not part of any required aggregation 
                
                group or permissive aggregation group of plans.

                                61
<PAGE>


           (b)  If this Plan is a part of a required aggregation group of 
           
                plans but not part of a permissive aggregation group and the 
                
                top heavy ratio for the group of plans exceeds ninety percent 
                
                (90%).

           (c)  If this Plan is a part of a required aggregation group and 
           
                part of a permissive aggregation group of plans and the top 
                
                heavy ratio for the permissive aggregation group exceeds 
                
                ninety percent (90%).

     16.4  Top Heavy Plan.
           --------------
           For any Plan Year beginning after December 31, 1983, this Plan is 
           
     a Top Heavy Plan if any of the following conditions exists:

           (a)  If the top heavy ratio for this Plan exceeds sixty percent 
           
                (60%) and this Plan is not part of any required aggregation 
                
                group or permissive aggregation group of plans.

           (b)  If this Plan is a part of a required aggregation group of 
           
                plans but not part of a permissive aggregation group and 
                
                the top heavy ratio for the group of plans exceeds sixty 
                
                percent (60%).

           (c)  If this Plan is a part of a required aggregation group and 
           
                part of a permissive aggregation group of plans and the top 
                
                heavy ratio for the permissive aggregation group exceeds 
                
                sixty percent (60%).

     16.5  Top Heavy Ratio.
           ---------------
          (a) If the Employer maintains one or more defined contribution 
          
     plans (including any Simplified Employee Pension Plan) and the 
     
     Employer has not maintained any defined benefit plan which during the 
     
     five (5) year period ending on the determination date(s) has or had 
     
     accrued benefits, the top heavy ratio for this Plan alone or for the  
     
     required or permissive aggregation group as appropriate is a fraction,  
     
     the numerator of which is the sum of the account balances of all Key

     Employees as of the determination date(s) (including any part of any

     account balance distributed in the five (5) year period ending on the

     determination date(s)), and the denominator of which is the sum of all

     Account balances (including any 
     
                                 62
<PAGE>

     part of any Account balance distributed

     in the five (5) year period ending on the determination date(s)), both

     computed in accordance with Section 416 of the Code and the regulations

     thereunder.  Both the numerator and denominator of the top heavy ratio

     are adjusted to reflect any contribution  not actually made as of the

     determination date, but which is required to  be  taken into account on

     that date under Section 416 of the Code and the regulations thereunder.

           (b)  If the Employer maintains one or more defined contribution  
     
     plans (including any Simplified Employee Pension Plan) and the Employer

     maintains or has maintained one or more defined benefit plans which

     during the five (5) year period ending on the determination date(s)

     has or has had any accrued benefits, the top heavy ratio for any

     required or permissive aggregation group as appropriate is a fraction,

     the numerator of which is the sum of account balances under the

     aggregated  defined contribution plan or plans for all  Key  Employees,

     determined in accordance with (a) above, and the present value of

     accrued benefits under the aggregated defined benefit plan or plans for

     all Key Employees as of the determination date(s), and  the denominator

     of  which  is  the  sum  of  the  account balances under the aggregated

     defined contribution plan or plans  for  all Participants determined in

     accordance with (a) above, and the present  value  of  accrued benefits

     under the defined benefit plan or plans for all Participants  as of the

     determination date(s), all determined in accordance with Section 416 of

     the Code and the regulations thereunder.  The accrued benefits  under a

     defined  benefit plan in both the numerator and denominator of the  top

     heavy ratio  are  increased  for any distribution of an accrued benefit

     made in the five (5) year  period ending on the determination date.

           (c)  For purposes of (a) and (b) above, the value of account 
           
     balances and the present value of accrued benefits will be determined as 
     
     of the most recent valuation date that falls within or ends with the 
     
     twelve (12) month period ending on the determination date, except as 
     
     provided in Section 416 of the Code and the regulations thereunder for 
     
     the first and second plan years of a defined benefit plan. The account 
     
     balances and accrued benefits of a Participant (1) who is not a Key 
     
     Employee but who was a Key Employee in a prior year, or (2) who has 
     
     not been credited with at least one Hour of Service with any 
     
                                 63
<PAGE>     


     employer

     maintaining the Plan at any time during the five (5) year period ending

     on the determination  date will be disregarded.  The calculation of the

     top heavy ratio, and to  the  extent to which distributions, rollovers,

     and transfers are taken into account  will  be  made in accordance with

     Section  416  of  the Code and the regulations thereunder.   Deductible

     employee contributions  will  not be taken into account for purposes of

     computing the top heavy ratio.   When  aggregating  plans  the value of

     account balances and accrued benefits will be calculated with reference

     to the determination dates that fall within the same calendar year.

           The accrued benefit of a Participant other than a Key Employee 
           
     shall be determined under (a) the method, if any, that uniformly applies  
     
     for accrual purposes under all defined benefit plans maintained  by the

     Employer, or (b) if there is no such method, as if such benefit accrued

     not  more  rapidly  than  the  slowest accrual rate permitted under the

     fractional rule of Section 411(b)(1)(C) of the Code.

     16.6  Top Heavy Plan Year.
           -------------------
           For a particular Plan Year commencing after December 31, 1983, 
           
     the Plan is a Top Heavy Plan.

     16.7  Top Heavy Compensation.
           ----------------------
           For any Top Heavy Plan Year, compensation as defined in Code 
           
     Section 415(c)(3) and Regs. Section 1.415-2(d), not in excess of $200,000  
     
     (or such other amounts as the Secretary of Treasury or his delegate may

     designate), which shall be  considered as compensation for all purposes

     of Section 16 of this Plan.

     16.8  Determination Date.
           ------------------
           The last day of the preceding Plan Year, or, in the case of the 
     
     first Plan Year, the last day of such Plan Year.

     16.9  Valuation Date.
           --------------
           The last day of the Plan Year, on which Account balances or accrued
     
     benefits are valued for purposes of calculating the Top Heavy Ratio.

                                 64
<PAGE>

     16.10  Aggregation Group.
            -----------------
            Either a Required Aggregation Group or a Permissive Aggregation 
            
     Group as hereinafter determined.

           (a) Required Aggregation Group: (i) Each qualified plan  of the

     Employer   in   which   at  least  one  Key  Employee  participates  or

     participated at any time during the determination period (regardless of

     whether the Plan has terminated),  and (ii) any other qualified plan of

     the  Employer  which  enables  a plan described  in  (i)  to  meet  the

     requirements of Sections 401(a)(4) or 410 of the Code.

           In the case of a Required Aggregation Group, each plan in the group

     will  be considered a Top Heavy Plan if the Required Aggregation  Group

     is a Top  Heavy  Group.  No plan in the Required Aggregation Group will

     be considered a Top Heavy Plan if the Required Aggregation Group is not

     a Top Heavy Group.

           (b)  Permissive Aggregation Group: The required aggregation group 
           
     of plans plus any other plan or plans of the Employer  which,  when

     considered  as  a  group  with the required  aggregation  group,  would

     continue to satisfy the requirements  of  Sections 401(a)(4) and 410 of

     the Code.

           In the case of a Permissive Aggregation Group, only a plan that is 
           
     part of the Required Aggregation Group will be considered a Top Heavy 
     
     Plan if the Permissive Aggregation Group is a Top Heavy Group. No plan in

     the Permissive Aggregation Group will be considered a Top Heavy Plan if

     the Permissive Aggregation Group is not a Top Heavy Group.

     16.11 Present Value of Accrued Benefits.
           ---------------------------------
           The present value of an accrued benefit under a defined benefit 
           
     plan shall be based on the interest and mortality rates specified in 
     
     such defined benefit plan.

                             TOP HEAVY REQUIREMENTS

     16.12 Top Heavy Plan Requirements.
           ---------------------------
           If the Plan is or becomes top heavy in any Plan Year beginning after

     December 31, 1983, the provisions of this Section 16 will supersede any

     conflicting provisions in the Plan.

                                  65
<PAGE>     
     
     16.13 Top Heavy Reduction.
           -------------------
           (a) In Section 4.9(a), 1.0 shall be substituted for 1.25  unless  
           
     the extra minimum allocation is being made pursuant to Section 16.14.

     However, for any Plan Year in which this Plan is  a  Super  Top  Heavy

     Plan, 1.0 shall be substituted for 1.25 in any event.

           (b) $41,500 shall be substituted for $51,875 in determining the

     "transition fraction" of Section 4.9(b).

     16.14 Minimum Allocations.
           -------------------
          (a)  Except as otherwise provided in (c) and (d) below, the 
          
     Employer contributions and forfeitures allocated on behalf of any 
     
     Participant who is not a Key Employee shall not be less than the 
     
     lesser of three  percent of such Participant's compensation or 
     
     in  the  case  where  the Employer  has  no  defined  benefit  plan 
     
     which designates this Plan to satisfy  Section 401 of the Code, the 
     
     largest  percentage  of  Employer contributions  and  forfeitures,  
     
     as a percentage of the Key Employee's compensation, as limited by 
     
     Section  401(a)(17)  of the Code, allocated  on behalf of 
     
     any Key Employee for that year.  The minimum allocation is determined  
     
     without  regard to any Social Security contribution.   This

     minimum  allocation  shall  be  made  even  though,  under  other  Plan

     provisions, the Participant  would not otherwise be entitled to receive

     an allocation, or would have received  a lesser allocation for the year

     because of (i) the Participant's failure  to  complete  1,000  Hours of

     Service  (or  any  equivalent  provided  in  the  Plan),  or  (ii)  the

     Participant's  failure  to make mandatory employee contributions to the

     Plan, or (iii) compensation less than a stated amount.

           (b)  For purposes of computing the minimum allocation, compensation

     will mean compensation as defined in Section 1.7 of the Plan.

           (c)  The provision in (a) above shall not apply to any Participant  
           
     who was not employed by the Employer on the last day of the Plan Year.

                                 66      
<PAGE>

           (d)  The  provision in (a) above shall not apply to any Participant 
           
     to the extent the Participant is covered under any other plan or plans of

     the Employer and  the  Employer has elected that the minimum allocation

     or benefit requirement applicable to top heavy plans will be met in the

     other plan or plans.

           (e)  The minimum allocation required (to the extent required to be
           
     nonforfeitable under Section 416(b) of the Code) may not be forfeited

     under Section 411(a)(3)(B) or 411(a)(3)(D) of the Code.

     16.15  Top Heavy Vesting.
            -----------------
           For any Plan Year in which this Plan is top-heavy, the following

     vesting schedule will automatically apply to the Plan, but  only if the

     application of such schedule results in a higher vested percentage  for

     the Participant:

               YEARS OF SERVICE              VESTED PERCENTAGE
               ----------------              -----------------
                     2                               20%
                     3                               40%
                     4                               60%
                     5                               80%
                     6                              100%

     The minimum vesting schedule applies to all benefits within the meaning

     of  Section 411(a)(7) of the Code except those attributable to employee

     contributions,  including benefits accrued before the effective date of

     Section 416 of the  Code  and  benefits  accrued before the Plan became

     top-heavy.   Further,  no  decrease  in a Participant's  nonforfeitable

     percentage  may  occur  in the event the  Plan's  status  as  top-heavy

     changes for any Plan Year.  However, this Section does not apply to the

     Account balance of any Employee  who  does  not have an Hour of Service

     after  the  Plan  has initially become top-heavy  and  such  Employee's

     Account balance attributable  to Employer contributions and forfeitures

     will be determined without regard to this Section.

     16.16 Minimum Required Distribution.
           -----------------------------
           A Key Employee's benefits shall be distributed to him or begin 
           
     to be distributed to him under Section 5 no later than the taxable year  in

     which he attains age 70 1/2 regardless of when he retires.

                                 67
<PAGE>


     16.17 Alternative Effective Date.
           --------------------------
           Notwithstanding any other provision of this Plan and Trust, the

     effective  date otherwise provided for the application of this  Section

     16  shall be  extended  in  accordance  with  any  legislative  act  of

     Congress.

                                 68
<PAGE>

                               SECTION 17

                           PAYSOP PROVISIONS

     17.1  Nature of the Plan.
           ------------------
           (a) This Tax Credit Employee Stock Ownership Plan ("PAYSOP") is an

     addition to the Stock Bonus Plan established by the Employer.  The

     PAYSOP forms a part of a Stock Bonus Plan under Section 401(a) of the

     Internal Revenue Code and is a Tax Credit Employee Stock Ownership Plan

     under  Section  409  of  the  Code.   The  PAYSOP  is  intended to make

     available  to  the  Company the payroll-based employee stock  ownership

     credit described in Section  41  of  the  Code  and  is  designed to be

     invested primarily (or exclusively) in Company Stock.

           (b) The PAYSOP has been and will be funded through the Trust

     established under the Stock Bonus Plan and is administered by the  Plan

     Administrator  described  in  Section  13 of the Stock Bonus Plan.  The

     interests  of  Participants  under the PAYSOP  shall  be  reflected  by

     separate Tax Credit Accounts under  the  Trust.   Except  as  otherwise

     provided  in this PAYSOP, the provisions of the Stock Bonus Plan  shall

     generally apply to the PAYSOP.

     17.2  Definitions.
           -----------
           Except to the extent that they are inconsistent with this Section 
           
     17, all of the definitions included in Section 1 of the Stock Bonus Plan

     shall  apply  to  this  Tax  Credit  Employee  Stock  Ownership   Plan.

     Additional specific terms are defined below in this Section 17.2.

           (a)  PAYSOP - This Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. Tax Credit

                Employee Stock Ownership Plan established by the Employer as 
                
                an addition to the Stock Bonus Plan.

           (b)  Tax Credit Account - The Account of a Participant which 
           
                reflects his interest under the Trust attributable to PAYSOP 
                
                contributions.

           (c)  Stock Bonus Plan - The Century Telephone Enterprises, Inc. 
           
                Stock Bonus Plan.

                                 69
<PAGE>


           (d)  PAYSOP Contributions - Employer contributions made to the 
           
                Trust by the Company pursuant to Section 17.4 of the PAYSOP.

           (e)  PAYSOP Compensation - The compensation of each Participant  
           
                within the  meaning of Section 415(e)(3)  of  the  Code  and
               
                the regulations thereunder.

     17.3  Eligibility and Participation.
           -----------------------------
           Each Participant under the Stock Bonus Plan will be eligible to 
           
     share in the allocation of PAYSOP Contributions under Section 17.4 as 
     
     of each Adjustment Date, provided that he is eligible to share in the

     allocation of Employer  Contributions  and  forfeitures as described in

     Section 4 of the Stock Bonus Plan.

     17.4  Employer Contributions.
           ----------------------
           (a)  PAYSOP Contributions shall be paid to the Trust for each Plan 
     
     Year for which the Employer elects the payroll-based  employee  stock

     ownership  credit  available under Section 41 of the Code in any amount

     not exceeding the following percentages of PAYSOP Compensation of those

     Participants eligible  to  share  in  the  allocation  of such Employer

     Contributions for that Plan Year:

                  Compensation Paid             Applicable
                During Calendar Year            Percentage
                --------------------            ----------

                       1984                        .50
                       1985                        .50
                       1986                        .50
                       1987                        .50

           (b)  PAYSOP Contributions shall be paid to the Trust not later than
           
     thirty (30) days after the due date (including  extensions)  for filing

     the  Employer's  Federal income tax return for that Plan Year.   PAYSOP

     Contributions may  be  paid  in  shares of Company Stock or in cash, as

     determined by the Employer's Board  of  Directors;  provided,  however,

     that  PAYSOP  Contributions  in  cash  shall  be used by the Trustee to

     acquire Company Stock within thirty (30) days.

           (c)  In the event that any Employer Contributions are paid to the 
           
     Trust by reasons of a mistake of fact, such contributions may be 
     
     returned to the Employer by the Trustee (upon the request of the 
     
     Employer) within one year after payment to the Trust.
     

                                 70
<PAGE>
     
     17.5  Participant's Accounts.
           ----------------------
           (a) A Tax Credit Account shall be established for each Participant 
           
     under the PAYSOP. It will be credited annually with shares of Company 
     
     Stock (including fractional shares) representing his allocable share of

     PAYSOP  Contributions,  as  well  as  Company  Stock  acquired with any

     dividends on Company Stock allocated to his Tax Credit Account (or with

     any  net  income  of  the  Trust  attributable  to  the PAYSOP).   Each

     Participant  shall  at  all  times  have a 100% vested (nonforfeitable)

     interest in the balance of his Tax Credit Account.

           The allocations to the Tax Credit Accounts of Participants for each

     Plan Year shall be made in the following manner.

           (b)  Employer Contributions - PAYSOP Contributions under Section 
           
     17.4(a) for each Plan Year will be allocated among the Tax Credit 
     
     Accounts of Participants (so entitled under Section 17.3) as of the 
     
     Adjustment Date in the ratio which the PAYSOP Compensation of each 
     
     such Participant bears to the total PAYSOP Compensation of all such  
     
     Participants for that Plan Year.  For purposes of this allocation,  
     
     however, PAYSOP Compensation of each Participant shall not exceed one 
     
     hundred thousand dollars ($100,000) for each Plan Year.

           (c)  Net Income and Dividends - Each Participant's Tax Credit 
           
     Account shall share in any net income of the Trust attributable to the 
     
     PAYSOP in the manner outlined in Section 4 of the Stock Bonus Plan.  
     
     His Tax Credit Account shall also be credited with the amount of any 
     
     dividends received on Company Stock allocated to such Tax Credit Account.
     
     All such amounts  shall be allocated as of each Adjustment Date, but 
     
     shall be reinvested in shares of Company Stock for allocation purposes.

           (d)  Allocation Limitations - The limitations outlined in Sections 
           
     4.8 and 4.9 of the Stock Bonus Plan shall be applied by including each

     Participant's  share of PAYSOP Contributions as Employer Contributions.

     In no event, however, shall the allocation of PAYSOP Contributions to a

     Participant's Tax  Credit  Account  be  reduced  to  comply  with  such

     limitation  until  after  reductions  have  been  made to Participant's

     Accounts under the Stock Bonus Plan.

                                  71
<PAGE>


           For  each  Plan  Year, no more than one-third (1/3) of the PAYSOP

     Contributions under Section 17.4(a) may be  allocated to the Tax Credit

     Accounts of Participants who are officers of the Employer, shareholders

     owning  more  than ten percent (10%) of Company  Stock,  as  determined

     under Section 415(c)(6)(B)(iv)  of  the  Code,  or  Participants  whose

     PAYSOP  Compensation  for  that Plan Year exceeds $60,000.  The $60,000

     amount shall be adjusted (after  1985)  for  increases  in  the cost of

     living, pursuant to regulations prescribed under Section 415(c)(6)  and

     (d)(1)  of  the  Code.   The  Plan  Administrator may reallocate PAYSOP

     Contributions for any Plan Year in order  to  satisfy  this  additional

     limitation in accordance with the principles of Section 4.8.

           (e)  Voting Company Stock -
                --------------------
               (i)  Each Participant shall be entitled to direct the voting 
                    rights  with respect to the shares of Company Stock owned 
                    by the PAYSOP, but only to the  extent  required  by 
                    Sections 401(a)(22) and 409(e)(3) of the Code and the 
                    regulations thereunder. The number of votes to which each
                    Participant is entitled shall be determined under (2), 
                    below. On all other  matters, the Plan Administrator need 
                    not solicit instructions from Participants. Prior to the  
                    holding of each annual or special meeting of Company 
                    shareholders,  the  Committee  will send  to  all
                    Participants  who have Company Stock in their Tax Credit  
                    Accounts the proxy statements for such meeting,together 
                    with a form to be sent to the Trustee which will indicate 
                    the  number  of  votes  to  which  the
                    Participant is entitled, and on which may be set forth  
                    each Participant's instructions as to the manner of voting 
                    the shares, including  fractional shares, of Company 
                    Stock. Upon receipt of such instructions, the Trustee  
                    will vote the Company Stock in accordance with such 
                    instructions including fractional  shares, which shares 
                    shall be aggregated  with the fractional shares of other  
                    Participants  with such accounts to  the lowest whole 
                    number thereof for the purposes of voting. All shares of 
                    Company Stock  held  by  the  Trust for which no
                    instructions have been received by the Trustee as to the  
                    manner of voting such shares five days prior to such 
                    meeting shall not be voted by the Trustee.

              (ii)  The  number  of  votes  available  to  each  
                    Participant shall be determined as follows:

                    (1)  first, the total number of votes attributable to 
                         Company Stock owned by the PAYSOP shall be 
                         determined;

                    (2)  next, the amount of votes determined under (i), 
                         above, shall be allocated to each Participant in 
                         the ratio which such Participant's 
                         
                                72
<PAGE>
                         Account balance 
                         as of the immediately preceding Valuation Date 
                         bears to the total Account Balances of all 
                         Participants as of such date.

     17.6  Expenses.
           --------
           If brokerage commissions  charged with respect to the purchase 
     
     or sale of Company Stock of the PAYSOP  exceed  the  lesser  of  the  
     
     following amounts, they shall be paid by the Employer:

           (a)  the sum of -

                (i)   10% of the first $100,000 of the dividends paid to 
                      the PAYSOP  with respect to Company Stock during the 
                      Plan Year, and

               (ii)   5% of the amount of such dividends in excess of 
               
                      $100,000, or

           (b)   $100,000.

     17.7  Distributions.
           -------------
           (a)   All distributions of benefits from a Participant's Tax 
           
     Credit Account shall be made at the same time and in the same manner 
     
     outlined in Sections 5, 6, 7 and 8 of the Stock Bonus Plan except 
     
     that the Company Stock which is actually allocated to his Tax Credit 
     
     Account shall be distributed.

           (b)   No Company Stock allocated to a Participant's Tax Credit 
           
     Account may be  distributed  before  the  end  of  the  eighty-fourth
     
     (84th) month beginning after the Adjustment Date as of which such 
     
     Company Stock is allocated  to  such  Tax  Credit  Account, except 
     
     in the event  of  his retirement, disability, death or other  
     
     termination  of  service.  This eighty-four  (84)  month  restriction  
     
     shall not apply in the  case  of certain  divisive corporate 
     
     reorganizations, as provided in Section 409(d)(2) and (3) of the Code.

     17.8  Future of the Plan.
           ------------------
           The PAYSOP  may  be  amended or terminated by the Company in 
           
     accordance with the provisions of Section 4 of the Trust. The PAYSOP 
     
     may be amended or terminated without there being an amendment or 
     
     termination   of the Stock Bonus Plan.

           The Employer specifically reserves the right to amend the PAYSOP

     retroactively in order to satisfy the applicable requirements of

     Sections 401(a) and 409 of the Code.

                                 73
<PAGE>


                                   SECTION 18

                      QUALIFIED DOMESTIC RELATIONS ORDERS

                                  DEFINITIONS

     18.1  Domestic Relations Order.
           -------------------------
           Any judgment, decree, or order (including approval of a property

     settlement agreement) that relates  to  the provision of child support,

     alimony  payments,  or  marital property rights  to  a  spouse,  former

     spouse, child or other dependent  of  a Participant, made pursuant to a

     state domestic relations law, including a community property law.

     18.2  Alternate Payee.
           ---------------
           Any spouse, former spouse, child or other dependent of a Participant

     who is recognized by a Qualified Domestic Relations Order as  having  a

     right  to  receive all, or a portion of, the benefits payable under the

     Plan with respect to a Participant.

     18.3  Qualified Domestic Relations Order.
           ----------------------------------
           A Domestic Relations Order as described in Section 414(p) of the 
           
     Code which:

          (a)   Creates or recognizes the existence of an Alternate Payee's 
          
                right to, or assigns to an Alternate Payee the right to,  
                
                receive all or a portion of the benefits payable with 
                
                respect to a Participant under the Plan; and

           (b)  Clearly specifies the following:

                (i)  the  name  and  last  known  mailing  address  
                     (if available) of the Participant and each Alternate 
                     Payee to which the order relates (unless the Plan   
                     Administrator has reason to know  such  addresses
                     independently);

               (ii)  the amount or percentage of the Participant's benefits  
                     to be paid to an Alternate Payee or the manner in 
                     which the amount is to be determined; and

              (iii)  the number of payments or period for which payments 
                     are required.

     A Qualified Domestic Relations Order does not include an order which:

                                  74     
<PAGE>     

           (a)  requires the Plan to provide any type or  form  of  benefit,  
                
                or any option, not otherwise provided under the Plan;

           (b)  requires the Plan to provide increased benefits, i.e., 
           
                provides  for  the  payment  of  benefits  in  excess  of  
                
                the  benefits  to which the Participant would be entitled 
                
                in the absence of the order; or

           (c)  requires the payment of benefits to an Alternate Payee that  
           
                are required to be paid to another Alternate Payee under  
                
                a  previously existing Qualified Domestic Relations Order.

                                   PROCEDURES

     18.4  Notice.
           ------
           Upon receipt of a Domestic Relations Order, the Plan Administrator
     
     shall promptly  notify the Participant and any Alternate  Payee  of

     receipt of the order  and of the Plan's procedures  for determining

     whether the order is a Qualified Domestic Relations Order.

     18.5  Determination of Qualification.
           ------------------------------
           Within a reasonable period of time after receipt of the order (as

     defined in regulations to be prescribed by the Secretary of Labor), the

     Plan  Administrator shall determine whether the order is qualified  and

     notify the Participant and any Alternate Payee of such determination.

     18.6  Deferral of Payment.
           -------------------
           During any time period during which the issue of whether a Domestic
     
     Relations Order is qualified  is  being  determined,  any  amount which

     would  be payable pursuant to the terms of the order shall be  deferred

     and the amounts so payable will be segregated into a separate account.

     18.7  Payment after Deferral.
           ----------------------
           If, within eighteen (18) months after payment is deferred in 
           
     accordance with Section 18.6, the Plan Administrator determines that 
     
     the Domestic Relations Order is qualified, the amounts segregated 
     
     into the separate  accounts,  plus earnings  thereon,  shall  be  paid  
     
     to  the  Alternate  Payee(s) specified  in  the  order, 
     
                                 75
<PAGE>

     
     in accordance 
     
     with the terms of the order (subject, however, to the  provisions  of  
     
     Code  Section 414 (p), this Section 18 and other applicable provisions 
     
     of the Plan).

     18.8  Payments after Eighteen Months.
           ------------------------------
           If, after eighteen (18) months have elapsed after the deferral of

     benefits pursuant to Section 18.6, the  Plan  Administrator  determines

     that the order is qualified, the Plan Administrator shall make payments

     pursuant   to   the   order;  however,  such  payments  shall  be  made

     prospectively only, and any amounts segregated into the special account

     for periods before the  determination that the order is qualified shall

     be paid to the person or persons who would have received the amounts if

     the  order  had  not been issued.   Neither  the  Plan,  nor  the  Plan

     Administrator, shall  be liable for payments to any Alternate Payee for

     any period before the order is determined to be qualified.

     18.9  Payments under Qualified Domestic Relations Order.
           -------------------------------------------------
           Payments may made to an Alternate Payee prior to coincident with, 
           
     or after Participant's termination of employment if made pursuant to a

     Qualified  Domestic  Relations  Order.   A distribution to an Alternate

     Payee may be made out of a Participant's Account  on  a date coincident

     with  the  Participant's  "earliest  retirement  age," defined  as  the

     earlier  of  (i)  the date on which the Participant is  entitled  to  a

     distribution under  the  Plan,  or  (ii)  the later of (A) the date the

     Participant  attains  age 50, or (B) the earliest  date  on  which  the

     Participant could begin  receiving  benefits  under  the Plan if he had

     separated from service.  In addition, this Plan specifically authorizes

     distributions  to  an  Alternate  Payee  under  a  Qualified   Domestic

     Relations  Order  prior to the Participant's attainment of the earliest

     retirement age (as defined above and in Section 414(p) of the Code) but

     only if:  (1) the order  specifies  distribution at the earlier date or

     permits  an  agreement  between  the  Plan   and  the  Alternate  Payee

     authorizing  an  earlier  distribution;  and  (2) the  Alternate  Payee

     consents  to  a  distribution  prior  to  the  Participant's   earliest

     retirement  age  if  the  present value of the Alternate Payee benefits

     under  the Plan exceeds $3,500.   Nothing  in  this  Section  18  shall

     provide  a Participant with a right to receive a distribution at a time

     not 
     
                                  76
<PAGE>
     
     otherwise  permitted  under  the  Plan,  nor  shall  it provide the

     Alternate Payee with a right to receive a form of payment not permitted

     under the Plan.

     18.10 Non-qualification.
           -----------------
           If the Plan Administrator determines that the order is not  
           
     qualified, or if eighteen (18) months have expired since deferral of 
     
     benefits, the Plan Administrator shall pay the amounts segregated 
     
     pursuant to Section 18.6 above to the person or persons who would have 
     
     received the amounts if the order had not been issued.

     18.11 Effective Dates.
           ---------------
           The provisions  of this Section 18 shall be effective for orders 
           
     issued on or after January 1, 1985; however, the Plan Administrator 
     
     may treat any order issued before  such  date  as  a Qualified Domestic 
     
     Relations Order if it otherwise meets the requirements of this Section  
     
     18.  Additionally, the  Plan  Administrator shall treat a Domestic 
     
     Relations Order received before January 1, 1985 as a Qualified Domestic 
     
     Relations Order to the extent payments are being made pursuant to 
     
     the order.

                                  77
<PAGE>
                                   
                                SECTION 19

                    AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION OF PLAN

                          ASSIGNMENT OF BENEFITS

     19.1  Amendment.
           ---------
         The Employer shall have the right at any time, and from time to 
         
     time, to amend, in whole or in part, any or all of the provisions of the

     Plan.  However, no such amendment shall authorize or permit any part of

     the  Trust  Fund  (other than such part as is required to pay taxes and

     administration expenses)  to  be used for or diverted to purposes other

     than  for  the  exclusive  benefit   of   the   Participants  or  their

     beneficiaries  or estates.  Any such amendment shall  become  effective

     upon the adoption thereof by an appropriate written instrument executed

     by order of the  Board  of  Directors or upon such later date as may be

     specified in such instrument  provided that any amendment affecting the

     powers and duties of the Trustee  shall not be effective until the date

     it is accepted in writing by the Trustee.

           No amendment to the Plan shall be effective to the extent that 
           
     it has the effect of decreasing a Participant's accrued  benefit.

     Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, a Participant's Account balance

     may  be reduced to the extent permitted under Section 412(c)(8) of  the

     Code.   For  purposes of this paragraph, a Plan amendment which has the

     effect of decreasing  a Participant's Account balance or eliminating an

     optional form of benefit  with  respect  to  benefits  attributable  to

     service  before  the  amendment shall be treated as reducing an accrued

     benefit.  Furthermore,  if the vesting schedule of the Plan is amended,

     in the case of an Employee  who is a Participant as of the later of the

     date such amendment is adopted  or  the  date it becomes effective, the

     nonforfeitable  percentage  (determined  as  of   such  date)  of  such

     Employee's right to his Employer-derived accrued benefit  will  not  be

     less than his percentage computed under the Plan without regard to such

     amendment.

     19.2  Termination; Discontinuance of Contributions.
           --------------------------------------------
           The Employer shall have the right at any time to terminate this

     agreement and  the  Trust hereby created.  Such termination  shall  be

     effective upon execution by the Employer of an appropriate instrument

                                 78
<PAGE>

     terminating the Plan and Trust  as authorized by the Board of Directors

     or upon such later date as may be specified in such instrument.  A copy

     of such instrument shall be delivered to the Trustee.

         Upon termination or partial termination of the Plan by any method, 
         
     the Regular Accounts of all Participants shall become fully vested and 
     
     the Plan Administrator shall direct the Trustee to distribute all assets

     remaining  in  the Plan to Participants, their beneficiaries or estates

     in the ratio of the Participants' Account balances in the Plan.

           In the event the Employer completely discontinues contributions 
           
     for a fixed or indeterminate period, but without terminating this Plan, 
     
     the Regular Accounts of Participants shall be completely vested  and

     nonforfeitable at the values determined  by the Trustee as of the close

     of  the  year  in  which  contributions have been  suspended,  and  all

     adjustments in Participant's  Accounts  thereafter made under the terms

     of  the  Plan and Trust with respect to the  amounts  so  vested  shall

     similarly  be  completely  vested  in  favor of each Participant but no

     distribution shall be made of any Account  except on actual termination

     of the Plan or the occurrence of any of the  events  stated in Sections

     5, 6, and 7 and then only in the manner provided in such Sections.

     19.3  Assignment of Benefits.
           ----------------------
           No benefit or interest available hereunder will be subject to

     assignment  or  alienation,  either  voluntarily or involuntarily.  The

     interest of each Participant or beneficiary  shall  be  held subject to

     the maximum restraint on alienation permitted or required by applicable

     Louisiana or Federal law.  The preceding sentences shall  also apply to

     the  creation,  assignment,  or  recognition of a right to any  benefit

     payable with respect to a Participant  pursuant to a Domestic Relations

     Order,  unless  such order is determined to  be  a  Qualified  Domestic

     Relations Order, as defined in Section 414(p) of the Code.

                                    79
<PAGE>                                   
                                  THE TRUST

                               TRUST SECTION 1

                                    TRUSTEE

     1.1   Establishment and Acceptance of Trust.
           -------------------------------------
           The Trustee shall receive any contributions paid to it in cash, or

     other property approved by the Plan Administrator for acceptance by the

     Trustee.   All  contributions  so  received  together  with the  income

     therefrom (herein called the "Trust Fund") shall be held,  managed, and

     administered  in  Trust  pursuant to the terms of this Agreement.   The

     Trustee  hereby accepts the  Trust  created  hereunder  and  agrees  to

     perform the  duties  under  this Agreement on its part to be performed.

     The assets of the trust will be valued annually at fair market value as

     of the last day of the Plan Year.   On  such  date,  the  earnings  and

     losses  of the Trust will be allocated to each Participant's account in

     the ratio that such Account balance bears to all Account balances.

     1.2   Investment of Trust Fund.
           ------------------------
           The Trustee shall invest and reinvest the principal and income of 
           
     the Trust Fund and keep the Trust Fund invested, without distinction

     between principal  and  income.   All contributions shall be applied by

     the Trustee to pay for shares of Company  Stock  purchased by the Trust

     under the Stock Bonus Plan and the PAYSOP under the  direction  of  the

     Plan Administrator.

           Subject to the provisions of ERISA Section 404, as additional 
           
     shares of Company Stock become available and subject to the direction 
     
     of the Plan Administrator, funds, as they become available, shall be 
     
     used for the purpose of purchasing such shares.

           This Plan is designed to  invest  primarily  in  Company Stock, 
           
     and the investment policy of this Plan is to so invest. To the extent  
     
     funds remain  after acquiring available Company Stock and until other 
     
     Company Stock becomes available, subject to the direction of the Plan

     Administrator, the  Trustee  may  invest  in such securities or in such

     property, real or personal, wherever situated,  as  the  Trustee  shall

     deem  advisable,  including,  but  not  limited  to,  stocks, common or

     preferred, bonds and mortgages, and 
     
                                  80   
<PAGE>
     
     other evidences of  indebtedness or

     ownership.  In making such investments, the Trustee shall be restricted

     to  securities  or  other  property  of  the  character  authorized  by

     applicable law from time to time for trust investments.

     1.3   Powers of Trustee.
           -----------------
           The Trustee shall have the following powers and authority in the

     administration of the Trust Fund:


           (a)  Purchase of Property.
                --------------------
                To purchase or subscribe for any  securities  or  
                
                other property and to  retain the same in trust.

           (b)  Sale, Exchange, Conveyance and Transfer of Property.
                ---------------------------------------------------
                To  sell,  exchange,  convey,  transfer,  or otherwise 
                
                dispose  of  any  securities  or other property 
                
                held by it, by  private  contract  or  at  public auction.   
                
                No  person dealing with the Trustee shall be bound to

                see to the application  of  the  purchase  money or to 
                
                inquire into the validity, expediency, or propriety  of  
                
                any  such   sale   or  other disposition.

           (c)  Exercise of Owner's and Voting Rights.
                -------------------------------------
                To  vote  any  stocks,  bonds  or other securities; to give 
                
                general  or special  proxies  or  powers  of attorney  with  
                
                or  without  power  of substitution;  to  exercise  any  
                
                conversion  privileges,  subscription rights, or other 
                
                options, and to make  any payments incidental thereto;

                to  oppose, or to consent to, or otherwise  participate  in,  
                
                corporate  reorganizations  or  other  changes affecting 
                
                the corporate securities, and to delegate discretionary  
                
                powers,  and  to  pay any assessments or charges in 
                
                connection therewith; and generally to  exercise  any of the

                powers  of an owner with respect to stocks, bonds, securities 
                
                or  other property  held  as  part  of  the  Trust  Fund.  
                
                The Trustee shall vote  Company Stock held in the Plan 
                
                in accordance  with  Section  17 and the  instructions of 
                
                the Plan Administrator.

                                  81   
<PAGE>


           (d)  Registration of Investments.
                ---------------------------
                To  cause  any  securities or other property held as part of 
                
                the  Trust Fund to be registered  in its own name or in the 
                
                name of one or more of its nominees, and to hold any 
                
                investments in bearer form, but the books and records of the 
                
                Trustee shall at all times show that all such investments 
                
                are a part of the Trust Fund.

           (e)  Borrowing and Lending.
                ---------------------
                To borrow or raise money for the purposes of the Trust in 
                
                such amount, and upon such terms and conditions, as the Trustee 
           
                shall  deem advisable;  and,  for any sum so borrowed, to issue 
           
                its promissory note as Trustee, and to secure the repayment 
           
                thereof by pledging all, or any part, of the Trust  Fund; and  
                
                no person lending money to the Trustee shall  be bound to see 
                
                to the  application  of  the  money  lent  or  to inquire  
                
                into  the validity,  expediency  or  propriety  of  any  
                
                such borrowing.

           (f)  Retention of Cash.
                -----------------
                Subject  to  the  direction  of  the  Plan  Administrator, 
                
                to keep such portion of the Trust Fund in cash or cash 
                
                balances  as the Trustee may, from  time  to  time,  deem  
                
                to be in the best interests of  the  Trust  created hereby.

          (g)   Execution of Instruments.
                ------------------------
                To make, execute, acknowledge,  and  deliver  any  and all 
                
                documents of transfer and conveyance and any and all other 
                
                instruments  that  may be necessary or appropriate to carry 
                
                out the powers herein granted.

           (h)  Settlement of Claims and Debts.
                ------------------------------
                To settle, compromise, or submit to arbitration any claims, 
                
                debts  or damages due or  owing  to  or  from  the Trust Fund, 
                
                and to commence or defend suits or legal or administrative 
                
                proceedings.

                                   82  
 <PAGE>

           (i)  Employment of Agents and Counsel.
                --------------------------------
                To employ suitable agents and counsel (who may also 
                
                be counsel for the Employer), and to pay their reasonable 
                
                expenses and compensation.

           (j)  Power to do any Necessary Act.
                -----------------------------
                To do all such acts, take all such proceedings, and exercise 
                
                all such rights and privileges, although not specifically 
                
                mentioned  herein,  as the  Trustee  may  deem  necessary 
                
                to administer the Trust Fund, and to carry out the purposes 
                
                of this Trust.

     1.4   Payments from the Trust.
           -----------------------
           The Trustee shall from time to time, on the written directions of 
           
     the Committee, make payments out of the Trust Fund to such persons, in 
     
     such manner, in such amounts, and for such  purposes  as may be 
     
     specified in  the  written directions of the Committee, and upon  any  
     
     payment  being  made, the amount thereof shall no longer constitute a 
     
     part of the Trust Fund. Each such written direction shall be accompanied  
     
     by a certificate of the Committee that the payment is in accordance with 
     
     the Plan. The Trustee shall not be responsible in any way for the

     application  of  such payments or for the adequacy of the Trust Fund to

     discharge any and all liabilities under the Plan.

     1.5   Payment of Compensation, Expenses and Taxes.
           -------------------------------------------
           The Trustee shall be paid by the Employer such reasonable 
           
     compensation as shall from time to  time  be agreed upon by the 
     
     Employer and the Trustee. In addition, the Trustee shall be reimbursed  
     
     by the Employer for any reasonable  expenses, including reasonable 
     
     counsel fees, incurred  by it in the administration of the Trust Fund.  
     
     All taxes  of any and all  kinds whatsoever that may be levied or assessed 
     
     under existing or future laws upon, or in respect of, the Trust Fund or 
     
     the income thereof shall be paid by the Employer. Nevertheless, if the

     Employer refuses to  make such payments, such compensation and expenses

     may be made from the Trust Fund.

                                 83
<PAGE>


     1.6   Accounting.
           ----------
           The Trustee shall keep accurate and detailed accounts of all

     investments, receipts, disbursements, and other transactions hereunder.

     All accounts, books and records relating  to such transactions shall be

     open for inspection and audit at all reasonable  times  by  any  person

     designated by the Plan Administrator.

           Within one hundred thirty-five (135) days following the close of 
           
     each fiscal year of the Trust and within sixty (60) days after the 
     
     removal or resignation of the Trustee as provided in Section 1.7 hereof, 
     
     the Trustee  shall  file  with  the Plan Administrator a written account

     setting forth all investments, receipts, disbursements, and other

     transactions effected  by  it  during  such  fiscal  year or during the

     period  from  the  close  of the last fiscal year to the date  of  such

     removal or resignation, and  setting  forth  the  current  value of the

     Trust Fund.

     1.7   Removal, Resignation and Appointment of Successor Trustee.
           ---------------------------------------------------------
           The Trustee may be removed by the Employer at any time upon ten (10)

     days'  notice in writing to the Trustee.  The Trustee may resign at any

     time upon  ten (10) days' notice in writing to the Employer.  Upon such

     removal or resignation  of  the  Trustee,  the Employer shall appoint a

     successor Trustee who shall have the same powers  and  duties  as those

     conferred   upon  the  Trustee  hereunder.   Upon  acceptance  of  such

     appointment  by  the  successor  Trustee,  the  Trustee  shall  assign,

     transfer, and  pay  over  to  such  successor  Trustee  the  funds  and

     properties   then   constituting   the  Trust  Fund.   The  Trustee  is

     authorized, however, to reserve such  sum  of  money,  as  it  may deem

     advisable, for payment of its fees and expenses in connection with  the

     settlement  of  its  account or otherwise which the Employer refuses to

     pay, and any balance of  such  reserve  remaining  after the payment of

     such fees and expenses shall be paid over to the successor Trustee.

                                 84
<PAGE>

                                TRUST SECTION 2

                            FIDUCIARY RESPONSIBILITY

      2.1  Fiduciary Duties.
           ----------------
           The Trustee shall discharge its duties with the care, skill, 
           
     prudence, and diligence under the circumstances then prevailing that a  
     
     prudent man acting in a like capacity and familiar with such matters 
     
     would use in the conduct of an enterprise of like character and with 
     
     like aims, by diversifying the investments of the Plan so as to minimize 
     
     the risk of large losses, unless under the circumstances it is clearly 
     
     prudent not to do so, and in accordance with the Plan and Trust 
     
     provisions insofar as the provisions thereof are consistent with the 
     
     provisions of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974.

     2.2   Location of Assets.
           ------------------
           The Trustee may not  maintain the indicia of ownership of any 
           
     assets of the Plan outside the jurisdiction of the courts of the United 
     
     States.

     2.3   Deposits with Trustee.
           ---------------------
           The investment of all or part of the Plan's assets in demand 
           
     deposits and in deposits which bear a reasonable rate of interest in  
     
     the commercial banking department of the corporate Trustee is hereby

     expressly authorized.

     2.4   Common Trust Fund.
           -----------------
           Notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, the 
           
     Trustee  may cause  any  part  or  all  of the cash properly held by 
     
     the Trust to be invested as a part of any common  trust  fund  created 
     
     by the corporate Trustee  or  any  other  bank.   The bank shall not 
     
     receive  more  than reasonable compensation for its services in 
     
     operating and administering the common trust funds.

     2.5   Prohibited Transactions by Trustee.
           ----------------------------------
           A fiduciary under this Plan and Trust shall not:

           (a)  Deal with the assets of the Plan for its own account;

                                  85    
<PAGE>

     (b)   Act in any capacity in any transaction involving the Plan on 
     
           behalf of a party whose interests are adverse to the Plan or 
           
           its Participants; or

     (c)   Receive any consideration from any party in connection with any

           transaction involving Plan assets (other than for its compensation 
           
           and expenses as provided for herein).

     2.6   Party in Interest and Disqualified Person Transactions.
           ------------------------------------------------------
           A fiduciary of the Plan shall not cause the Plan to engage in a

     transaction,   if  he  knows  or  should  know  that  such  transaction

     constitutes a direct or indirect:

           (a)  Sale, exchange  or lease of property between the Plan and 
                
                a party in interest;

           (b)  Loan or extension of credit between the Plan and a party  
                
                in interest;

           (c)  Furnishing  of  goods, services or facilities between 
            
                the Plan and a party in interest;

           (d)  Transfer to, or use by or for the benefit of, a party in 
           
                interest of any assets of the Plan, or from the Plan; or

           (e)  An acquisition of Employer securities or real estate in 
           
                violation of Section 407(a) of the Employee Retirement 
                
                Income Security Act of 1974.

           Nothing in this paragraph shall restrict the Trustee in investing 
           
     funds in common trust funds  maintained  by it or from maintaining 
     
     demand, savings or time deposits in its commercial banking  department  
     
     or from providing  other ancillary services as defined in Section 
     
     408(b)(6)  of the Employee  Retirement  Income  Security  Act of 1974.  
     
     Nor shall the Trustee be prevented from borrowing funds from  its  
     
     commercial department  for  the  purposes  of  covering  overdrafts  
     
     in its demand account or to permit payments to Participants without 
     
     the necessity for immediate liquidation of assets.

     2.7   Intent of Trust.
           ---------------
           The provisions of this Trust are intended to comply with the  
           
     fiduciary responsibility  requirements of the Employee Retirement 
     
     Income Security Act of 1974 and no provision herein shall be construed 
     
     to authorize the Trustee to violate  any  of  the fiduciary 
     
     responsibility or prohibited transaction provisions of that  Act.   
     
     Any  provision  herein  which is contrary  to the provisions of that 
     
     Act shall be considered not 

                                 86
<PAGE>
     
     written and any provision  required  to  
     
     be  written into the Plan and Trust by that Act which is not expressly 
     
     provided  for  in  this  instrument  is hereby  incorporated herein  
     
     by reference and shall be just as binding upon the Trustee 
     
     as if it were expressly written herein.  In order that this Plan 
     
     and Trust may expressly  comply  with  that  Act,  it  may be

     amended retroactively.

                                87
<PAGE>
                                TRUST SECTION 3

                               SPENDTHRIFT CLAUSE

     3.1   Restrictions on Alienation.
           --------------------------
           No benefit or interest available hereunder will be  subject  to

     alienation  or  assignment,  either  voluntary  or involuntary, and the

     interest of each Participant or beneficiary shall  be  held  subject to

     the maximum restraint on alienation permitted or required by applicable

     Mississippi or Federal law.

     3.2    Qualified Domestic Relations Order.
            ----------------------------------
            Section 3.1 shall also apply to the creation, assignment,  or

     recognition of a  right  to  any  benefit  payable  with  respect  to a

     Participant  pursuant  to a Domestic Relations Order, unless such order

     is determined to be a Qualified Domestic Relations Order, as defined in

     Section 414(p) of the Code.

                                 88
<PAGE>

                                TRUST SECTION 4

                       AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION OF TRUST

     4.1   Amendment.
           ---------
     
           The Employer shall have the right at any time, and from time to 
           
     time, to amend, in whole or in part, any or all of the provisions of 
     
     this Trust. However, no such amendment shall authorize or permit any part

     of the Trust Fund (other than such part as is required to pay taxes and

     administration  expenses) to be used for or diverted to purposes  other

     than  for  the  exclusive   benefit   of  the  Participants  and  their

     beneficiaries or estates.  Any such amendment  shall  become  effective

     upon the adoption thereof by appropriate written instrument executed by

     order  of  the  Board  of  Directors or upon such later date as may  be

     specified in such instrument  provided that any amendment affecting the

     powers and duties of the Trustee  shall not be effective until the date

     it is accepted in writing by the Trustee.

     4.2   Termination; Discontinuance of Contributions.
           --------------------------------------------
           The Employer shall have the right at any time to terminate the Trust

     hereby created.  Such termination shall be effective  upon execution by

     the  Employer  of  an appropriate instrument terminating the  Plan  and

     Trust as authorized  by  the Board of Directors or upon such later date

     as may be specified in such  instrument.   A  copy  of  such instrument

     shall be delivered to the Trustee.

           Upon termination or partial termination of the Trust by any method, 
           
     the Plan Administrator shall direct the Trustee to distribute all assets

     remaining  in  the Plan to Participants, their beneficiaries or estates

     in the ratio of the Participants' Account balances in the Plan.

                                89
<PAGE>


          THUS DONE AND SIGNED on the day first above shown, in the presence 
          
     of the undersigned competent witnesses, who hereunto sign their names 
     
     with the said appearers and me, Notary after reading of the whole.


     WITNESSES:                        CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.

     /S/ Merrie D. Rachal                  /S/ R. Stewart Ewing, Jr.
     ____________________              By:__________________________
                                          R. Stewart Ewing, Jr.,  
                                          Senior Vice-President and      
     /S/ Carol P. Caruso                  Chief Financial Officer
    _____________________

                        /S/  G. Robert Collier
                       ___________________________
                              NOTARY PUBLIC
                   

                                90

                                                                   EXHIBIT 11
                      CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC.
                      COMPUTATIONS OF EARNINGS PER SHARE
                                 (UNAUDITED)

                                                         Three months
                                                        ended March 31
                                                        --------------
                                                        1995      1994
                                                       ------    ------
                                                  (Dollars, except per share
                                                     amounts, and shares
                                                    expressed in thousands)


    Net income                                        $27,000    19,201
    Dividends applicable to preferred stock               (29)      (13)
                                                       ------    ------
    Net income applicable to common stock              26,971    19,188
    Dividends applicable to preferred stock                29        13

    Interest on 6% convertible debentures,
      net of taxes                                        526     1,146
                                                       ------    ------
    Net income as adjusted for purposes of
      computing fully diluted earnings per
      share                                           $27,526    20,347
                                                       ======    ======
    Weighted average number of shares:
       Outstanding during period                       55,922    52,296
       Common stock equivalent shares                     655       521
       Employee Stock Ownership Plan shares not
         committed to be released                        (393)        -
                                                       ------    ------
    Number of shares for computing primary
      earnings per share                               56,184    52,817

    Incremental common shares attributable
      to additional dilutive effect of
      convertible securities                            2,476     4,661
                                                       ------    ------
    Number of shares as adjusted for purposes
      of computing fully diluted earnings
      per share                                        58,660    57,478
                                                       ======    ======
    Earnings per average common share                 $   .48       .37
                                                       ======    ======
    Primary earnings per share                        $   .48       .36
                                                       ======    ======
    Fully diluted earnings per share                  $   .47       .35
                                                       ======    ======




<TABLE> <S> <C>

<ARTICLE> 5
<LEGEND>
THIS SCHEDULE CONTAINS SUMMARY FINANCIAL INFORMATION EXTRACTED FROM THE UNAUDIT-
ED CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET OF CENTURY TELEPHONE ENTERPRISES, INC. & SUBSID-
IARIES AS OF MARCH 31, 1995 & THE RELATED UNAUDITED CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS
OF INCOME, STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY & CASH FLOWS FOR THE THREE-MONTH PERIOD THEN
ENDED & IS QUALIFIED IN ITS ENTIRETY BY REFERENCE TO SUCH FINANCIAL STATEMENTS.
</LEGEND>
<MULTIPLIER> 1000
       
<S>                             <C>
<PERIOD-TYPE>                   3-MOS
<FISCAL-YEAR-END>                          DEC-31-1995
<PERIOD-START>                             JAN-01-1995
<PERIOD-END>                               MAR-31-1995
<CASH>                                          10,599
<SECURITIES>                                         0
<RECEIVABLES>                                   41,383
<ALLOWANCES>                                     2,216
<INVENTORY>                                      6,363
<CURRENT-ASSETS>                                78,490
<PP&E>                                       1,379,260
<DEPRECIATION>                                 394,363
<TOTAL-ASSETS>                               1,692,151
<CURRENT-LIABILITIES>                          284,205
<BONDS>                                        427,022
<COMMON>                                        58,318
                                0
                                      2,268
<OTHER-SE>                                     728,462
<TOTAL-LIABILITY-AND-EQUITY>                 1,692,151
<SALES>                                              0
<TOTAL-REVENUES>                               142,425
<CGS>                                                0
<TOTAL-COSTS>                                   94,869
<OTHER-EXPENSES>                                     0
<LOSS-PROVISION>                                     0
<INTEREST-EXPENSE>                              11,396
<INCOME-PRETAX>                                 45,695
<INCOME-TAX>                                    18,695
<INCOME-CONTINUING>                             27,000
<DISCONTINUED>                                       0
<EXTRAORDINARY>                                      0
<CHANGES>                                            0
<NET-INCOME>                                    27,000
<EPS-PRIMARY>                                     0.48
<EPS-DILUTED>                                     0.47
        

</TABLE>


© 2022 IncJournal is not affiliated with or endorsed by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission